United States Office of Research and
Environmental Protection Development
Agency ' Washington DC 20460
EPA/620/R-97/001
June 1997
Surf ace Waters
Field Operations
Manual for Lakes
Environmental Monitoring and
Assessment Program
-------
-------
EPA/620/R-97/001
June 1997
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND ASSESSMENT PROGRAM
SURFACE WATERS
FIELD OPERATIONS MANUAL FOR LAKES
Edited by ,
John R. Baker, David V. Peck1, and Donna W. Sutton
Lockheed Environmental Systems & Technologies Co.
Las Vegas, Nevada 89119
Contract No. 68-CO-0049
1 Current Address: U.S. EPA, National Health and Environmental Effects Research Laboratory,
Western Ecology Division, Corvallis, Oregon
Work Assignment Manager
S. A. Peterson
National Health and Environmental Effects Research Laboratory
Western Ecology Division
Corvallis, Oregon 97333
S. G. Paulsen, Technical Director
Surface Waters Resource Group
National Health and Environmental Effects Research Laboratory
Western Ecology Division
Corvallis, Oregon 97333
WESTERN ECOLOGY DIVISION
NATIONAL HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL EFFECTS RESEARCH LABORATORY
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
CORVALLIS, OREGON 97333
CHARACTERIZATION RESEARCH DIVISION
NATIONAL EXPOSURE RESEARCH LABORATORY
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
LAS VEGAS, NEVADA 89193-3478
ECOLOGICAL EXPOSURE RESEARCH DIVISION
NATIONAL EXPOSURE RESEARCH LABORATORY
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
CINCINNATI, OHIO 45219
Printed on Recycled Paper
-------
NOTICE
This research has been funded wholly or in part by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
through its Office of Research and Development (ORD) and was conducted with research partners
under the management of the Western Ecology Division, Corvallis, Oregon, the Characterization
Research Division, Las Vegas, Nevada, and the Ecological Exposure Research Division, Cincinnati,
Ohio under the following contracts and cooperative agreements:
Contract 68-CO-0049 to Lockheed Environmental Systems and Technologies Co., Inc.
Contract 68-C8-0006 to ManTech Environmental Technology, Inc.
Contract 68-C1-0022 to Technology Applications, Inc.
Cooperative Agreements CR818606 and CR816721 to Oregon State University
Cooperative Agreements CR819658 and CR818179 to the University of Maine-Orono
Cooperative Agreement CR814701 to the University of Nevada-Las Vegas
Cooperative Agreement CR818707 to Queens University
Cooperative Agreement CR819689-01-0 to Dartmouth College
This work is in support of the Environmental Monitoring and Assessment Program. It has been
subjected to the Agency's peer and administrative review, and it has been approved for publication as
an EPA document. Neither the EPA nor ORD endorses or recommends any trade name or
commercial product mentioned in this report. The products are mentioned solely for the purpose of
description or clarification.
The correct citation for this document is:
Baker, John R., David V. Peck, and Donna W. Sutton (editors). 1997. Environmental
Monitoring and Assessment Program Surface Waters: Field Operations Manual for Lakes.
EPA/620/R-97/001. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, D.C.
Section authors are:
Section 1: S. G. Paulsen1, John R. Baker2, and Donna W. Sutton2
Section 2: John R. Baker2 and David V. Peck3
Section 3: Glenn D. Merritt4, Victoria C. Rogers5, and David V. Peck3
Section 4: John R. Baker2 and David V. Peck3
U.S. EPA, Western Ecology Division, Corvallis, Oregon.
Lockheed Environmental Systems & Technologies Co., Las Vegas, Nevada.
Lockheed Environmental Systems & Technologies Co., now with U.S. EPA, Western Ecology
Division, Corvallis, Oregon.
Lockheed Environmental Systems & Technologies Co., now with Washington Department of
Ecology, Olympia, Washington.
Lockheed Environmental Systems & Technologies Co., now with Linn-Benton Community
College, Albany, Oregon
-------
Section 5: Philip R. Kaufmann6 and Thomas R. Whittier7
Section 6: Thomas R. Whittier7, Peter Vaux8, and Roger B. Yeardley9
Section 7: John R. Baker2, Alan T. Herlihy6, Sushil S. Dixit10, and Richard Stemberger11
Section 8: Wesley L. Kinney12, R. O. Brinkhurst13, Thomas R. Whittier7, and David V. Peck3
Section 9: Alan T. Herlihy6
Appendix A: RJ. O'Connor14 and A.K. Moors14
10
12
13
Dept. Of Fisheries and Wildlife, Oregon State University, Corvallis, Oregon
ManTech Environmental Technology, Inc., now with Dynamac, Inc., Corvallis, Oregon.
Environmental Research Center, University of Nevada, Las Vegas, Nevada
Technology Applications, Inc., now with DynCorp, Cincinnati, Ohio.
Department of Biology, Queens University, Kingston, Ontario, Canada
Department of Biology, Dartmouth College, Hanover, New Hampshire
U.S. EPA , Characterization Research Division, Las Vegas, Nevada (retired).
Aquatic Resources Center, Franklin, Tennessee
Department of Wildlife Ecology, University of Maine, Orono, Maine
in
-------
ABSTRACT
The methods and instructions for field operations presented in this manual for lake
surveys were developed and tested through 4 years of pilot and demonstration projects from
1991 through 1994. These projects were conducted under the sponsorship of the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency and its collaborators through the Environmental Monitoring
and Assessment Program (EMAP). This program focuses on evaluating ecological
conditions on regional and national scales. This document describes procedures for
collecting data, samples, and information about biotic assemblages, environmental
measures, or attributes of indicators of lake ecosystem condition. The procedures presented
in this manual were developed based on standard or accepted methods, modified as
necessary to adapt them to EMAP sampling requirements. In addition to methodology,
additional information on data management and other logistical aspects is integrated into the
procedures and overall operational scenario. Procedures are described for collecting
chlorophyl a, water, sedimentary diatoms, and zooplankton data in conjunction with the
development of standard methods to obtain acceptable index samples for macrobenthos,
fish assemblage, fish tissue contaminants, riparian birds, and physical habitat structure. The
manual describes field implementation of these methods and the logistical foundation
constructed during field projects. The manual includes flow charts with overall summaries of
specific field activities required to visit a lake site and collect data for these indicators.
Tables give step-by-step protocol instructions. These figures and tables can be extracted
and bound separately to make a convenient quick field reference for field teams. The
manual also includes example field data forms for recording measurements and
observations made in the field and sample tracking information. Checklists of all supplies
and equipment needed for each field task are included to help ensure that these materials
are available when required.
IV
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Page
Notice ii
Abstract iv
Figures • ix
Tables , xi
Acknowledgments xiii
Acronyms and Abbreviations xiv
Section
1 INTRODUCTION by S. G. Paulsen, John R. Baker, Sushil S. Dixit,
Philip R. Kaufmann, Wesley L Kinney, Richard Stemberger,
Donna W. Sutton, Thomas R. Whittier, and Roger B. Yeardley 1-1
1.1 Overview of EMAP Surface Waters 1-1
1.2 Synopsis of the Lake Sampling Component of EMAP Surface Waters 1-4
1.3 Indicator Summary 1-6
1.3.1 Physical Habitat .1-6
1.3.2 Fish Assemblage •'. 1-7
1.3.3 Fish Tissue Contaminants 1-8
1.3.4 Water Chemistry and Associated Measurements 1-9
1.3.5 Zooplankton 1-10
1.3.6 Sediment Diatoms — 1-11
1.3.7 Benthrc Invertebrate Assemblages 1-12
1.3.8 Lake Assessment or Site Characteristics 1-14
1.3.9 Riparian Bird Assemblage 1-14
1.4 Objectives and Scope of the Field Operations Manual 1-14
1.5 References 1-16
2 DAILY OPERATIONS SUMMARY by John R. Baker and David V. Peck.......;.. 2-1
2.1 Sampling Scenario 2-1
2.2 Recording Data and Other Information 2-6
3 BASE SITE ACTIVITIES by Glenn D. Merritt, Victoria C. Rogers, and David V. Peck 3-1
3.1 Predeparture Activities 3-1
3.1.1 Daily Itineraries 3-1
3.1.2 Instrument Checks and Calibration 3-3
3.1.3 Equipment Preparation 3-5
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Section
Page
3.2 Postsampling Activities 3.7
3.2.1 Equipment Cleanup and Check 3-7
3.2.2 Shipment of Samples and Forms .... 3-10
3.2.3 Communications 3-14
4 LAKE VERIFICATION AND INDEX SITE LOCATION by John R. Baker and
David V. Peck 4.1
4.1 Lake Verification at the Launch Site 4-1
4.2 Lake Verification at the Index Site Location 4-7
4.3 Equipment and Supply List 4.7
5 HABITAT ASSESSMENT by Philip R. Kaufmann and Thomas R. Whittier 5-1
5.1 Temperature and Dissolved Oxygen 5-1
5.1.1 Calibration of the Dissolved Oxygen Meter 5-1
5.1.2 Index Site Conditions and Lake Profile Measurements 5-5
5.2 Shoreline Physical Habitat Characterization 5-8
5.2.1 Locating Each Physical Habitat Station and Defining the Shoreline
Boundary 5-8
5.2.2 Physical Habitat Characterization Form and Instructions 5-12
5.2.3 Riparian and Littoral Macrohabitat Characteristics and Mapping 5-21
5.3 Equipment and Supply List 5-25
6 FISH SAMPLING by Thomas R. Whittier, Peter Vaux, and Roger B. Yeardley 6-1
6.1 Physical Habitat Descriptions 6-1
6.2 Selecting Fishing Sites 6-1
6.2.1 Fish Sampling Effort Required '. '.'.'.'.'.'.', 6-4
6.2.2 Selecting Sites for Midlake Gill Nets 6-6
6.2.3 Selecting Sites For Littoral Trap Nets and Gill Nets .. 6-7
6.2.4 Selecting Sites for Seining 6-11
6.2.5 Judgment and "Extra" Sampling 6-14
6.2.6 Recording Gear Type Placement Data 6-14
6.3, Predeployment Preparation of Fishing Gear 6-16
6.4 Deployment Methods 6-16
6.4.1 Gill Nets '..'..'.'. 6-20
6.4.2 Trap Nets and Minnow Traps 6-23
6.4.3 Fish Tally Form and Instructions 6-23
VI
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
Section
Page
6.5 Retrieval Methods 6-23
6.5.1 Gill Nets 6-27
6.5.2 Trap Nets and Minnow Traps 6-27
6.5.3 Seines 6-27
6.6 Processing Fish 6-30
6.6.1 Species Identification and Tally 6-30
6.6.2 External Anomalies 6-37
6.6.3 Length 6-39
6.6.4 Tissue Contaminants Samples 6-41
6.6.5 Museum Vouchers 6-46
6.7 Equipment and Supply List 6-49
7 WATER AND SEDIMENT SAMPLING by John R. Baker, Alan T. Herlihy, Sushil S. Dixit,
and Richard Stemberger , 7-1
7.1 Secchi Transparency 7-1
7.2 Water Sample Collection 7-1
7.3 Chlorophyll a Sample Collection 7-7
7.4 Zooplankton 7-7
7.5 Sediment Diatom Sample Collection 7-10
7.6 Equipment and Supply List 7-13
V
8 BENTHIC INVERTEBRATE SAMPLING by Wesley L Kinney, R. O. Brinkhurst,
Thomas R. Whittier, and David V. Peck 8-1
8.1 Site Selection and Sample Collection 8-1
8.2 Sample Processing 8-9
8.3 Qualitative Zebra Mussel Survey 8-12
8.3.1 Species Characteristics and Probable Habitat 8-12
8.3.2 Collection and Data Recording 8-12
8.4 Equipment and Supply List 8-15
8.5 References 8-15
9 FINAL LAKE ACTIVITIES by Alan T. Herlihy 9-1
9.1 General Lake Assessment 9-1
9.1.1 Lake Site Activities and Disturbances 9-1
9.1.2 General Lake Information 9-6
9.1.3 Shoreline Characteristics 9-6
9.1.4 Qualitative Macrophyte Survey ., 9-6
9.1.5 Qualitative Assessment of Environmental Values '. 9-6
vii
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
Section
9.2
9.3
Data Forms and Sample Inspection
Launch Site Cleanup
Page
9-10
9-10
Appendix
A Avian Indicator Field Operations Manual
B Lake-Visit Checklists
C Field Data Forms
A-1
B-1
C-1
viii
-------
FIGURES
Figure , Page
1-1 Selection of probability sample .1-3
2-1 Day 1 field sampling scenario, 2-2
2-2 Day 2 field sampling scenario 2-3
2-3 Day 3 field sampling scenario 2-4
3-1 Overview of base site activities • • • •, 3-2
3-2 Performance test and calibration procedure for the dissolved
oxygen meter 3-4
3-3 Sample container labels 3-8
4-1 Summary of lake verification and index site activities. 4-2
4-2 Lake Verification Form, Side 2 4-3
4-3 Lake Verification Form, Side 1 4-5
4-4 Lake verification checklist 4-9
5-1 Typical temperature and dissolved oxygen profile of a thermally
stratified lake 5-2
5-2 Field performance test and calibration procedures for the dissolved
oxygen meter 5-3
5-3 Lake Profile Form, Side 2 5-4
5-4 Lake Profile Form, Side 1. 5-6
5-5 Dissolved oxygen and temperature profile procedure 5-7
5-6 Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form, Side 1 5-9
5-7 Physical Habitat Characterization Form, Side 1 5-10
5-8 Physical Habitat Characterization Form, Side 2 5-11
5-9 Physical habitat characterization plot 5-14
5-10 Physical Habitat Characterization Comments Form. ., 5-18
5-11 Physical habitat assessment checklist 5-26
IX
-------
FIGURES (continued)
Figure Page
6-1 Summary of Fish Sampling Activities (page 1 of 2)--Day 1. 6-2
6-1 Summary of Fish Sampling Activities (page 2 of 2)-Day 2 6-3
6-2 Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form, Side 2 6-9
6-3 Fish Tally Form-Lakes, Side 1 6-15
6-4 Types of gill net sets 6-19
6-5 Fish Tally Continuation Form-Lakes, Side 1 6-34
6-6 Fish Tally Form, Side 2 6-36
6-7 Fish Length Form-Lakes 6-40
6-8 Fish Tissue Sample Tracking Form 6-44
6-9 Fish-related activities equipment checklists (page 1) 6-50
6-9 Fish-related activities equipment checklists (page 2) 6-51
6-9 Fish-related activities equipment checklists (page 3) 6-52
6-9 Fish-related activities equipment checklists (page 4) 6-53
6-9 Fish-related activities equipment checklists (page 5) 6-54
6-9 Fish-related activities equipment checklists (page 6) 6-55
7-1 Water and sediment sampling activities summary 7-2
7-2 Sample Collection Form 7-4
7-3 Zooplankton net configuration 7-9
7-4 Sediment coring tube and sectioning apparatus 7-14
7-5 Water and sediment sampling checklist (page 1) 7-15
7-5 Water and sediment sampling checklist (page 2) 7-16
8-1 Benthic invertebrate sampling activities summary 8-2
8-2 Lake Profile Form 8-5
8-3 Benthos Sample Location and Collection Form, Side 1 8-6
8-4 Process for selecting benthic sample sites 8-7
8-5 Benthos Sample Location and Collection Form, Side 2 8-8
8-6 Zebra mussel (Dreissena polymorpha) 8-13
8-7 Benthic invertebrate sampling checklist 8-16
9-1 Final lake activities summary 9-2
9-2 Lake Assessment Form, Side 1 9-3
9-3 Lake Assessment Form, Side 2 9-4
-------
TABLES
Table Page
2-1 Guidelines for Recording Field Data and Other Information , 2-7
3-1 Initialization Procedures for the Global Positioning System 3-6
3-2 Stock Solutions, Uses, and Methods for Preparation 3-6
3-3 Postsampling Equipment Care 3-9
3-4 Sample Packaging and Shipping Guidelines 3-12
4-1 Global Positioning System Survey Procedures 4-4
4-2 Locating the Index Site 4-8
5-1 General Guidelines for Locating or Modifying Physical
Habitat Stations 5-13
5-2 Steps Required to Complete Physical Habitat Characterization Form .. 5-15
5-3 Riparian and Littoral Macrohabitat Characteristics and Mapping 5-22
5-4 Littoral Fish Microhabitat Classification 5-23
6-1 Number of Fish Sampling Stations 6-5
6-2 Selecting Gill Net Locations 6-8
6-3 Selecting Littoral Sampling Sites •. 6-10
6-4 Selecting Seining Sites 6-13
6-5 Onshore Preparation of Trap Nets and Minnow Traps 6-17
6-6 Onshore Preparation of Gill Nets 6-18
6-7 Setting Each Epilimnetic Gill Net 6-21
6-8 Setting Each Bottom Gill Net~Hypolimnion and Metalimnion 6-22
6-9 Setting Each Trap Net ...: '.... 6-24
6-10 Retrieving Each Gill Net 6-25
6-11 Retrieving Each Trap Net and Minnow Trap 6-26
6-12 Night Seining with the Beach Seine 6-28
6-13 Night Seining with the Short Seine 6-29
6-14 General Fish Processing Chronology 6-31
6-15 Tallying, Examining, and Measuring Fish 6-35
6-16 Examining Fish for External Anomalies 6-38
6-17 Final Selection of Fish Tissue Sample 6-43
XI
-------
TABLES (continued)
Table Page
6-18 Fish Tissue Sample Processing ; 6-45
6-19 Overview of Fish Vouchering 6-47
7-1 Secchi Disk Transparency Procedures 7-3
7-2 Operation of Van Dorn Sampler 7-5
7-3 Syringe and Cubitainer Sample Collection 7^6
7-4 Procedures for Collection and Filtration of Chlorophyll a Sample 7-8
7-5 Zooplankton Collection Procedure 7-11
7-6 Collection Procedure for Sediment Diatom Cores 7-12
8-1 Collection Protocol for Benthic Sampling 8-3
8-2 Processing Benthic Sample 8-10
8-3 Qualitative Zebra Mussel Survey 8-14
9-1 Lake Site Activities and Disturbances 9-5
9-2 General Lake Information Noted During Lake Assessment 9-7
9-3 Shoreline Characteristics Observed During Final Lake Assessment .... 9-8
XII
-------
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
In any undertaking with a scope as broad as that of EMAP-Surface Waters, many
individuals contribute in important ways not reflected by authorship on documents such as
this. This is especially true of the contents of this manual which are the product of tests and
lessons learned over a period of 5 years of field work. Rather than attempt to list all of these
contributors, and risk omitting some, we will identify the organizations whose staff members
participated in the development of the material presented in this manual:
• EMAP-Surface Waters and associated laboratory staff in Corvallis, Las Vegas,
and Cincinnati, including EPA and on-site contractor personnel (ManTech
Environmental Technology, Inc., Lockheed Environmental Systems &
Technologies Company, and Technology Applications, Inc.).
• Environmental Services Division of EPA Regions 1 and 2.
• Personnel on cooperative agreements with Oregon State University, Queens
University, Dartmouth College, University of Maine, the University of Nevada at
Las Vegas, and the Aquatic Resources Center.
• Members of the lake sampling crews of miscellaneous origin.
• Members of the peer review panel and reviewers of this manual.
Wes Kinney of the EPA in Las Vegas, made significant contributions as the Work
Assignment Manager from 1991 through 1994 as well as the lead scientist for the benthic
invertebrate indicator. We especially appreciate the members of the sampling crews for their
diligent efforts in testing these procedures and in obtaining data of outstanding quality. The
following people provided official technical reviews of this manual: B. Baldigo (U.S.
Geological Survey), J. Kurtenbach (U.S. EPA), and S. Cline (U.S. EPA). Many others
provided informal but important review comments. The Michigan Sea Grant Program kindly
provided the drawings of zebra mussels used in Figure 8-6.
xiii
-------
ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
BPJ Best Professional Judgment
DLGs Digital Line Graphs
DO dissolved oxygen
EMAP Environmental Monitoring and Assessment Program
EPA U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
GPS Global Positioning System
GQ geometric quality
ID identification
ORD Office of Research and Development
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
P-Hab physical habitat
PVC polyvinyl chloride
QA quality assurance
QC quality control
SQ signal quality
STARS Sample Tracking and Reporting System
T Top
TIME Temporally Integrated Monitoring of Ecosystems
USGS United States Geological .Survey
YOY young of year
YSI Yellow Springs Instrument system
Measurement Units
ha
m
ppm
hectare
meter
parts per million
XIV
-------
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
by
S. G. Paulsen, John R. Baker, Sushil S. Dixit, Philip R. Kaufmann,
Wesley L. Kinney, Richard Stemberger, Donna W. Sutton,
Thomas R. Whittier, and Roger B. Yeardley
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), in cooperation with other federal
and state organizations, has designed the Environmental Monitoring and Assessment
Program (EMAP) to periodically assess the condition of the Nation's ecological resources.
This document provides background and procedures for field personnel working with the
EMAP Surface Waters Resource Group, one of seven EMAP ecological resource groups.
The Surface Waters Group focuses on monitoring and assessment of the condition of lakes
and streams. This manual covers field operations for lakes. The procedures and protocols
described in this manual have been tested, modified, and refined during 4 years of pilot and
demonstration studies in the northeastern United States.
1.1 OVERVIEW OF EMAP SURFACE WATERS
The intent of EMAP is to assist decision makers, both within and outside the Agency,
to evaluate the cumulative effectiveness of current environmental regulations in protecting
the Nation's natural resources, prioritize issues of concern and regions in which action is
needed, and set environmental policy. This Program is a strategy to identify and bound the
extent, magnitude, and location of degradation or improvement in the environment. In -the
long-term, the Program intends to contribute to answering the following critical questions:
What is the current extent of our ecological resources (e.g., estuaries, lakes,
streams, forests, and grasslands) and how are they distributed geographically?
What percentage of resources appears to be adversely affected by pollutants or
other anthropogenic environmental stresses?
Which resources are degrading or improving, where, and at what rate?
What are the relative magnitudes of the most likely causes of adverse effects?
Are adversely affected ecosystems improving as expected in response to
cumulative effects of control and mitigation programs? ,
I
-------
To answer these questions, the various, integrated monitoring networks within EMAP
focus on the following objectives:
• Estimate the current status, extent, changes, and trends in indicators of the
condition of the Nation's ecological resources on a regional basis with known
confidence.
• Monitor indicators of pollutant exposure and habitat condition and seek
associations between human-induced stresses and ecological condition that
identify possible causes of adverse effects.
• Provide periodic statistical summaries and interpretive reports on ecological
status and trends to the EPA Administrator and to the public.
The EMAP Surface Waters resource group plans to estimate the condition of lakes,
reservoirs, streams, and rivers on relatively broad, regional scales. The design of the
program uses an integrated, probability-based monitoring framework based on a systematic
grid and is explained in detail by Paulsen et al. (1991), Larsen and Christie (1993), and
Larsen etal. (1994). Figure 1-1 summarizes the probability-based selection process. Lake,
reservoir, stream, and wetlands resource information is initially derived from hydrologic
information which is part of U.S. Geological Survey (USGS) 1:100,000 scale Digital Line
Graphs (DLGs). Specific spatial information associated with surface water bodies (e.g.,
geographic coordinates and surface area or stream "blue line" length) extracted from the
DLGs into a data base file. After accuracy and completeness checks, missing surface water
bodies are added to the spatial file.
The first stage (Tier I) of the probability sample is developed by intersecting the
spatial file of surface water body information with a second file containing spatial information
related to the EMAP systematic sampling grid. The Tier I sample represents all surface
water bodies whose digitized labeling points are located within the boundaries of one of the
hexagons.
The second stage of site selection involves selecting a subset of the Tier I sample.
This subset (Tier II) represents sites that are expected to be visited by field sampling crews.
The Tier II sample is selected through a process that incorporates the desired Tier II sample
size and any Tier I stratification needed (e.g., lake area). Sites are selected randomly from
the Tier I sample, with the constraint that the spatial distribution of sites be preserved. Each
Tier II site has an associated inclusion probability with which any measured attribute can be
related to the target population of sites.
1-2
-------
SELECTION OF PROBABILITY SAMPLE
EMAP GRID FRAME \
• G rid points = center of hexagon (40 km2) I
• Assign sampling year (1 to 4) to each hexagon JJ
DIGITAL MAPS 4
• USGS 1:1 00,000 scale Digital Line Graphs (DUG) 1
• EPA River Reach File (RF3) . J
^-^ „ .— ^ ^^
All hexagons within /
conterminous U.S
:lakes and blue-line
streams within
Dnterminous U.S.
LAKES
TIER I SAMPLE
STREAMS
All lakes of 1- to 500-ha surface
area located within hexagons
All large lakes (500- to 10,000-ha
surface area) identified on maps
• All 1st, 2nd, and 3rd order
streams located within hexagons
RANDOMIZATION
Sites within hexagons
Hexagons within clusters
Clusters within years
List frames
SPATIAL SAMPLING FRAME
Classify by size
Determine conditional inclusion probabilies for each
class size based on number of Tier II samples required
Define clusters of lakes or streams based on achieving
equal sums of conditional inclusion probabliities
Separate sites by sampling year
INITIAL NATIONAL
TIER II SAMPLE
Systematic selection with
random start point
Eliminate non-target sites
(map review)
EXTRACT SITES FOR
THIS YEAR
(Year and region)
INTERMEDIATE ANNUAL
TIER II SAMPLE
J
PRELIMINARY SCREENING
OF NONTARGET SITES
• Extract sites for year and
region(s)
• Local contacts
• Site reconnaissance
SITE VERIFICATION
(SAMPLING VISITS)
Nontarget status
Access permission denied
Inaccessible
FINAL ANNUAL
TIER II SAMPLE
I
' RJ30PEX95.PFT
Figure 1-1. Selection of probability sample.
1-3
-------
A sample size of at least 30 to 50 is necessary for making statements about the
condition of a regional subpopulation with reasonable precision. Larger total sample sizes
are necessary if the condition of numerous subpopulations are to be described.
Overselection should protect against a reduction in sample size due to: (1) landscape-
related errors not portrayed by the DLGs, (2) the inability to visit a site due to weather
conditions or lack of access permission, or (3) the reclassification of a site to nontarget
status when it is visited.
Data obtained from Surface Waters projects allow estimation of the spatial extent and
geographical distribution of various classes of surface waters. Additionally, investigators can
use the data to estimate the current status of, and changes or trends in, indicators of lake
ecological condition.
1.2 SYNOPSIS OF THE LAKE SAMPLING COMPONENT OF EMAP SURFACE WATERS
Field activities conducted by the EMAP Surface Waters resource group for lake
monitoring and assessment from 1991 through 1994 consisted of pilot and demonstration
projects in the Northeast. The pilot projects were designed to answer questions related to
development of proposed "indicators" of the condition of surface waters. Various aspects of
each indicator were evaluated during the pilot projects, including plot design, sensitivity to
various stressors, magnitude of spatial and measurement variance components, evaluation
of methods and other logistical constraints. The 1994 demonstration project was designed
to evaluate the capability of indicators to be implemented on a regional scale and their ability
to estimate the condition of regional populations of lakes.
Ecological indicators are measurements, metrics, or indices that quantify physical,
chemical or biological condition, habitat, or stress (Larsen and Christie, 1993).
Measurements of a biological assemblage (e.g., fish or diatoms) or other ecosystem attribute
are converted into numerical metric or index scores. The distribution of indicator values is
presented and used to determine the status of the resource populations of interest.
Because it is not possible to measure all attributes in all parts of all waterbodies at all
times, an "index" sample is collected. To be valid, index sampling at a lake must take place
at appropriate times and locations. Index samples must adequately represent the waterbody
character. In addition, the lakes and streams selected for sampling must represent the
population of waters from which they are drawn-the survey must be conducted on a spatially
balanced, probabilistic selection of lakes and streams.
Selection of the appropriate measurements for each indicator is necessary to begin
development of a diagnostic plan that guides the search for associations between indicators
1-4
-------
of condition (response indicators) and indicators of stress induced by both humans and
nature (diagnostic indicators). Response indicators are developed based on field data
collected for chlorophyll a, macrophytes, fish, riparian birds, zooplankton, benthos, and
sedimentary diatoms. Diagnostic indicators are developed using exposure, habitat, and
available stressor data to allow testing hypotheses that poor biological conditions are
associated with hydrological, physical habitat, chemical, or biological modifications.
Acceptable index sampling approaches for chlorophyll-a, water quality, sedimentary
diatoms, and zooplankton had already been determined before the 1991 pilot. These
methods were used as a regional probability sample of lakes to answer questions about the
logistics of conducting regional surveys and to begin to collect data on important
components of variance. Standard methods for obtaining an acceptable index sample for
macrobenthos, fish assemblage, fish tissue contaminants, riparian birds, and physical habitat
structure were not available in the literature or in methodologies of the monitoring
community. For these indicators, focused pilot studies helped to develop efficient indexing
protocols appropriate for a single visit by a small field team. These protocols were then
applied to the regional probability sample for further evaluation. The protocols and
instructions for field operations presented in this manual are an outgrowth of the testing and
refinement of the existing and developed methods and the logistical foundation constructed
during their implementation, in the field from 1991 through 1994.
Field operations and training were planned and conducted by representatives from
several organizations. These include the EPA (involving EPA personnel from several
laboratories [Las Vegas, Nevada; Corvallis, Oregon; and Cincinnati, Ohio], EPA Regions 1
and 2, and EPA cooperators and contractors) and the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service
(involving personnel representing Region 5 and a cooperative agreement); state agencies;
cooperators; and contractors. Training prepared six to eight field teams of three or four
members each to collect samples and data from 80 to 100 lakes annually in the Northeast.
Field work also included collecting samples from approximately two to four dozen lakes by
helicopter for the Temporally Integrated Monitoring of Ecosystems (TIME) project. Field
operations usually began the first week in July and continued through August, sometimes
continuing into early September. In addition to actual sampling tools and supplies, other
equipment provided to each team included two 4-wheel-drive vehicles, a boat and trailer, and
a portable computer. Field Coordinators provided support for the teams and a
Communications Center served as a central point of contact for exchange of information and
requests for supplies or assistance.
1-5
-------
1.3 INDICATOR SUMMARY
Each of the following subsections describes biotic assemblages, environmental
measures, or attributes of indicators used by EMAP-Surface Waters to evaluate the
condition of lakes. To aid field personnel in understanding sampling procedures, these
sections address the rationale for these measures and the significance of certain aspects of
the methodologies. These indicators do not represent all possibilities, but were selected
based on an evaluation approach using criteria deemed appropriate to meet EMAP
requirements. Additional information regarding this evaluation can be found in Paulsen et al.
(1991).
1.3.1 Physical Habitat
The magnitude of aquatic ecosystem degradation and loss due to physical habitat
alterations in the United States may exceed degradation due to other human activities. The
physical habitat shoreline and littoral surveys that the Surface Waters field teams conduct
serve three purposes. First, this habitat information is absolutely essential to the
interpretation of what lake biological assemblages "should" be like in the absence of many
types of anthropogenic impacts. Second, the habitat evaluation is a reproducible, quantified
estimate of habitat condition, serving as a benchmark against which to compare future
habitat changes that might result from anthropogenic activities. Third, the specific selections
of habitat information collected aid in the diagnosis of probable causes of ecological
Impairment in lakes.
In addition to information collected in the field by the shoreline and littoral surveys,
the physical habitat description of each lake includes many map-derived variables such as
lake surface area, shoreline length, and shoreline complexity. Furthermore, an array of
information, including watershed topography and land use, supplements the physical habitat
information. The shoreline and littoral surveys concentrate on information best derived "on
the ground." As such, these survey results provide the all-important linkage between large
watershed-scale influences and those forces that directly affect aquatic organisms day to
day. Together with water chemistry, the habitat measurements and observations describe
the variety of physical and chemical conditions that are necessary to support biological
diversity and foster long-term ecosystem stability. These characteristics of lakes and their
shorelines are the very aspects that are often changed as a result of anthropogenic
activities.
The shoreline and littoral habitat surveys employ a randomized, systematic design
with 10 equally spaced observation stations located around the shore of each sample lake.
Teams go to the field with premarked lake outlines showing these stations. The
1-6
-------
observations at each station include quantitative and semiquantitative observations of
vegetation structure, anthropogenic disturbances, and bank substrate onshore. In-lake
littoral measurements and observations deal with littoral water depth, bottom substrate,
hearshore fish cover, and aquatic rhacrophyte cover. With quantifiable confidence,
investigators condense these observations into descriptions applicable to the whole
lakeshore and littoral zone. For example, team observations lead to quantitative descriptions
such as the mean canopy or aquatic macrophyte cover along the lakeshore, the extent of
shoreline disturbed by various human activities, and the dominant littoral substrate in the
lake.
1.3.2 Fish Assemblage
Major objectives for the fish assemblage indicator work are to collect an index sample
of the fish assemblage at each lake and to use the data derived from these samples to
develop metrics of biological integrity. Biological integrity is a measure of the ability of the
biotic components of an ecosystem to maintain a level of diversity and functional
organization that is comparable to natural systems unimpacted by human disturbance (Karr
and Dudley, 1981; Karr et al., 1986; Noss, 1990). Following the approach of Karr (1986) for
use in streams, metrics are developed from numerical measures of various attributes of lake
fish assemblage structure and composition. Responses of individual metrics are then
compared to expected conditions in lake fish assemblages if human disturbance is absent or
minimal. High biological integrity should be reflective of good lake water quality and lake
habitat conditions.
For EMAP an index sample of lake fish is collected by catching (a) all except rare
species; (b) enough individuals to indicate relative proportions of abundant and common
species, which species are uncommon or rare, and the general population structure of
abundant and common species; and © nonadults of naturally reproducing species.
Because of the various habitats in lakes, the habitat preferences of different species,
and habitat specificity of sampling gear, there is no single method to index fish assemblages
in all lakes. Therefore, EMAP Surface Waters uses a combination of gear types in a variety
of habitats. The challenge is to index fish assemblages in large numbers of lakes of varying
sizes, physical structures, and accessibility using multiple teams to collect samples and data.
At each lake a team assesses the presence and proportion of major fish habitats. All
habitats are sampled regardless of their expected productivity (gear are not placed to
maximize catch), using a stratified random protocol. Littoral habitats are classified by
presence and type of cover and by substrate type. Areas of extensive human modification
are considered to be a habitat type. Samples are collected in as many as five of the most
1-7
-------
extensive littoral habitats at each lake, as close as possible to randomly chosen physical
habitat stations.
Fish are collected with passive gear-gill nets set overnight in oxygenated midlake
areas, trap nets set overnight in littoral habitats, and minnow traps placed in shallow water
with cover near the trap nets. After sunset, appropriate locations are seined. The fish are
identified to species and examined for external gross pathology. Long-lived species are
measured for length (short-lived species are recorded by size class). Specimens of all small
fishes are preserved for archival storage in a museum. At most lakes a sample consisting of
five large fish is collected for tissue contaminant analysis (Section 1.3.3).
Data collected in the lake surveys are used to evaluate several metrics of lake fish
assemblages as indicators of biological integrity including (1) species richness as a measure
of assemblage diversity, (2) numbers of introduced species and individuals relative to native
species as a measure of biological stress and resiliency of the native fauna, and (3)
proportion of individuals sensitive to human perturbation relative to proportion of tolerant
species. In addition, the EMAP Surface Waters team will evaluate combining several
metrics into an overall index of biological integrity reflecting changes in the species structure
related to individual stressors, combinations of stresses, or reductions in impacts.
1.3.3 Fish Tissue Contaminants
As an indicator of accumulation of toxic chemicals in a lake, levels of contaminants in
fish tissue can be used to estimate regional hazards to predators of fish, either wildlife or
human. The EMAP Surface Waters group proposes to track how these hazards change with
time. The fish tissue contaminants indicator has characteristics of both response and
diagnostic indicators (Paulsen et al. 1991). As a response indicator tissue contaminant
levels can be used to infer effects on piscivorous populations in and around lakes. When
response indicators identify lake degradation, the fish tissue contaminants indicator can also
be used in conjunction with other diagnostic indicators (physical habitat, water chemistry,
land use, population density, and other records of relevant anthropogenic stresses) to
discover the probable causes. Analyses of fish tissue detect contaminants such as a
number of organochlorinated pesticides, PCB congeners, and heaVy metals, including
mercury.
It would be optimal, in representing fish bioaccumulation of contaminants, to collect
samples of both top predators and bottom feeders from each lake. However, for Surface
Waters lakes surveys, priority is given to top predators primarily because of their ecological
significance as likely prey of the consumers of main concern-piscivorous birds (including
1-8
-------
endangered raptors), mammals (e.g., mink and otter), and man. Bottom feeders are
considered secondary target fish (lowest in the ranking order).
Various studies of fish tissue contaminants have focused on different parts of the
fish, such as fillets or livers, or on the whole fish. The EMAP Surface Waters group will
focus on whole fish because of the Program focus on the ecological health of the whole lake
(as opposed to a focus solely on human health concerns). Whole fish are a reliable
ecological indicator and a better indicator of risk to piscivorous wildlife than fillets, as wildlife
(and some human consumers, i.e., subsistence fishermen) are likely to consume more parts
, of the fish than just the fillets. Results derived from analyzing whole fish also provide
information about risks to human health. In addition, whole fish present fewer logistical
problems for field crews (no gutting is required in the field, and use of dry ice for preserving
and shipping is not necessary) and the analytical laboratory (no filleting is necessary).
Repeated lake sampling within the index period for fish tissue will answer two
questions: "Will repeat visits yield the same types and numbers of fish?" and, most
importantly, "Will the five-fish composite from each of two visits yield a similar value for level
of contaminants in that lake?" In trying to answer these questions arid provide reproducible
(useful) data, the efforts of field teams to apply the protocol for sampling, handling, and
shipping, in a consistent manner are very important.
1.3.4 Water Chemistry and Associated Measurements
The primary functions of lake water samples collected from the Van Dorn sampler
and in situ water column measurements are to determine acid-base status, trophic state, and
classification of water chemistry type. Lake water collected in Cubitainers is used to
measure major cations and anions, nutrients, turbidity, and color. Water samples, collected
in sealed syringes to minimize contact with the atmosphere, are analyzed for pH, dissolved
inorganic carbon, and monomeric aluminum species (believed to be toxic to fish under acidic
conditions). The concentration of each of these analytes will change if the lake water sample
equilibrates with atmospheric carbon dioxide. Both the Cubitainers and the syringes must be
shipped as soon as possible by overnight courier service because the syringe samples need
to be analyzed and the Cubitainer samples need to be stabilized (filtration and/or
. acidification) within a short period of time (72 hours).
The filter paper from the lake water filtration is used to determine chlorophyll
concentration, an indicator of algal biomass in the lake. The filtration (and filter paper)
should be shielded from light as much as possible because light breaks down chlorophyll.
1-9
-------
Throughout the water chemistry sampling process it is important to take precautions
to avoid contaminating the sample. Many lakes in some regions (e.g., the Northeast) have a
very low ionic strength (i.e., very low levels of chemical constituents) and samples can be
contaminated quite easily by perspiration from hands, sneezing, smoking, suntan lotion,
insect repellent, fumes from gasoline engines or chemicals used during sample collection
(e.g., the narcotizing agent used for zooplankton or formalin).
1.3.5 Zooplankton
Zooplankton are important components of the open water environment of lakes and
ponds. Most species are microscopic and consist of crustaceans (copepods, cladocerans,
and opossum shrimp), rotifers ("wheel-animals"), pelagic insect larvae (phantom midge), and
aquatic mites. In lakes of the northeastern United States, more than 200 species have been
recorded. Zooplankton are important elements of the food chain where they transfer energy
from algae (primary producers) to larger invertebrate predators and fish. The zooplankton
species assemblage responds to environmental stressors such as nutrient enrichment,
acidification, and fish stocks. The effects of environmental stress can be detected through
changes in species composition and abundance, body size distribution, and food web
structure.
Body size (0.05 to 15 mm long) and swimming abilities vary greatly among
zooplankton species. Some species can swim fast enough to avoid being caught by the net.
Therefore, we use two kinds of nets to optimize capture of size-based fractions~a coarse
mesh net for fast swimming macrozooplankton (^600 urn long) and a fine mesh net for the
microzooplankton (<600 urn long). The net is hauled from about 0.5 m off the bottom to the
surface in the deepest part of the lake. It is important to avoid bottom sediments which clog
the net pores and make the sample unusable. If bottom sediments occur in the sample, the
net must be washed out and the procedure repeated. The net should be towed slowly
(about 0.5m/sec) to reduce the pressure wave at the "bow" of the net. Some species can
detect this frontal wave and swim out of the path of the net. The reducing collar on the fine
mesh net decreases the volume of water passing through the net, thus increasing the
filtration efficiency of the net and reducing the pressure wave problem. Because the net
phytoplankton and debris are collected primarily in the fine mesh sample, laboratory
preparation and processing is greatly facilitated for the macrozooplankton fraction. Finally, it
is important to thoroughly rinse the nets to avoid contaminating later samples with species
that may adhere to the inner sides of the net. Placing the nets into a mild bleach solution will
help alleviate this problem and reduce the possibility of spreading resistant stages of exotic
species to other lakes.
1-10
-------
As the summer progresses, wind-driven mixing enlarges the warm water epilimnion
and reduces the cold water hypoiimnion. This mixing becomes increasingly important in
small, shallow (10 to 15 m deep) lakes where the later summer, cold water hypoiimnion may
be only 1 to 3 meters thick. Therefore, when sampling such lakes, it is very important to take
the tow at the deepest spot. Missing the deep spot by 1 or 2 meters of depth can miss such
a cold water stratum and greatly confound interpretation of the true species assemblage in
such lakes. This possibility is a concern for fish as well as zooplankton samples.
1.3.6 Sediment Diatoms
The diatom indicator is unique in that it can potentially tell us the "original" or pristine
condition of the lake. None of the other indicators can provide this information. Thus,
sampling the sediments in a precise and consistent manner is particularly critical. To assess
the original condition, sediments dating from that time need to be collected. A general
understanding of the diatom indicator and the sampling and analysis process will enhance
sample collection.
The diatom cell wall is composed of silicon dioxide and is preserved in lake
sediments. Markings on the cell wall are used to distinguish species and even varieties.
Dozens of different species occur in any lake and its drainage basin, many of which end up
in the sediments at the center of the lake. Each of the species has slightly different
environmental requirements; for many species, these requirements are known. By studying
the diatom community, it is possible to make inferences about previous conditions in the lake
and its basin.
To study the microscopic cells, the sediments are cleaned of organic matter with
strong oxidizing agents and slides are made. The analysis is made by identifying and
counting 500 individual cells. Any contamination of the samples can produce significant
errors in the resulting interpretation. Samplers must be careful not to contaminate the
bottom sample with higher levels of the core or with lake water or with the tools used to
collect the sample (i.e., the corer, core tube, and spatulas) and not to mix the top layer with
the deeper sediments, thus obscuring small changes in community structure which are
critical to monitoring trends.
Results from the 1991 Surface Waters pilot study indicated that some productive
lakes were not sampled at a deep enough level to get a sample of sediments representing
the preindustrial condition. Samplers should make an effort to get at least a 45-cm core from
all lakes that have a Secchi disk reading of 2.5 m or less. Some judgment is necessary. For
example; if the lake is artificial, there is no point in sampling through its sediments into the
soil profile below. For most other lakes, a core 35 cm in length is adequate.
1-11
-------
Since an undisturbed sediment sample is needed, outboard motors should not be
used in shallow lakes near the sampling site nor should there be vigorous use of paddles or
oars. If for some reason the first core is not satisfactory, a second try should be made in
another spot. If the boat is well-anchored, the second try could simply be on the other side
of the boat. If a corer begins to malfunction frequently, another should be acquired. The
team should keep good notes-for example, if it is not possible to get a 45-cm core in a lake
that seems to be very productive, the notes should explain the situation.
Data on diatom abundance and species composition is obtained from the cell counts.
These data are combined with environmental data (e.g., chemical concentrations) and
analyzed using multivariate statistical techniques. From this analysis, the expected
abundance of individual taxa as a function of one or more environmental variables is
determined. These expected abundance distributions are then used to infer historical
conditions based on cell counts obtained from the bottom of the core samples.
1.3.7 Benthic Invertebrate Assemblages
Bottom dwelling invertebrates have long been used as indicators of water quality
throughout this country and abroad. In the United States their use as living monitors of
environmental conditions has principally been applied in environmental assessments of
rivers and streams. However, European biologists have used benthic invertebrates for
purposes of classifying lakes as to trophic status since the 1920s. Although their use for this
purpose has not been as widespread in North America as it has been in Europe, these
organisms show great potential as indicators of the biotic integrity and ecological condition of
this Nation's lakes and reservoirs.
Freshwater benthic invertebrates are those organisms that spend at least part of their
life cycles in or upon the substrates of aquatic systems. They are represented by forms that
cling to, burrow in, or crawl over the sediments or other substrata of waterways and
waterbodies. The larger forms that can be seen with the unaided eye and retained by a U.S.
Standard No. 30 mesh sieve (28 meshes per inch and openings of 595 urn) are the benthic
macrofauna or macroinvertebrates. It has become customary within the EPA to focus on
these larger forms because they are relatively easy to separate from debris and to identify.
This bias toward the larger animals undoubtedly can be traced back to the days when
invertebrates were sampled principally to provide an estimate of the forage available for fish,
since most of the animal biomass within and upon a unit area of substrate is contained within
the larger animals. Secondly, the very early instars of insect larvae are difficult to identify
reliably and, until fairly recently, good taxonomic descriptions of small oligochaetes (naidid
worms) were not available.
1-12
-------
In the lake sediment sample, the small benthic invertebrates that pass through a No.
30 mesh sieve may far outnumber those larger animals retained by the sieve. Because
these small organisms contribute substantially to the total taxonomic diversity and standing
stock of all benthic assemblages, to exclude them from the analyses of invertebrate samples
could result in the loss of considerable information about the biological integrity of the system
in question. For this reason we have elected not to restrict our analyses to the
macroinvertebrates, but to include all true, identifiable benthic animals that are retained by a
U.S. Standard No. 60 mesh sieve (60 meshes per inch and openings of 250 pm). Excluded
from the analyses are the copepods, cladocerar and other forms that are not necessarily true
benthic dwellers or that are not reliably identifiable by most aquatic biologists beyond broad
taxonomic groups.
Currently there are a number of indices of biotic integrity for invertebrate
assemblages in streams, but these indices have not been widely applied to lake
assemblages. Considerable research is needed to evaluate and modify those indices for
application to lake benthos. It is our intent to focus on the most promising metrics and
indices for purposes of validating their use as a measure of biological integrity of lakes and
reservoirs.
Benthos sampling is restricted to the sublittoral zones of EMAP grid lakes.. Single
modified K-B (Glew) corer samples are taken in the soft, weedless sediments at similar
depths at 10 approximately evenly spaced locations around the perimeters of each lake.
Each of the 10 sites corresponds to the 10 physical habitat observation stations located
during the physical habitat and lake shoreline survey. In thermally stratified lakes, the
samples are taken in well-oxygenated areas at depths equal to or less than the depth where
the upper limits of the metalimnion intersect the lake bottom. In nonstratified lakes, samples
are collected in weedless areas at depths greater than 1 m.
Only the upper 13 cm of each core sample are retained for analysis, as the
uppermost sediments contain the majority of the animals. At the laboratory, a composite
sample are prepared for each lake from individual core samples from alternate sites at the
lake (i.e., the composite sample is composed of between 1 and 5 core samples). The
composite sample is divided into eight equal fractions in the laboratory, using a device
developed specifically for this purpose. Individual fractions are processed under
microscopes until 150 animals have been sorted from the debris. This number excludes
microcrustaceans, plankton, nematodes, terrestrial insects, dead or empty snail shells, and
all other nonbenthic animals that may have settled on the bottom of the lake. After the target
number of animals has been achieved, the entire fraction of the sample being examined is
completely processed. If a minimum of 150 animals cannot be obtained from the initial
composite sample, a second composite sample is prepared from the remaining individual
1-13
-------
core samples from the lake, and the process repeated until at least 150 animals have been
sorted from the composited fractions. After the individuals have been identified, the numbers
are normalized to numbers per tenth of a square meter of substrate surface area.
In addition, team members make a qualitative survey for the exotic zebra mussel at
each physical habitat station and at the launch site. They look for mussels attached to hard
substrates and, if any are found, collect and preserve an example. This procedure is meant
to record and document whether or not the presence of adult zebra mussel is detected for
each lake. The larval forms may be detected in the zooplankton collections.
1.3.8 Lake Assessment or Site Characteristics
Observations and impressions made on the lake by the field teams are extremely
useful for ecological value assessment, development of associations and stressor indicators,
and data verification and validation. Thus, it is important that observations of the field teams
about lake characteristics be recorded for future data interpretation and validation. The form
provided for this 'purpose is designed as a guide for recording pertinent field observations. It
is by no means comprehensive and any additional observations should be recorded in the
"Comments" section. Team members complete the form at the end of the lake sampling,
taking into account all observations made while on site.
1.3.9 Riparian Bird Assemblage
The riparian bird assemblage measures are being developed as an indicator of
riparian zone condition and its role linking aquatic conditions with terrestrial sources of
disturbance. Observations are intended to evaluate measurement variability among EMAP
grid lakes during the spring index period and to determine which species and guild
combinations provide the most information about ecosystem condition. Other goals are to
correlate avian guild rankings of sensitive and tolerant taxa, trophic groups, wetland
dependent species, and habitat specialists with the range of conditions presented at the
sampled lakes. Teams of ornithologists generally visit the EMAP grid lakes between late
May and early July each year. At each lake, a team traverses a shore transect by canoe
around the shore, stopping every 200 m to record birds seen or heard within a 5-minute
period and to record habitat information. Procedures for the bird assemblage indicator are
provided in Appendix A.
1.4 OBJECTIVES AND SCOPE OF THE FIELD OPERATIONS MANUAL
Two separate documents describe field operations activities for continuing
investigations of lakes by the EMAP Surface Waters resource group. The field operations
-------
manual (this document) describes field protocols, quality assurance (QA) and quality control
(QC) procedures, and operations directly related to EMAP Surface Waters that should be
capable of being implemented consistently across all regions. Section 2 provides a
summary of daily field operations. Section 3 describes base site activities both before
departure to a site and after sampling. Sections 4 through 6 describe the protocols for the
first day in the field, and Sections 6 through 9 describe protocols for activities conducted the
second day at a site. Appendix A is the field operations manual developed at the University
of Maine for collecting data on riparian bird assemblages. Checklists for equipment and
supplies required to conduct various activities are presented in Appendix B. Appendix C
contains a complete set of blank field data forms.
The second document, a regional activities plan, contains operations and safety
information and other procedures that apply to a specific regional project. This volume is
developed by the various regional organizations that implement the field program; its
contents may vary from region to region because of different regional requirements.
For use in the field, each team receives a quick-reference handbook that contains
tables and figures summarizing protocols and other pertinent information from this Field
Operations Manual for Lakes and the regional activities plan. This waterproof handbook is
the primary field reference used by field teams after an intensive 2- to 3-week training
program. Each field team also receives an information management handbook that contains
instructions for tracking samples and generating sampling status reports as well as using the
computers and associated hardware and software. The field teams are also required to
keep the field operations manual available in the field for reference and for possible protocol
clarification.
Large-scale and/or long-term monitoring programs such as those envisioned for
EMAP require a rigorous QA program that can be implemented consistently by all
participants throughout the duration of the monitoring period. Quality assurance is a
required element of all EPA-sponsored studies that involve the collection of environmental
data (Stanley and Verner, 1986). Field teams are provided a copy of the integrated QA plan
for EMAP Surface Waters (Chaloud and Peck, 1994). The QA plan contains more detailed
information regarding QA/QC activities and procedures associated with general field
operations, sample collection, measurement data collection for specific indicators, and data
reporting activities.
1-15
-------
1.5 REFERENCES
Chaloud, D. J., and D. V. Peck (editors). 1994. Environmental Monitoring and Assessment
Program: Integrated Quality Assurance Plan for the Surface Waters Resource
Group-1994 Activities. EPA/600/X-91/080. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Las Vegas, Nevada.
Karr, J.R., K.D. Fausch, P.L. Angermeier, P.R. Yant, and I.J. Schlosser. 1986. Assessing
Biological Integrity in Running Waters: A Method and its Rationale. Illinois Natural
History Survey Special Publication No, 5, Champaign, Illinois.
Karr, J.R. and D.R. Dudley. 1981. Ecological perspective on water quality goals.
Environmental Management 5:55-68.
Larsen, D. P., and S. J. Christie (editors). 1993. EMAP Surface Waters 1991 Pilot Report.
EPA/620/R-93/003. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Research
Laboratory, Corvallis, Oregon.
Larsen, D.P., K.W. Thornton, N.S. Urquhardt, and S.G. Paulsen. 1994. The role of sample
surveys for monitoring the condition of the Nation's lakes. Environmental Monitoring
and Assessment 32:101-134.
Noss, R.F. 1990. Indicators for monitoring biodiversity: a heirarchical approach.
Conservation Biology 4:355-364.
Paulsen, S. G., D. P. Larsen, P. R. Kaufmann, T. R. Whittier, J. R. Baker, D. V. Peck, J.
McGue, R. M. Hughes, D. McMullen, D. Stevens, J. L. Stoddard, J. Lazorchak, W.
Kinney, A. R. Selle, and R. Hjort. 1991. EMAP-Surface Waters Monitoring and
Research Strategy Fiscal Year 1991. EPA/600/3-91/022. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Environmental Research Laboratory, Corvallis, Oregon.
Stanley, T.W., ans S.S. Verner. 1986. The U.S. Environmental Protections Agency's quality
assurance program. Pp. 12-19 ]N: J.K. Taylor and T.W. Stanley (eds.). Quality
Assurance for Environmental Measurements. ASTM STP 867, American Society for
Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.
1-16
-------
SECTION 2
DAILY OPERATIONS SUMMARY
by
John R. Baker and David V. Peck
2.1 SAMPLING SCENARIO
Two days are required to sample most lakes. A third day is allotted for predeparture
and postsampling activities (e.g., cleaning equipment, repairing gear, shipping samples, and
traveling to the next lake). In a normal week, if there is no down time due to weather or
supply problems, a field team can sample two lakes over 6 days. Larger lakes (>74 ha)
require additional travel time on the lake and 3 to 4 days are scheduled to sample these
lakes.
A field team is usually composed of three to four people. Under certain
circumstances, additional people may be required to assist teams sampling large lakes or
hike-in lakes. Two people are always in the boat to execute the sampling activities and
ensure safely. The remaining team member(s) usually remains on shore to provide logistical
support. Team members should rotate between boat and shore activities.
A daily field sampling scenario showing how the work load may be, split between
team members is presented in Figures 2-1 through 2-3. Each field team should work with
and modify this scenario, defining roles and responsibilities for each team member, to
organize field activities efficiently. Most roles and responsibilities should be defined by the
end of the training program.
The sequence of sampling events presented in Figures 2-1 through 2-3 cannot be
changed without prior direction from the Communications Center (see Section 3.2.3). The
sequence is based partially on the need to protect some types of samples from potential
contamination and to minimize holding times once samples are collected. The following
sections further define the sampling sequence and the protocols for sampling activities.
-------
ARRIVE AT LAKE SITE
c
SHORE (1 Person)
• Set up staging area
• Prepare fishing gear, forms,
and supplies
• Prepare for benthos sampling
(if done on Day 1)
BOAT (2 Persons) ' b
• Verify lake and launch site I
• Load lake profile and physical habitat equipment I
and forms 1
• Launch boat, locate and anchor at index site 1
• Conduct lake profile |
• Mark index site . 1
• Conduct habitat characterizations 1
• Locate benthos sampling sites, collect benthos samples, 1
and conduct zebra mussel survey (if feasible on Day 1) |
DETERMINE FISHING GEAR DEPLOYMENT
SHORE (1 Person)
Prepare forms and voucher jars
Assist with loading boat
Continue preparing staging area
Prepare for night seining
Preserve benthos samples (if collected)
and prepare for transport
BOAT (2 Persons)
Load boat
Deploy fishing gear
RETURN TO SHORE
SHORE (1 Person) k
• Prepare for night seining jj .
BOAT (2 Persons) bj
• Check gill nets (if necessary) |
RETURN TO SHORE
SHORE (3 Persons)
Process fish from gill nets (if necessary)
Prepare for night seining
ii^BMB^^BSi^WHtSSffjSil
NIGHT SEINING
BOAT (3 Persons)
Conduct seining
J
RETURN TO SHORE
•PBWimuLjj.i!j.iitMKaiifcadi
SHORE (3 Persons)
• Process fish from seining
• Load equipment and supplies
' Clean up launch site
1 Trailer boat (if necessary)
1 Review data forms
RETURN TO CAMP OR BASE SITE
• Contact Communications Center
HOOPOS5.PPT
Figure 2-1. Day 1 field sampling scenario.
2-2
-------
c
ARRIVE AT LAKE SITE
SHORE (1 Person)
• Set up staging area
« Prepare for fish tissue processing
• Prepare equipment and supplies
for water and sediment sampling
BOAT (2 Persons)
Load fish processing supplies and forms
Launch boat
Retrieve fishing gear
Tally fish for each gear set
Prepare vouchers and tissue specimens
SHORE (1 Person)
Process fish tissue samples
Prepare voucher jars for transport
Prepare equipment and supplies for benthos
sampling (if not completed on Day 1)
BOAT (2 Persons)
• Load equipment and supplies for water
and sediment sampling
1 Locate index site, determine Secchi
transparency, and collect samples
SHORE (1 Person)
Check and prepare water and sediment
samples for transport
Clean and organize equipment for loading
BOAT (2 Persons)
Load equipment and supplies for benthos sampling
(if not collected on Day 1)
Locate physical habitat stations and sampling sites
Collect samples and conduct zebra mussel survey
(if not accomplished on Day 1)
Remove site markers
SHORE (3 Persons)
Check and prepare benthos samples for transport
Complete Lake Assessment Form
Conduct final review of data forms and samples
Load vehicle and boat
Clean up staging area
Inspect and clean boat, motor, and trailer to
prevent transfer of nuisance species
RETURN TO CAMP OR BASE SITE
• Contact Communications Center
FLDOPEX95.PPT
Figure 2-2. Day 2 field sampling scenario.
2-3
-------
c
POST-SAMPLING ACTIVITIES
1 Parson
Prepare samples and forms for shipment
2 Persons
Clean boat, trailer, and equipment
Inventory supplies
Repair equipment
Fuel vehicle
BEGIN TRAVEL TO NEXT BASE OR CAMPING SITE
MEET FIELD COORDINATOR
(every 7 to 10 days)
Transfer fish voucher samples
TRAVEL TO AIR COURIER FACILITY
• Generate shipping forms with Sample
Tracking and Reporting System
1 Ship samples
1 Ship completed data forms
• Ship tracking diskettes
ARRIVE AT NEXT BASE OR CAMPING SITE
Prepare forpredeparture activities
Contact Communications Center to file status report
and itinerary for next lake
C
PREDEPARTURE ACTIVITIES
1 Person
Review lake dossier
Prepare Itinerary
Confirm access permission
2 Persons
Perform meter performance checks
Check and load equipment and supplies
Perform safety checks
Fuel vehicles and boat
Figure 2-3. Day 3 field sampling scenario.
2-4
-------
Day 1
Sampling activities on the first day will extend past dusk. The team should arrive at
the lake before midmorning to accomplish all of these activities. The sampling sequence for
Day 1 is to:
• verify lake and locate index site,
• conduct depth profile measurements of dissolved oxygen and temperature,
• conduct physical habitat characterization (optional: collect benthos sample and
conduct zebra mussel survey), ,
• deploy fishing gear, and
• check gill nets (if required by permit) and conduct night seining activities.
Protocols for these activities are described in Sections 4 through 6.
Day 2
A full day is required for Day 2 sampling activities. The team should arrive at the lake
in the early morning to complete the sampling at a reasonable time. The sampling sequence
for Day 2 is to:
• retrieve fish gear and tally fish,
• process fish tissue samples,
• prepare fish voucher specimens,
• determine Secchi disk transparency,
• collect water chemistry samples and filter chlorophyll sample,
• collect zooplankton samples,
• collect sediment diatom samples, and
• collect benthos samples (if not previously collected) and conduct zebra mussel
survey.
Protocols for these activities are described in Sections 6 through 9.
A third day is allotted for these lake activities on large lakes (>74 ha) with only half
the fish gear set out on Day 1; the first half of the gear is retrieved and the second half is set
out on Day 2. On Day 3 the second half of the gear is retrieved and the remainder of Day 2 .
activities are completed.
Day3
2-5
-------
Section 3 of this manual discusses Day 3 activities at a base site. These activities
consist of preparations required before departing for a lake site and of postsarnpling
activities required after leaving the lake site.
2.2 RECORDING DATA AND OTHER INFORMATION
During the 2- to 3-day visit to a lake, a field crew is required to obtain and record a
substantial amount of data and other information for all the various ecological indicators
described in Section 1. In addition, all the various samples collected need to be identified
and tracked, and associated information for each sample must be recorded.
It is imperative that field and sample information be recorded accurately, consistently,
and legibly. Measurement data that cannot be accurately interpreted by others besides the
field crews and samples with incorrect or illegible information associated with them are lost to
the program. The cost of a sampling visit coupled with the short index period severely limits
the ability to resample a lake if the initial information recorded was inaccurate or illegible.
Some guidelines to assist field personnel with information recording are presented in Table
2-1. These include a list of flags or qualifiers for data and samples and guidance for
completing forms and. labels while in the field and before shipping.
2-6
-------
TABLE 2-1. GUIDELINES FOR RECORDING FIELD DATA AND OTHER INFORMATION
Activity
Guidelines
Field Measurements
Data Recording
Record measurement values and observations on data forms preprinted on
water-resistant paper.
Use No. 2 pencil only (fine-point indelible markers can be used if necessary)
to record information on forms.
Record data and information using correct format as provided on data
forms.
Print legibly (and as large as possible). Clearly distinguish letters from
numbers (e.g., 0 versus O, 2 versus Z, 7 versus T or F, etc.), but do
not use slashes.
In cases where information is to be recorded repeatedly on a series of lines
(e.g., fish species codes or physical habitat characteristics), do not use
"ditto marks" (") or a straight vertical line. Record the information that
is repeated on the first and last lines, then connect these using a wavy
vertical line.
When recording comments, print or write legibly. Make notations in
comments field only; avoid marginal notes. Be concise, but avoid
using abbreviations or "shorthand" notations. If you run out of space,
attach a sheet of paper with the additional information, rather than
trying to squeeze everything into the space provided on the form.
Data Qualifiers
(Flags)
Use only defined flag codes and record on data form in appropriate field.
K = Measurement not attempted or not recorded.
Q = Failed quality control check; remeasurement not possible.
U = Suspect measurement; remeasurement not possible.
Fn = Miscellaneous flags (/i=1, 2, etc.) assigned by a field crew
during a particular sampling visit (also used for qualifying
samples).
Explain reason for using each flag in comments section on data form.
Review of Data
Forms
Review data forms for accuracy, completeness, and legibility before leaving
lake.
The Field Coordinator or the Communications Center personnel must
review all data forms for consistency, correctness, and legibility before
transfer to the Information Management Center.
(continued)
2-7
-------
TABLE 2-1 (continued)
Activity
Guidelines
Sample Collection and Tracking
Sample Labels
Use adhesive labels with preprinted ID numbers and follow the standard
recording format for each type of sample.
Use a fine-point indelible marker to record information on labels. Cover
completed labels with clear tape.
Sample Collection
Information
Record sample ID number from label and associated collection information on
sample collection form preprinted on water-resistant paper.
Use a No. 2 pencil only (fine-point indelible fine-tipped markeis can be used if
necessary to record information on forms).
Record collection information using correct format as provided on the sample
collection form.
Sample Qualifiers
(Flags)
Use only defined flag codes and record on sample collection form in
appropriate field.
K = Sample not collected or lost before shipment; resampling not
possible.
U = Suspect sample (e.g., possible contamination, does not meet
minimum acceptability requirements, or collected by non-
standard procedure).
Fn = Miscellaneous flags (n=1,2, etc.) assigned by a field crew
during a particular sampling visit (also used for field
measurements).
Explain reason for using each flag in comments section on sample collection
form.
Review of Labels
and Collection
Forms
Compare information recorded on labels and sample collection form for
accuracy before leaving lake.
Review labels and sample collection form for accuracy, completeness, and
legibility before leaving lake.
The Field Coordinator or the Communications Center personnel must review
sample collection forms for consistency, correctness, and legibility before
transfer to the Information Management Center.
2-8
-------
SECTION 3
BASE SITE ACTIVITIES
by
Glenn D. Merritt, Victoria C. Rogers, and David V. Peck
Field teams conduct a number of activities at their base site. These include tasks
that must be completed both before departure to the lake site and after return from the site
(Figure 3-1). A full day is allotted to these predeparture and postsampling activities. Close
attention to these activities is required to ensure that the field teams know where they are
going, access is permissible and possible, equipment and supplies are available at the lake
in good order to complete the sampling effort, and samples are packed and shipped
appropriately. All activities are organized through the Field Coordinator who provides team
supervision.
3.1 PREDEPARTURE ACTIVITIES
Predeparture activities include development of sampling itineraries, instrument
calibration, equipment checks and repair, supply inventories, and sample container
preparation. Procedures for these activities are described in the following.sections.
3.1.1 Daily Itineraries
The Field Coordinators are responsible for developing sampling schedules and Team
Leaders are responsible for developing daily itineraries. The Team Leader reviews each
lake dossier to ensure that it contains the appropriate maps, contacts, copies of permission
letters, and access instructions. Additional activities include confirming the best access
routes, calling the landowners or local contacts, confirming lodging plans, and coordinating
rendezvous locations with individuals who must meet with field teams prior to accessing a
site. This information is used to develop an itinerary. Each Team Leader is required to
provide the Field Coordinator (through the Communications Center) with a team schedule for
each week of sampling. Schedules include departure time, estimated duration of excursion,
routes of travel, location of any overnight stops (including telephone number), and estimated
time of arrival at the final destination for each lake and for each day. The portable computer
each team takes into the field is furnished with an electronic "road atlas" software package
that provides general assistance in planning routes to the site. Changes in the itinerary
-------
BASE OR CAMPING SITE
Team Leader
Prepare itinerary
Make access contacts
Crew Members
1 calibrate dissolved C
Initialize Global Positioning System
(if necessary)
Prepare sample containers and labels
Pack equipment and supplies
using checklist
NEXT BASE OR CAMPING SITE
Team Leader
Review forms and labels
Enter sample tracking information into computer
Package and ship samples and data forms
File status report with Communications Center
Review lake dossier information
Crew Members
Clean and perform safety checks
(boat, trailer, and equipment)
Charge or replace batteries
Refuel vehicle and boat
Obtain ice and other consumable supplies
as needed
FUXJPEXSWPT
Figure 3-1. Overview of base site activities.
3-2
-------
during the week must also be relayed by the Team Leader through the Communications
Center to the Field Coordinator as soon as possible. Miscommunications can result in the
initiation of expensive search and rescue procedures and disruption of carefully planned
schedules. Communications requirements and schedules are described in the regional
activities plan.
3.1.2 Instrument Checks and Calibration
Each field team must test and calibrate instruments prior to departure for the lake
site. Field instruments include a Yellow Springs Instrument (YSI) Model 57 dissolved oxygen
(DO) meter equipped with a 60-m cable and a Magellan NAV 5000 Global Positioning
System (GPS) receiver. The procedures described here are designed for these instruments.
Additional backup instruments are available through the Field Coordinator if instruments fail
the performance tests or calibrations described in the following subsections.
3.1.2.1 Dissolved Oxygen Meter Performance Test-
Test and precalibrate the dissolved oxygen meter prior to departure from the lodging
location. Figure 3-2 summarizes the dissolved oxygen meter performance test and
calibration procedure. Turn on the instrument, place the function selection switch to "ZERO,"
and adjust the electronic zero. Verify that the salinity switch is turned to the "ZERO-FRESH"
position. Set the function selection switch knob to "RED LINE" and align the needle with the
red line using the adjustment knob. Replace the batteries if the instrument will not adjust to
the red line. These checks and adjustments ensure that the batteries are charged and the
electronics are functional.
Follow this procedure by checking the membrane of the dissolved oxygen probe. If
bubbles are present, if the membrane is discolored or torn, use a backup probe and replace
the membrane on the original probe. (Note: new membranes must stabilize for 24 hours
before use if possible.)
To test whether the dissolved oxygen meter can be calibrated, place the probe in an
air-filled calibration chamber. Submerge the chamber in a water bath with the air valve open
and the air tube above water. After thermally equilibrating for 15 minutes, determine the
chamber temperature by turning the function selection switch to "TEMPERATURE." Check
temperatures measured with the thermistor against an accurate thermometer. If
temperatures differ by more than ±1.0 °C, replace the probe. Determine the theoretical
oxygen concentration for water-saturated air at the chamber temperature by using the
temperature and altitude-correction factor tables provided on the back of the meter or in the
manufacturer's operation manual. Multiply the theoretical oxygen value by the altitude-
correction factor (estimated to the nearest 100-ft elevation) to get the calibration value. Then
3-3
-------
Replace
batteries
or meter
Replace
membrane
Replace
probe
CHECK METER
• Turn meter on
• Adjust electronic zero
• Adjust salinity knob (0-FRESH)
FAIL
FAIL
PASS
EQUILIBRATE PROBE
Insert probe into calibration chamber
Open air valve
Immerse in water bath for 15 minutes
to equilibrate
FAIL
Temperature
Check
(within ±1 °C)?
PASS
CALIBRATE METER
Calibrate meter to theoretical O2 value for water-
saturated air at chamber temperature and pressure
Replace probe
and/or meter
J
YES
TAKE METER TO THE LAKE
Figure 3-2. Performance test and calibration procedure for the dissolved oxygen meter.
3-4
-------
set the function selection switch to one of two dissolved oxygen scales and adjust the
oxygen calibration knob to the calibration oxygen value. Do not record the base site
performance test information at this time. The meter is calibrated again at the lake.
Calibration information is recorded at that time.
If the instrument does not pass the performance test and calibration, replace the
meter and/or probe. After the test, turn the meter off, fill the calibration chamber with tap
water, and insert the probe for storage. Each field crew receives a copy of the
manufacturer's calibration procedures and maintenance information.
3.1.2.2 Global Positioning System Battery Check and Position Initialization-
Turn on the GPS receiver and check the batteries prior to departure. During the self-
test procedure the display indicates battery operation by displaying "battery power." Low
battery power is indicated by a battery symbol that appears in the lower right-hand corner of
the display. This symbol remains until the batteries are replaced. Replace batteries
immediately if a battery warning is displayed.
WARNING: The batteries must be replaced when you see the second warning
display: "REPLACE BAITS OR LOSE DATA." If shut off within 2 minutes of this
display, the unit will retain memory for a month if the batteries are not removed.
Replacing the battery packs must be completed within 2 minutes or the memory will
be lost.
The GPS receiver must be Initialized prior to its first use. The receiver must be
initialized again if it transported more than 300 miles from the previous initialization point.
Instructions for initializing the unit are in Table 3-1.
3.1.3 Equipment Preparation
To ensure that all activities at a lake can be conducted completely and efficiently,
field teams must check all equipment and supplies before traveling to a lake site. In addition,
they must label and assemble packets of sample containers.
Check the inventory of supplies and equipment prior to departure using the lake-visit
checklists. Appendix B contains a complete set of checklists. Use these checklists to
ensure that all needed materials are taken to each lake; use of the lists is mandatory. Pack
meters, probes, and sampling gear in such a way as to minimize physical shock and
vibration during transport. If necessary, prepare stock preservation solutions as described in
Table 3-2. Follow the regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration
3-5
-------
TABLE 3-1. INITIALIZATION PROCEDURES FOR THE GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM8
1. Turn unit ON.
2. At the "READY" display, push "SETUP."
3. Press "CLEAR" to erase previous position.
4. Enter the latitude of a known reference point from a USGS quadrangle map to the nearest degree.
Trailing zeroes are entered automatically. Press "-»" to get the "N" display. Press "ENTER" to
store."
5. Enter the longitude of the same reference point to nearest degree.. Trailing zeroes are entered
automatically. Press "-"to get the W display. Press "ENTER" to store."
6. Press "i" and then "CLEAR" to erase altitude. Enter the altitude to the nearest 50 feet. Press
"ENTER" to store.
7. Initialization completed. Turn unit OFF or press "POS" for position.
* These procedures are specific to the Magellan NAV 5000 global positioning system unit used during
EMAP-Surface Waters surveys.
b Initialization is effective for a 300 mile radius from the reference point. If a GPS receiver is
transported outside of this radius, the receiver must be re-initialized using a new reference point.
TABLE 3-2. STOCK SOLUTIONS, USES, AND METHODS FOR PREPARATION
Solution
Bleach
(10%)
Sucrose
(saturated)
Borax buffered
formalin"
(PH7-8)
Carbonate
buffered
formalinb
(PH 10)
Use
Clean nets, other gear, and inside of
boat.
To equalize osmotic pressure of
zooplankton samples.
Preservative for fish vouchers and for
zooplankton samples.
Preservative for benthic invertebrate
samples.
Preparation
Add 400 mL bleach to 3,600 mL distilled
water.
Add 320 g granular sucrose per liter of
distilled water. Chill. Add 1 to 2 mL
formalin per liter as preservative.
Add 400 g borax to each 20-L carton of
100% formalin. Test with pH paper.
Add 500 g Na2CO3 to each 20-L carton of
100% formalin. Test pH with paper.
Handle formalin according to 29 CFR 1910.1048.
b High pH solution required to preserve mollusk shells.
3-6
-------
(OSHA). Those pertaining to formalin are in 29 CFR 1910.1048 (see regional activities
plan). Add 10 mL of saturated sucrose solution to 4 mL of stock formalin (100%, pH 7-8) to
each of two zooplankton sample bottles, using either a syringe or a bottle labeled with the
appropriate volumes. Seal the jars with electrical tape prior to departure and place each jar
in a 1-qt self-sealing plastic bag.
In addition, inspect the vehicles, boats, and trailers every morning before departure.
Pay particular attention to the trailer hitch, electrical connections, tiedowns, and air pressure
in tires and the boats. Refuel vehicles and conduct maintenance activities the night before a
sampling trip. Check trailer lights, turn signals, and brake lights before departure.
Label sample containers before departing from the base site. Figure 3-3 provides
examples of preprinted labels. Labels or tags that will be placed with samples stored in
formalin must be printed on 100 percent rag content or water resistant paper. Label and
package the sample containers into sample kits prior to departure. Container labels should
not be covered with clear tape until all information is completed during sampling at the lake.
Store an extra kit of sampling supplies (syringes, syringe valves, Cubitainers, bottles,
chlorophyll filters, foil, gloves, and labels) in the vehicles. Inventory these extra supply kits
prior to each lake visit.
1
3.2 POSTSAMPLING ACTIVITIES
Upon return to a lodging location after sampling, the team reviews all labels and
completed data forms (with the Field Coordinator when possible) for accuracy,
completeness, and legibility and makes a final inspection of samples. If information is
missing from the forms or labels, the Team Leader attempts to fill in the information
accurately. The Team Leader will initial all data forms after review. If obtainable samples
are missing, the lake must be rescheduled through the Communications Center for complete
sampling. Other postsampling activities include: inspection and cleaning of sampling
equipment, inventory and sample preparation, sample shipment, and communications.
3.2.1 Equipment Cleanup and Check
Table 3-3 describes the equipment cleaning procedures. Inspect all equipment,
including nets, boat, and trailer, and clean off any plant and animal material. This effort
ensures that introductions of nuisance species such as water-milfoil and zebra mussels do
not occur between lakes. Prior to leaving a lake, drain all bilge water or live wells in the boat
and discard all water from the fish buckets. Inspect, clean, and handpick plant and animal
remains from vehicle, boat, motor, and trailer that contact lake water. Be especially careful
3-7
-------
WATER CHEMSTRY
LAKE ID: L
DATE:_/_/94
CU S1 S2 S3 S4
312077
ZOOPLANKTON - FINE/COARSE
LAKE ID: L
SITE ID: X
TOW LENGTH:
312497
CHLOROPHYLL
LAKE ID: L
DATC:_/_/84
VOLUME: irt
311701
BENTHOS - CORE
LAKE ID: L
DATE:
_/84
STATION:
SAMPLE T*PE:R1 OTHER:
311182
SEDIMENT CORE-TOP/BOTTOM
LAKE ID: L
DATE: / /94
INTERVAL: from to cm
CORE LENGTH: _cm
31153O
FISH - JAR
'LAKE ID: ',
DATE: / / _
FISH TISSUE
LAKE ID: L
DATE: / /84
312305
FISH VOUCHER - TAG
LAKE ID: ;
DATE: / /
SITE ID: F
TOTAL #:
01 [III
Figure 3-3. Sample container labels.
3-8
-------
TABLE 3-3. POSTSAMPLING EQUIPMENT CARE
1. Clean for biological contaminants (e.g., water milfoil, zebra mussels, and alewife).
- Prior to departing from a lake, drain all bilge and live-well water from the boat and discard
water in fish buckets.
- At the lake, inspect motors, boat, and the trailer for evidence of plant fragments especially in or
near the propeller and water intakes. Remove all plant fragments.
- At the lake or base site, dry out gill nets, trap nets, seines, and minnow traps and inspect and
remove any remnant vegetation or animal life. If the weather is rainy and fishing gear cannot
be dried, then use a different (backup) set of gear at the next lake, if available. If an additional
set of gear is not available, disinfect gear with 10 percent bleach solution.
- If a commercial car wash facility is available, take vehicle, boat, trailer, and fishing gear and
thoroughly clean (hot water pressurized rinse-no soap).
2. Clean and dry other equipment prior to storage.
- Rinse chlorophyll filtration chamber three times with distilled water after each use.
- Briefly soak zooplankton nets in a dilute bleach solution (10 percent) and dry after each use.
Do not dry in sunlight because the mesh is photosensitive.
- Rinse core sampler, sectioning apparatus, and siphon with tap water at the base site.
- Rinse coolers with water to clean off any dirt or debris on the outside and inside.
3. Check fish nets for holes and repair, if possible; otherwise, set damaged gear aside and locate
replacements.
4. Inventory equipment and supply needs and relay orders to the Field Coordinator through the
Communications Center.
5. Remove dissolved oxygen meters and GPS from carrying cases and set up for predeparture
checks and calibration. Examine the oxygen membranes for cracks, wrinkles, or bubbles.
Replace if necessary.
6. Recharge batteries (e.g., 12-V wet cells and computer batteries) overnight if possible. Replace
other batteries (e.g., GPS unit and dissolved oxygen meter) as necessary.
7. Recheck field forms from the day's sampling activities. Make corrections and completions where
possible, and initial each form after review.
8. Replenish fuel.
3-9
-------
that all nets are cleared of any fish or fish parts. Dry out gill nets, trap nets, seines, and
minnow traps and inspect and remove any remnants of vegetation or animal life. If weather
is rainy and fishing gear cannot be dried out, then use a different (backup) set of gear, if
available, at the next lake. If an additional set of gear is not available, disinfect with a 10
percent bleach solution. Take care regarding application of bleach to nets to avoid damage
to lawns and plantings. Pavement is a preferred location for treatment of trap nets with
bleach solution. Before moving to the next lake, if a commercial car wash facility is available,
wash vehicle, boat, trailer, and fishing gear and thoroughly clean (hot water pressurized
rinse-no soap).
3.2.2 Shipment of Samples and Forms
The field team ships samples as soon as possible after collection. Samples are
usually shipped on the full day allotted for predeparture and postsampling activities. The
regional activities plan gives specific information for shipping destinations and times within a
region. Initiate sample tracking at this time using the notebook computers, bar-code readers,
and the Information Management Handbook. Log samples into the sample tracking and
reporting system. For more detailed information refer to the Information Management
Handbook. If the computer and bar-code reader are inoperable, complete the tracking
information by hand on the backup forms provided. Packaging and shipping guidelines for
each type of sample are summarized in Table 3-4.
Ship samples of chlorophyll, water chemistry, and fish tissue samples in coolers
packed with ice. Line each shipping cooler with a large 30-gallon plastic bag. Inside,
contain the ice separately within numerous (as many as possible) 1-gallon self-sealing
plastic bags and ensure that the ice is fresh before shipment. Use block ice when available.
It should be sealed in a 30-gallon plastic bag. White or clear bags will allow for labeling with
a dark indelible marker. Label all bags of ice as "ICE" with an indelible marker to prevent
misidentification by couriers of any leakage of water as a possible hazardous material spill.
To ship the Cubitainer and syringes, line the shipping cooler with a 30-gal plastic bag.
Place another garbage bag in the cooler, and place the samples in the second bag. For
each sample ensure that the Cubitainer and each of the four syringes have identical bar
codes. Ensure that all entries are complete and close the bag of samples. Place bags of ice
around it. Then close the cooler liner (outer garbage bag). Ship water samples on the day
of collection whenever possible. If not possible, they must be shipped the next day.
The chlorophyll sample is collected and wrapped in foil and placed into a 1-quart self-
sealing plastic bag as described in Section 7. When preparing this sample for shipping,
make sure that the label with bar code is on the foil, all entries are complete, and the label is
3-10
-------
completely covered with clear plastic tape. Place each 1-quart sample bag in a 1-gallon self-
sealing plastic bag. Place the self-sealing plastic sample bags inside the cooler liner in a
manner that protects them from exposure to water from melting ice. Then seal the cooler
liner. Ship the chlorophyll samples with the corresponding water chemistry samples on the
day of collection whenever possible. If this is not possible, they must be shipped the next
day.
The composite fish tissue sample(s) is prepared, packed in one plastic bag which is
then sealed in a second plastic bag, and chilled at the lake (as described in Section 6). For
shipping, upon arrival at the base site, open the cooler and the cooler liner. Remove the
bags of ice and replace them with fresh bags of ice. Put in as many bags of ice as will fit into
the cooler. Then seal the cooler liner. Close the cooler. Package and label the cooler for
shipping as described in the regional activities plan. Ship fish tissue samples the same day
they are processed, whenever possible. If not possible, they must be shipped the next day
with fresh ice.
For sediment core samples, open the hard plastic box and ensure that the labels with
bar codes are complete, covered with clear plastic tape, and attached to each of the two
bags of sediment (top and bottom). Close the box and seal it with electrical tape. Place the
box in the shipping cooler. Core samples can be placed in coolers containing fish tissue
samples, if desired, for shipping.
Zooplankton samples are preserved in a 10 percent solution of sucrose and borax-
buffered formalin and then sealed at the lakeside (as described in Section 7). To prepare
zooplankton samples for shipping, ensure that there is a different label with bar code taped
on each of the two jars (one labeled "coarse" and one "fine"). If a sample requires an
additional jar, make sure the bar code number of the corresponding labeled sample is
recorded on the label and it is marked either "coarse" or "fine" to agree with first jar. Verify
that each jar is sealed with electrical tape and sealed in a quart-size self-sealing plastic bag.
Place both quart-size self-sealing plastic bags in a gallon-size self-sealing plastic bag.
Zooplankton samples can be included in a hardshell plastic cooler with benthic samples for
transport.
Benthic invertebrate samples are preserved in 10 percent carbonate-buffered
formalin (4 percent formaldehyde) and sealed at the lakeside as described in Section 8
where up to twenty 500-mL jars are placed in each hardshell plastic cooler and surrounded
with crumpled newspaper or vermiculite. Ensure that the bar code number is entered on the
jar label, and the label is covered with tape. For shipping, label the shipping containers and
complete the airbills as directed in the regional activities plan for such samples. Zooplankton
samples can be shipped with benthic samples.
3-11
-------
TABLE 3-4. SAMPLE PACKAGING AND SHIPPING GUIDELINES
The regional activities plan gives specific information for shipping destinations and times within a
region. Log samples into the sample tracking and reporting system developed for the region.
In general, ship samples that require preservation in hardshell plastic coolers packed with ice:
1. Line each cooler with a large, 30-gallon plastic bag.
2. Pack ice in as many 1-gallon self-sealing bags as possible to fit inside the 30-gallon plastic
bag. Use block ice when available (seal it in a 30-gallon plastic bag). Mark each bag "ICE"
with an indelible marker to prevent misidentification of any water leakage as a possible
hazardous material spill.
3. Place samples and bags of ice inside the cooler liner and seal the cooler liner.
4. Close the cooler.
5, Package and label the cooler for shipping as described in the regional activities plan.
A. Water chemistry, chlorophyll, and fish tissue samples
Water c/7em/sfry--Cubitainer and syringes.
1. Place another garbage bag inside the cooler liner.
2. Confirm that the Cubitainer and each of the four syringes are labeled and have identical bar
codes.
3. Place the Cubitainer in the second bag and close. Place syringes in a plastic box, seal it
with electrical tape, and put the box in the cooler with the Cubitainer.
4. Ship water samples on the day of collection whenever possible. If not possible, these
samples must be shipped the next day with fresh ice.
C/7/orop/7y/A-previously wrapped in foil and placed in a 1-qt self-sealing plastic bag.
1. Confirm that the label with bar code on the foil is completed and covered with clear tape.
2. Place the 1-qt sample bags in a 1-gal self-sealing plastic bag.
3. Place the 1-gal bag in the cooler. To reduce the risk of exposure to meltwater, the sample
may be placed in the container with the water chemistry syringe samples.
4. Surround the bag with bags of fresh ice. It is important to keep chlorophyll samples as cold
as possible.
5. Ship the chlorophyll samples, with the corresponding water chemistry samples when
appropriate, on the day of collection whenever possible. If shipping on the day of collection
is not possible, the samples must be shipped the next day with fresh ice.
Fish tfssue-previously prepared, bagged, and chilled.
1. At the base site open the cooler and the cooler liner.
2. Remove the bags of ice and replace them with fresh bags of ice. Put in as many bags of ice
as will fit into the cooler.
3. Ship the fish tissue samples the same day they are processed whenever possible. If not
possible, they must be shipped the next day with fresh ice.
B. Sediment Core Samples-stored in plastic box.
1. Open the box to confirm that the labels with bar codes attached to each of the two bags of
sediment (top and bottom) are complete and covered with clear plastic tape.
2. Close the box and seal it with electrical tape.
3. Place the box in the shipping cooler. Core samples may be placed in coolers containing fish
tissue samples, if desired.
(continued)
3-12
-------
TABLE 3-4. (continued)
C. Zooplankton samples-preserved in a 10% solution of sucrose and borax-buffered formalin and
then sealed at the lake.
1. Confirm that the two jars have different labels (one for "coarse" and one for "fine") with the
bar code taped on each. If a sample requires an additional jar, confirm that the bar code
number of the corresponding labeled sample is recorded on the label.
2. Verify that each jar is sealed with electrical tape and sealed in a quart-size self-sealing
plastic bag.
3. Place both quart-size self-sealing plastic bags in a gallon-size self-sealing plastic bag.
4. Place the bags in the appropriate shipping container. Zooplankton samples may be placed
in the cooler with the benthic samples for transport.
5. Samples can be held for a short period before shipment. Transport the samples as
described in the regional activities plan.
D. Benthic invertebrate samples-preserved in 10% carbonate-buffered formalin and sealed at the
lake.
1. Check to make sure jars are sealed with electrical tape.
2. Place up to twenty 500-mL jars in each cooler.
3. Surround the jars with crumpled newspaper, yermiculite, or other absorbent material.
4. Transport the samples as described in the regional activities plan. Benthic samples can be
shipped with zooplankton samples as hazardous materials.
E. Fish voucher specimens-preserved in 10% borax-buffered formalin and sealed at the lake. For
shipping:
1. Make sure jars are sealed with electrical tape.
2. Place the voucher sample containers in plastic coolers.
3. Surround the jars with crumpled newspaper, vermiculite, or other absorbent material.
4. Transport the samples as described in the regional activities plan. The Field Coordinator
may collect the coolers of voucher specimens, the team may deliver them directly to the
museum, or the team may need to ship these samples by courier as hazardous materials.
3-13
-------
Fish voucher specimens are preserved in 10 percent borax-buffered formalin (4
percent formaldehyde) and sealed at the lakeside as described in Section 6 and the regional
activities plan. Check to confirm that each jar has a completed label, completely covered
with clear tape. Voucher sample containers are placed in hardshell plastic coolers and
surrounded with crumpled newspaper, vermiculite, or other absorbent material. The Field
Coordinator may periodically collect the coolers of voucher specimens, takes them to the
museum, and supplies the team with cases of empty containers for vouchers. In some
instances a team may deliver vouchers directly to the museum and obtain empty bottles. In
other cases, samples and containers may need to be shipped by courier. If shipping by
courier, complete airbills as directed in the regional activities plan for such samples. If
required, attach the appropriate hazardous material label to the outside of the cooler or other
container used to ship the samples.
To improve their fish identification skills, team members may examine their voucher
specimens, but it is essential to maintain voucher integrity and specimen quality and to follow
appropriate safety precautions. Handling of specimens should be very limited during the first
72 hours after collection to allow the fish tissue to harden. Open only one bottle at a time to
prevent inadvertent mixing of vouchers; return specimens to the bottle when finished. Only
handle specimens with forceps and wear protective clothing (see the regional activities plan).
Open bottles and examine vouchers in a well-ventilated area, preferably outdoors.
3.2.3 Communications
A regional communications center (see regional activities plan for regional locations
and telephone numbers) is the central point of contact for information exchange among field
teams, the EMAP-Surface Waters management and QA staffs, the .information management
team, analytical laboratories, and the public. The Communications Center also monitors all
aspects of field sampling activities, including coordinating and tracking field sample
shipments to the analytical laboratories, and responds to supplies replenishment requests.
Requests to replenish consumable supplies can be made weekly but are not
restricted to that frequency. When possible, teams should inventory their supplies after each
lake visit and submit requests well in advance of exhausting on-hand stocks. Requests for
supplies can be shipped with the lake data package by overnight courier. Should supplies
need to be replenished more quickly, notify the Communications Center by telephone and
the appropriate sources will be contacted.
As specified in the regional activities plan, each field Team Leader must call the
Communications Center and provide a brief description of activities during the previous week
including lakes visited, samples shipped, problems encountered, and requests for
3-14
-------
information. The Communications Center compiles a periodic status report from reports
submitted by the Team Leaders which is distributed to the management team, other Team
Leaders, and any interested individuals.
3-15
-------
-------
SECTION 4
LAKE VERIFICATION AND INDEX SITE LOCATION
by
John R. Baker and David V. Peck
Sampling the correct lake and locating the index site (deepest point on the lake) are
critical to the sampling design and to making regional lake population estimates about
condition. Data collected from the wrong lake are of no value to EMAP Surface Waters
monitoring and assessment efforts. On arriving at a lake, the GPS is a valuable tool to verify
the identity and location of a lake, however, lake verification must be supported by all
available information (e.g., maps, road signs, and GPS). Do not sample the lake if there is
reason to believe it is the wrong lake. Contact the Field Coordinator (via the
Communications Center) to resolve discrepancies.
\
Rigorous quality assurance practices are observed in the field. To assure accuracy,
completeness, and legibility in recording, field forms are completed by one individual and
checked by another to verify that all pertinent information is included. Figure 4-1
summarizes the activities described in this section.
4.1 LAKE VERIFICATION AT THE LAUNCH SITE
Record directions to the lake and a description of the launch site on the Lake
Verification Form, Side 2 (Figure 4-2) regardless of whether the site is sampled or not. This
information is very important and will be used in the future when the lake is revisited by
another sampling team. Provide information about signs, road numbers, gates, landmarks,
and any additional information you feel will be useful to another sampling team in relocating
this lake. It is also helpful to describe the distance traveled (miles) between turns. Also
describe the launch site on the same form. For example: Can the boat be launched with a
trailer? Are there fees? Is the launch paved or does it consist of soft sand? What
landmarks are at the launch?
The field tearn must verify that the lake is correctly identified and located. Lake
verification is based on map coordinates, locational data from the GPS when possible, and
any other evidence such as signs or conversations with local residents. Table 4-1 provides
operational instructions for the GPS receiver. Record locational coordinates for the lake on
the Lake Verification Form, Side 1 (Figure 4-3). Record the map coordinates for the lake
-------
2 DAYS BEFORE VISIT
Team Leader
Inform landowner of visit date and confirm access
DAY 1 ACTIVITIES
3 Persons
Review lake dossier for directions and access requirements
Travel to lake (2 vehicles)
Record directions on Lake Verification Form
ARRIVE AT LAUNCH SITE
VERIFY LAKE (1 Person)
Describe site on Lake Verification Form
Verify lake, complete verification form:
- Compare lake shape to map outline
- Take GPS reading, compare to lake coordinates
Delefmlne if lake meets target criteria for sampling
Record location on verification form map
PREPARE BOAT
(2 Persons)
Launch boat
Set up sonar unit
LOCATE INDEX SITE
SHORE (1 Person)
Set up staging area
Prepare equipment for other Day 1 activities
BOAT (2 Persons)
Travel to area of deepest water
Determine index site using sonar
Anchor and mark site, record location on
verification form map
Take GPS reading, record on verification form
f GPS « Global positioning system
rtoopexsspFT
Figure 4-1. Summary of lake verification and index site activities.
4-2
-------
LAKE ID:
LAKE VERIFICATION FORM (continued)
VISITS:
DIRECTIONS TO LAKE & LAUNCH SITE
Itf-l at OP lie* STeni
-fat- ~£ *tf.
n»
Iff}-). Ma* "I"
LAUNCH SITE DESCRIPTION
K..4 ^4- I.
I */ .j ,
i \ I Ti 'I I */ .1
SC/ tufttvt <»» fhart.. i'h»TAA» i's f»sy. 05 l*u*tl* fir* rl
<->pftM Cuit /f»»t I . ttlT-lt ItTritL pir* ftp jfa&G,.
GENERAL COMMENTS
I otfml* ff I fit ft A./ . / V 4 I
^
[>
-------
TABLE 4-1. GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM SURVEY PROCEDURES
1. Turn the unit ON.'
2. At the "READY" display, push "SETUP." Press " I" once and check if the mode is "AUTO."
Otherwise, use the"-" key to move to "AUTO." Then push "POS" for position.
3. If fix is "3D," note it on the Lake Verification Form. If fix is "2D," go to "SETUP," press " I" once,
press clear. Type in the altitude (ft) and "ENTER," then push "POS" and write down the 2D fix.
4. For both 2D and 3D fixes, push "1" twice and note the lowest signal quality (SQ) and geometric
quality (GQ)b as a number from 0-9 on the Lake Verification Form, Side 1.
5. If battery warnings appear, make sure that the unit is turned off immediately and ihe fresh battery
pack is inserted in the unit (six size AAs are needed).
6. Turn unit OFF.
8 These procedures are specific to the Magellan NAV ,5000 global positioning system unit used during
EMAP-Surface Waters surveys. Initialization of unit is required if it is moved more than 300 miles
from last position fix. See the unit manual.
" If GQ <;3, the crew should try to obtain another fix because the geometric quality is inadequate.
4-4
-------
LAKE VERIFICATION FORM
LAKE NAME; L,
DATE OF VISIT: 7/4E I fH VISITS:
LAKE ID: fL X—&. JL jCL L
TEAM ID (CIRCLE): 1 /T) 345678610 OTHER:
MODE OF ACCESS:
HE) HlKE-W AIRCRAFT
ARROW INDICATES NORTH
MARK SITE: L= LAUNCH X • INDEX
LAKE VERIFICATION INFORMATION
LAKE SHAPE COMPARES TO MAP?
[YES a NO
LAKE VERIRED BY (/ «ll Hurt apply) :
o Other (D««erlbe Her*);
° .Loc*t CoNTACT
a ROADS
o NOT VERIFIED (Explain In Comments)
COORDINATES
LATITUDE (dd mm as)
North
LONGITUDE (ddd mm n)
. Weil
TYPE OF GPS
FCC
SKJNAL GEourmic
QUALITY QUALITY
Are GPS Coordinates
w/l ±1 mln. ot map?
Map:
Launch Slt»:
lnd«xSlta:
Q2D
Q2D
XYES
XYES
DNO
PNO
LAKE
SAMPLED?
YES
REASON NOT SAMPLED (EXPLAIN BEU3W): o NOT VISITED o NON-TARGET a INACCESSIBLE a OTHER
Explanation:
CHECK HERE?
EXPLANATION B
CONTINUED ON BACK.
d
DESCRIBE LAUNCH SITE, LAKE DIRECTIONS, AND ADD COMMENTS ON BACK
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):.
Rev. 3/85 FLDFRMS.95
Lako Verification Form - 1
Figure 4-3. Lake Verification Form, Side 1.
4-5
-------
provided in the regional activities plan and the lake dossier on the Lake Verification Form. If
a GPS fix is obtained, check the GPS box and record the latitude, longitude, and the type of
satellite fix (2D or 3D) for the launch site. Compare the dossier map coordinates recorded
for the lake with the GPS coordinates displayed for the launch site. Check the Lake
Verification Form to see if the two sets of coordinates are within ±1.0 minute of latitude and
longitude. This distance is approximately equal to the precision of the GPS receiver (± 100
m) without differential correction of the position fix. If a GPS fix is not available, do not
record any information but try to obtain the information at a later time during the visit. A fix
may be taken at any time during a lake visit and recorded on the form. Mark the location of
the launch site with an "L" on the lake outline on the Lake Verification Form, Side 1 (Figure
4-3).
site:
In addition to the GPS, use as many of the following methods as possible to verify the
1. Obtain confirmation from a local person familiar with the area.
2. Identify confirming roads and signs.
3. Compare lake shape to that shown on the topographic map included in the lake
dossier (USGS 7.5 minute map or equivalent).
4. Determine lake position relative to identifiable topographic features shown on the
map.
If the lake shape on the map on the Lake Verification Form, Side 1 (Figure 4-3) and
on the USGS map do not correspond with each other or with the actual lake shape, check
"Not Verified" and provide comments on the Lake Verification Form. The lake should not be
sampled if there are major differences in lake shape and the sketch map cannot be used for
locating the physical habitat stations described in Section 5. At each lake, evaluate whether
or not the lake meets the EMAP definition of a lake:
• ^1 ha in total surface area
• s 100 square meters of open water
• &1 meter in depth
If the lake does not fit this definition, check "nontarget" in the lake sampled section on the
bottom of the Lake Verification Form, Side 1 (Figure 4-3) and provide an explanation for not
sampling the lake. Add any additional explanation as required.
4-6
-------
4.2 LAKE VERIFICATION AT THE INDEX SITE LOCATION
Estimate the deepest point in the lake (designated as the "index site") by using sonar
and a bathymetric map (if available in the dossier for the lake) and by observing the lake
shape and surrounding topography. Table 4-2 outlines sonar operation and procedures for
finding the index site. Once in the general area, use the sonar unit to locate the deepest
point. When an acceptable site is located, anchor the boat. Lower the anchor slowly to
minimize disturbance to the water column and sediment. Determine the coordinates of the
index site by GPS (if satellite coverage is available) and record on the Lake Verification
Form, Side 1 (Figure 4-3). If satellite coverage is not available at that time, try again during
the sample collection activities on Day 2 (The index site will be marked with a buoy).
Identify the index site on the sketch map with an "X" on the Lake Verification Form, Side 1
(Figure 4-3).
Compare the dossier coordinates recorded for the lake with those GPS coordinates
recorded for the index site. Check on the Lake Verification Form, Side 1 (Figure 4-3) if the
two sets of coordinates are within ±1.0 minute of latitude and longitude. If coordinates at the
launch site or the index site are not within ±1.0 minute of the map coordinates listed in the
regional activities plan and the dossier, question whether or not you are at the correct lake.
Information collected through the other methods described in the previous subsection should
always be considered before deciding whether or not the identity of a lake can be verified. If
the lake is sampled and coordinates are not within criteria or the lake shape does not match,
provide comments justifying your actions on the Lake Verification Form, Side 2 (Figure 4-2).
4.3 EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLY LIST
Figure 4-4 is the checklist for equipment and supplies required to conduct protocols
described in this section. It is similar to but may be different somewhat from the checklist in
Appendix B that is used at a base site to assure that all equipment and supplies are taken to
and available at the lake. Field teams must use the checklist presented in this section to
assure that the equipment and supplies are organized and available on the boat in order to
conduct protocols correctly and efficiently.
4-7
-------
TABLE 4-2. LOCATING THE INDEX SITE*
1. Attach the transducer bracket to boat transom. Position the transducer so that the streamlined
end faces forward. Connect the power supply and the transducer to the sonar unit.
2. Operate Sonar unit according to manufacturer's specific operating procedures. If possible, depth
readings should be made in metric units.
3. Use the sonar in the area expected to be the deepest. Mentally note the location of maximum
depth.
4. Return to the location of maximum depth. Anchor the boat.
5. Determine the coordinates using GPS. Record GPS coordinates on Side 1 of the Lake
Verification Form. __
* Total time to locate index site should be ^ 30 min.
4-8
-------
LAKE VERIFICATION CHECKLIST
Dossier for lake to be sampled
Clipboard
Lake Verification Form
Field notebook
Field Operations Manual and Field Handbook
Field Quick Reference Handbook
EMAP pamphlets
Sampling permit
Sonar
Pigtail adapter for 1 2-V battery
Transducer with bracket and C-clamp
12-V wet cell battery (charged) in battery case
GPS unit with manual, reference card, extra
battery pack
Anchor with 50 m line
Float to attach to anchor
Number Needed
Each Lake
1
1
1
1
1
1
20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1-2
1
Figure 4-4. Lake verification checklist.
4-9
-------
-------
SECTIONS
HABITAT CHARACTERIZATION
by
Philip R. Kaufmann and Thomas R. Whittier
Habitat characterization at a lake includes (1) measures of temperature and
dissolved oxygen at the index site, (2) measures or observations of littoral and riparian
physical habitat structure at 10 predetermined stations, and (3) macroscale classification and
mapping of riparian and littoral habitat for the whole lake. All of these data are used by the
field crew to determine the placement of fish sampling gear and benthic sampling sites.
Those biotic sampling activities are discussed in sections 6 and 8, respectively. Very rigid
quality assurance practices are observed in the field. To assure legibility and completeness
in recording, one individual completes the field forms and another checks them.
5.1 TEMPERATURE AND DISSOLVED OXYGEN
Most lakes deeper than 3 to 5 m are thermally stratified during the summer. Thus,
the vertical distribution of temperature and dissolved oxygen (DO) is important in assessing
lake habitat quality. The metalimnion is defined as the middle area of the water column
where the vertical temperature gradient is greater than or equal to 1.0 °C per meter of depth
(Figure 5-1). The thermocline is the depth, within the metalimnion, where this gradient is
greatest. These distribution profiles are used to characterize the pelagic (open water)
habitat by determining the depths of the top and bottom of the metalimnion (if present) and
the extent of oxygen depletion (operationally defined to be < 2 mg O2/L). This information is
used to select gill net sites (Section 6) and benthic sampling sites (Section 8). All
measurements are taken in a vertical profile at the index site after the lake verification and
index site location activities described in Section 4. The dissolved oxygen meter must be
tested and calibrated at the lake index site just prior to measuring the vertical profile.
5.1.1 Calibration of the Dissolved Oxygen Meter
The dissolved oxygen meter performance test and calibration are summarized in
Figure 5-2 (the detailed description is found in Section 3). Each field team also has a copy
of the manufacturer's calibration procedures and maintenance information. Record
calibration information on the Lake Profile Form, Side 2 (Figure 5-3). If the instrument will
-------
TEMPERATURE ( °C) and DISSOLVED O2 (mg/L)
DEPTH(m) 1Q . .
15 - '
20
HYPOLIMNION
ATemp.<1 °C/m
DISSOLVED 02 (mg/L)
TEMPERATURE (°C)
Figure 5-1. Typical temperature and dissolved oxygen profile of a thermally stratified lake.
5-2
-------
Turn meter on
Adjust electronic zero
Adjust salinity knob to
"0-FRESH" position
Replace j P*"-
-------
I LAKE ID: ^ y O O f> L LAKE PROFILE FORM (continued)
OXYGEN METER CALIBRATION INFORMATION
rfcr** tat Jw« 5W
SALINITY KNOB AT "O-FRESH": P\ MEMBRANE CHECK yQ ELECTRONIC ZERO P$ RED LINE: J4
CALIBRATION CHAMBER TEMPERATURE: 3.Or 7 °C
LAKE ELEVATION
(FROM TOPO. MAP OH ALTIMETER): ^ff FT
THI CALKUTIOM VAUtt B OOTAJHID »r HULTVLYMa THI SATURATED 0,
CONCfHTnATIOH TBICS AN ELEVATION CORRECTION FACTOR (BOTH VALUES ARE
OtTAMED FROM TABLCI n«SENT ON THI BACK Of THC HETER, OR PROVIDED IN THE
UAmYACTURER'S OPERATIONS MANUAL). ADJUST THE METER READMQ TO THE
CAUB RATON VALUE.
SATURATED O2 e CHAMBER TEMP.: i?. 13,
ELEVATION CORRECTION FACTOR: x _
CALIBRATION VALUE: 5^- 7V
MG/L
MQ/L
FLAG COMMENTS
DISSOLVED OXYGEN & TEMPERATURE PROFILE (continued)
For depths >1S m, continua rtcordlng at SHU Intervits)
DEPTH (m)
xx.x
0,
(ITIB/L)
xx.x
TEMP.
(•C)
XXX
FLAG
META-
LIUNION
(T. B)'
DEPTH (m)
xx.x
02
(mg/L)
XX.X
TEMP.
(°C)
XX X
FLAG
META-
UMNION
(TB)"
DEPTH &
FLAG
COMMENTS
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
{/
R*V.3/05 FLDFRMS.95
L»kB('rolllBFonn-2
Figure 5-3. Lake Profile Form, Side 2.
5-4
-------
not calibrate, repeat the calibration procedure. If the meter still fails to calibrate, record a "K"
flag on the Lake Profile Form to denote that measurements could not be obtained.
5.1.2 Index Site Conditions and Lake Profile Measurements
At the index site record the observations listed on the top of Side 1 of the Lake Profile
Form (Figure 5-4). Note any precipitation, surface conditions, and the presence or absence
of odor or scum. Use the sonar to determine the lake depth at the index site and record on
the Lake Profile Form. If the sonar is not working, use the Secchi disk line to determine the
depth and check the box to indicate that the sonar was,not used.
After calibrating the dissolved oxygen meter, attach a messenger (for weight only) to
the probe cable near the probe and measure vertical profiles of temperature and DO at the
predetermined depth intervals-as indicated on the Lake Profile Form, Side 1 (Figure 5-4).
The deepest measurements taken at each lake will always be at 1.0 m above the bottom (or
the length of the cable if the depth is >50 m). Figure 5-5 describes the general process for
conducting the profile measurements. For shallow lakes (<3 m), measure DO and
temperature at the surface and at 0.5-m intervals, until 1.0 m above the bottom. For lakes
deeper than 3.0 m, measure DO and temperature at the surface, at 1.5 rn and 2.0 m, and at
every rneter thereafter through 15 m (or until reaching 1.0 m above the bottom). After the
measurement at 15 m, record the measurements every 5 m starting at 20 m (or until 1.0 m
above the bottom). If the DO drops below 2.0 mg/L during this process, raise the probe back
to the last depth measured and, from that point, resume taking measurements at 1-m
intervals until you find the depth where the DO is ;>2.0 mg/L. This is the maximum depth for
fishing gear. Record this depth and then continue the measurements at 5-m intervals (20,
25 ) until 1 m above the bottom. Do not lower the probe closer than 1.0 m from the
bottom to avoid permanent damage to the membrane and probe.
Note the top (T) of the metalimnion (the top of the depth interval where the change in
temperature is greater than or equal to 1.0 °C/m) and the bottom (B) of the metalimnion (top
of the depth interval where the change in temperature is less than 1.0 °C/m) on the Lake
Profile Form, Side 1 (Figure 5-4). The metalimnion in some lakes may extend to the bottom.
If this occurs, note the bottom of the metalimnion as the last depth measured.
After completing the DO and temperature profile, clip an orange float to the anchor
line leaving the anchor, line, and float at the index site so that it can be easily located the
next day. This procedure should not be followed if there is a chance of theft or the presence
of the float presents a safety problem. If the marker float cannot be left, you must relocate
the index site the next day using the procedure described in Section 4. Refill the calibration
chamber with lake water and store the probe in the calibration chamber.
5-5
-------
LAKE PROFILE FORM
LAKE NAME: Z. MofRfUS DATE OF PROFILE: 7/ H 1 9V VISIT* ff) 2
LAKE ID: 2
/ \f ~ - *. . s "•> "
JLJL.V OJJ3,L SITE ID (circle): ONDEX I OTHER:
TEAM ID (circle): 1 (z) 3456789 10 OTHER:
PRECIPITATION (circle): (NONE) UQHT HEAVY
SURFACE CONDITIONS (circla): FLAT CRIPPLES^ CHOPPY WHITECAPS
ODOR?
VNO O YES Description:
SCUM? X*No O YES Description:
INDEX SrTE DEPTH: _J__2.._2_ M CHECK (/) IF SONAR NOT USED: Q
FLAG:
COMMENTS:
DISSOLVED OXYGEN & TEMPERATURE PROFILE
(Depth of Meat uremwit* [m]: Surface, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 48, and 50 m),
, Also Include readings at 1 m above bottom.
DEPTH (m)
X3CX
SURFACE
1. 5"
S.O
3.O
1.O
T,p
d.O
J.G
S.t>
lt,t~
/3.Z*
/2.«f
/a.s'
SLI.I
FLAG
META-
UMNION
fT.B)
T
B
DEPTH (m)
XX.X
JI.O
flt.O
/3 f>
IH.O
1*1 A
16.0
o,
(mo/L)
XX.X
gjt *
3 V
3 7
^1 A-/
3 «/
/ ^
3 0
2. 1
TEMP.
XX X
/I.I
I* f>
_f/ UyNAU.FL»aSKCO««l«NTS SECTION OH EWCK OF FOHIL
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rw.3/95 B.DFHMS.B5
Lafie Profile Form -1
Figure 5-4. Lake Profile Form, Side 1.
5-6
-------
CHECK METER AND PROBE fe
AND CALIBRATE 1
Lwmmmmmm^^**^*~->^>>™^
i
r
Determine and record
precipitation, surface condition,
odor, scum, and lake depth
Measure and record temperature and O2 at
surface, every 0.5 m, and 1 m above bottom
Retrieve probe to surface for
duplicate measurement
Is next
predetermined
depth within 1 m
of bottom?
YES
Lower probe to next
predetermined depth
shown on profile form
T
Lower probe to 1 m above
bottom; record readings
on Lake Profile Form
Record O2 and temperature
readings on Lake Profile Form
Retrieve probe; conduct
duplicate measurements
at surface
Complete Lake Profile
Form, noting top and
bottom of metalimnion
YES
Raise probe by <; 0.5 or 1-m intervals until
O2 is > 2 mg/L; record temperature and
O2 readings on Lake Profile Form for depth
where O2 is > 2 mg/L
FLOOPEXflSPPT
Figure 5-5. Dissolved oxygen and temperature profile procedure.
5-7
-------
5.2 SHORELINE PHYSICAL HABITAT CHARACTERIZATION
Lake physical habitat and shoreline disturbances are characterized based on
observations of the lake riparian and littoral habitat at 10 physical habitat (P-Hab) sampling
stations spaced evenly around the lake. These station locations (marked A through J) are
shown on a preprinted lake outline map (Habitat Sketch Map Form, Side 1, Figure 5-6). The
sketch map forms for each lake are provided as part of the dossier compiled for each lake
(Section 3.1.1).
While traveling between P-Hab stations the field team also classifies and maps
macro-scale riparian and littoral habitats of the lake. These activities are described in
Section 5.2.3. The field team makes one near-shore pass around the lake, conducting both
the 10 P-Hab station observations and the macrohabitat characterization in one operation.
5.2.1 Locating Each Physical Habitat Station and Defining the Shoreline Boundary
Starting at the nearest boat access point, proceed by boat around the lake near the
shore, observing bank, shoreline, emergent, and subsurface characteristics. Using the lake
outline on the Habitat Sketch Map Form Side 1 (Figure 5-6) and a topographic map, locate
and stop at each of the 10 P-Hab stations. Mark each station with a ribbon, then position the
boat at a distance of 10 m (-30 ft, offshore), anchor if necessary, and make the
semi-quantitative measurements enumerated on the Physical Habitat Characterization Form,
sides 1 and 2 (Figures 5-7 and 5-8).
Make every reasonable attempt to record physical habitat observations and
measurements for all 10 P-Hab stations. However, there are circumstances where this is
impossible. In such cases, record a "K" flag (see Section 5.2.2 below) in each field to clearly
indicate on the form that no observations were made at that particular station. In some
cases, the mapped lakeshore may be different from what you actually see in the field. If, for
example, a bay is dry or inaccessible because of excessive vegetation and shallow water,
show the new shoreline clearly on the Habitat Sketch Map Form, Side 1 (Figure 5-6). If one
or more of the P-Hab stations are "lost" as a result of the lakeshore changes, reposition one
or more new P-Hab stations identified by an "X" following the station letter. Place the new
stations at approximately the same interval along the shore as the rest of the P-Hab stations.
Note, for example, that two "lost" stations B and C may be replaced by one new station BX,
equidistant between stations A and D. On the Physical Habitat Characterization Form
(Figures 5-7 and 5-8), change station "B" to "BX," and indicate that no observations were
made at station C by entering K flags. If more stations must be added than were "lost," there
will be more than 10 stations on the lake. Use an additional Physical Habitat
5-8
-------
PHYSICAL HABITAT SKETCH MAP FORM-LAKES
AKENAME; L.
VISIT #:
LAKEID;
START TIME; J_£L: JL-O. ENDTIME: JLJ_
TF AM ID fclrela):
34 5 6 789 10 OTHER:
Sketch end label riparian, ln-t»k», shoreline, and littoral ilth lubtau around the lake, ualng codn below. To Identify littoral flah habtota on the
map, compoee a four-eharactar code ea: (Dlaturbenee) (Cow claaa) (Cover type) (Substrate type). EXAMPLE: NCVS for Natural, Cover,
Veaatated. Sand/Gravel. •
RIPARIAN AND IN-LAKE CODES: WET « Wetland; BCH = Beach; RSD . R»«W«nc»t; PRK = Park; FSTaForUt; ALT = Altered ahorellne; DDK
.Dock(a);MNA» Marina; CRP = Cropland; PTR«Paabira; LFL » UnetflllflJump; IND = Industry; MNQ. Mining; LOG . Logging; FLMo
Floating macrophytee; SBM - Submerged macrophytw; EMM « Emergent macrophytas; SHL» Shoal or Rocks.
UTTORAL FISH HABITAT CODES: fPisTUBBUHCEl: Human, Natural, Mixed, fcoven CLASS<: Cover, Open, Mixed. fcovgRTYPEh Artificial
atmcture. Fill. Vegetated, Woody, Boulders, Mixed, None. OUBSTOATETYPE): Mud/Muck, Sand/Gravel, Cobble/Boulders, Bedrock.
MAP OF FISH SAMPLING SITES ON BACK
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
HSV.3/8SR.DFRMS.B5
Physlcal Habitat Sketch Map Form - 1
Figure 5-6. Habitat Sketch Map Form, Side 1.
5-9
-------
PHYSICAL HABITAT CHARACTERIZATION FORM-LAKES
LAKENAME: L, V/OfKfUS DATEOFVIS1T: 7 / H 1 5U)
H.MW, D. KCE, C-C=»», IMOOD
, , , m|||1 UND£RSTORYf0.5T05M)
A
M
B
AJ
c
AJ
D
Af
Al
E
w; nwmmw AC«)
BOULDERS (HO-«x»iB;i««craiu.-cM«ii)
COULCAlRAVtL (3-210 Mv;ucnui-lUKlTUU. Id)
SHOREUNI
'"aSe"1 toOfSuavuimmtimmmiisairmQ
OTHER RNE SotJSio»iENT(< not ••; NOToi»m)
VEGETATED
ANGLE: Vj=N€MVHmc«iA)m>cflcuT,S«3o-75'.G-<30'
^ftATURE* VimiCAl.DBTANCEfMlrBOUWATlHUNITOHlGH.WATEHMABK
/
£
A
n
&
3
e
9
(9
/
.3
o
o
J
(5-
<7.1
^.
^
,3
/
?
/
O
J**
ff
o
H
(7
ft 9
0.6
BUU.DMOS
COUUERCUL
PARKFACUnES
DOCKS/BOATS
• WALLS, DKES, OR REVETMENTS
Liuu, TRASH DUMP, on LANDRLL
ROADS OR RAILROAD
Row CROPS
PASTURE OR HAYnELO
ORCHARD
LAWN
0
r?
o
(p
o
.<0
o
(9
t?
0
r?
<7
0
^0
d?
O
O
O
rt
0
O
o
f>
O
O
^
?
A
y
^
^.
f
r?
1
/
&
i
*.
,?
^
<0
A
I
o
o
3
fr
Q.lL
£L.
/
JL
9L
1
/
3
r?
f>
3
f?
O
o
R
O
O
O
O
O
e
K
O
f)
n
O
O
O
f>
r>
r>
K^
3
a
*/
J2_
*/
/
P
rt
/
^
f>
r>
7
^
^7.5
C
,3
_&.
V
/
*/
f
f)
f)
O
?
P
<•>
?
5
£Li
r?
f)
O
O
t^
O
O
o
o
o
o
fO
p
(O
-£-
,
Al
^
/
fl
7
7
?
^.
p
rt
p
?
r>
f>
>?
ft
g7.X
r?
f>
P
(0
fL.
0
p
f^
_<2_
At
A*
?>
3
7
/
?
/•
C3
o
3
e>
o
o
3
v
CL3L
o
o
n
o
o
o
o
n
O
o
_ffl_
BeV.3/95 FLDFRMSJS
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL): J&U.
Physical Habttat Characterization Form -1
Figure 5-7. Physical Habitat Characterization Form, Side 1.
5-10
-------
LAKE ID: ./¥J! O &_Q_ L PHYSICAL HABITAT CHARACTERIZATION FORM
NEW STATION ID (If naeded):
LITTORAL ZONE STATION ID:
STATION DEPTH (M) AT 10 H OFFSHORE
SURFACE FILM TYPE (S.SCUH, A-ALGAL MAT, P=Oo.Y, N=NONEft>THER)
A
£>•?
Y
B
/»/
ft
c
fl'f
*s
continued)
D
A 7
*/
E
f) f
*/
VISIT* (T) 2
F
A&
/*
B
10
AS
H
f'f
AS
1
A 7
x/
j
0,*
AS
BOTTOM SUBSTRATE: AREAL COVERAGE: 0. ABSENT 1 -SPARSE (<1 0%) 2.MODERATE (10 TO 40%) 3»HEAW (40 TO 75%) 4=VERY HEAVY (>75%)
BEDROCK (>4000uu; LARGER THAN A CAR)
BOULDERS (250 • 4000 «M; BASKETBALL • CAR set)
COBBLE (64 - 250 nu; TENWS BALL - BASKETBALL SZE)
GRAVEL (a TO 84 m; LADYBUO TO TENWS BALL SIZE)
SAND (O.OS TO 2 uu; orarrv BETWEEN TOQERS)
SLT. CLAY, on MUCK (< 0.06 uu; HOT GRITTY)
WOODY DEBRIS
COLOR (BLmBUCK, GY«CHAY, BRnBROWN, RD.REO, N.NONE OR OTHER)
ODOR ^S.H^S, AaAMOWC, P.CIL, C.CHEWCALjN.NONE^
,O
1
A
&
1
o
1
K
K
r>
p
O
K
K
Q_
ep
(7
o
Z,
&
ey
A/
a
£.
2
2.
O
JZ.
<^y
A/
f
£
K
1
e>
/
K
K
r>
J
•^
;
o
£*
K
K
ft
A
ff
/
Q
JL
G-Y
A^
o
3
7
7
d>
jj_
^<
K
MACROPHYTES AREAL COVERAGE: 0°ABSENT1»SPARSE(<10%) 2»MODERATEJ10TO40%)3~HEAVY(40TO75%)4>VERYHEAVY(>75%)
SUBMERSENT
EMERGENT
FLOATING
TOTAL WEED COVER
Do MACROPHYTES EXTEND LAKEWARD? (Y OR N)?
/
/
O
1
fit
0
0
0
o
N
/
f)
o
t
y
1
$
1
2
V
I
I
&
3
V
/
/
0
a
y
/
o
o
1
y
/
ft
O
1
//
/
/
O
A
y
/
o
Q
/
y
FISH COVER OoABSENT 1»PRESENTBUTSPARSE 2*PRESENT IN MODERATE TO VERY HEAVY DENSITY
AQUATIC WEEDS
SNAGS > 0.3 M DIAMETER
BRUSH OR WOODY DEBRIS < 0.3 M DIAMETER
INUNDATED LIVE TREES > 0.3 u DIAMETER
OVERHANGING VEGETATION < 1 M ABOVE SURFACE
ROCK LEDGES OR SHARP DROPOFFB
BOULDERS
HUMAN STRUCTURES (E.G., DOCKS, LANDINGS, PUJNOS, RIPRAP, ETC.)
\
O
\
o
O
ft
I
S)
Q
o
1
p
o
f)
o
o
i
o
1
(7
0
0
1
n
2.
o
f)
p
o
O
I
0
2..
&
fl
f)
y
0
o
o
i
o
l
o
1
o
p
f>
/
/
\
o
t
o
t
r>
/
)
COVERTVPE(Auuninc^F-nuVMu.W>vnxi(»B->ouu«iiioNMOM)
SUBSTRATE (M=Uuo/uuc», 8«S«uo/Gn*vtL. CcCooDuaBouuiu, BxBcnno)
OEAR(GNGu.iicr,T*THW«cr,S«SlM.O*NaM)
GEAR LOCATION (DBT. a DR. TO NEAREST RSPRES. MACROHABITAT)
H
f*\
M
5
T
Q
H
0
H
5
$
(?
N
ff\
ft
5
S
4
H
c
p\
r.
T
o
f/
c
F\
AA
T
1?
N
ff\
M
^
T
O
^
f\
M
S
fi-,T
(9
N
c
f\
5
£•
f)
A/
yv\
rt
^
7"
<^
(V
M
/A
5
7-
(9
FLAO COOES: K« MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVATION KOT OBTAWED; U-SUSPECTUEASUREUENTOROBSERVATION;
Ft, F2, ETC. »UBC.FLA08ASSK»iD BY EACH F*U> CHEW. EXPLAIN ALL FLAGS OHSCPARATE PHYSICAL CHARACTER&ATION HABITAT COUHENTS FOHll.
REVIEWED BY {INITIAL.):
Rev. aSS FLDFRMS.95
Physical HabHjrt ClumcttrbnUon Form • 2
Figure 5-8. Physical Habitat Characterization Form, Side 2.
5-11
-------
Characterization Form to record the data, indicating the new or additional stations by writing
HX,B "Y," or "Z" after the appropriate station letter. This step is summarized in Table 5-1.
If the lakeshore you observe in the field is radically different than that shown on the
map outline and you are sure you are at the correct lake, redraw the P-Hab station locations.
Your new map will need to have 10 stations equidistant around the shoreline. One way to do
this in the field is by laying a string to measure the shoreline of new outline, dividing that
length by 10, then using the string to lay out the 10 station locations. Include a comment
stating why, in your judgment, the lakeshore is different than on the original outline (e.g.,
drought, flooding, or lake dredging).
At each P-Hab station, make observations and measurements of the shoreline from
the boat which is 10 m offshore (estimated by eye). It is important to be at the proper
distance from shore, and to limit bank and shoreline observations at each station to the area
that is within your field of vision. The littoral and riparian observation plots have fixed
dimensions (Figure 5-9) that are estimated by eye. Littoral measurements pertain to the
water and lake bottom in the 10 m (30 ft) distance between the boat and the shoreline and
extending 15 m (50 ft) along the shore. Riparian observations at each station pertain to the
adjacent land or wetland area that is 15 m wide and extends 15 m back onto land. The bank
angle and shoreline substrate observations refer to a narrower shoreline zone that extends 1
m landward from the waterline.
The shoreline boundary is defined as the approximate interface between "lake-like"
conditions and riparian or wetland conditions. In cases where the lake shoreline is not
obvious (e.g., where there is evidence of large seasonal change in lake level) define the
shoreline as the current waterline. In cases where the lake shoreline is not visible, define the
lake shoreline as the approximate boundary between open water and swamp or marsh
conditions into which your boat could not easily move.
5.2.2 Physical Habitat Characterization Form and Instructions
Use the ranking system based on areal coverage in evaluations of riparian
vegetation, shoreline substrate, littoral bottom substrate, and aquatic macrophytes. The five
entry choices range from 0 (absent) to 4 (> 75% cover) and are defined in Table 5-2 which
lists steps required to complete the Physical Habitat Characterization Form (Figures 5-7 and
5-8). When ranking cover or substrate type, mixtures of more than one class might all be
given sparse (1), moderate (2), or heavy (3) rankings. One dominant class with no clear
subdominant class might be ranked 4 with all the remaining classes either sparse (1) or
absent (0). Two dominant classes with more than 40 percent cover can both be ranked 3.
5-12
-------
TABLE 5-1. GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR LOCATING OR MODIFYING
THE LOCATION OF PHYSICAL HABITAT STATIONS
At Each Physical Habitat (P-HabV Sampling Station:
1. Locate station by eye using maps, and mark with ribbon.
2. Define shore as either the current waterline OR the boundary between open water and the edge
of dense vegetation (terrestrial, wetland, or emergent vegetation) or extensive very
shallow water.
3. If the shoreline observed in the field differs from the mapped shoreline, draw the observed
shoreline on Side 1 of the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form.
4. If a P-Hab station is lost because of shoreline changes, position one or more new stations at
approximately equal intervals. Add an X to the station letter on both sides of the Physical Habitat
Characterization Form.
5. If a station is eliminated, enter "K" flags on the Physical Habitat Characterization Form to indicate
no observations.
6. If changes add more stations than 10, use an additional form to record the data for the added
sites and add X, Y, or Z after the appropriate station letter.
7. If the shoreline observed in the field differs radically from the mapped shoreline and you are sure
you are at the correct lake, draw a new map on the same page as the original lake. Use a string
to measure the new outline, divide it into 10 equal parts, and lay out the 10 station locations.
8. Enter a comment on the Physical Habitat Characterization Comment Form stating the apparent
reason (e.g., drought, flooding, dredging) the lakeshore is different.
9. At each of the 10 shoreline stations, position the boat at an observation point 10m from shore.
Limit shoreline and riparian observations to an area 15m (50 ft) wide by 15 m (50 ft) inland from
shore, and littoral observations to an area 15m wide (50 ft) by 10 m (30 ft) from shore to the
boat. The sampling area and zones are illustrated in the quick reference handbook.
10. Record riparian habitat (inland from the shore) characteristics* on the first side of the Physical
Habitat Characterization Form.
11. Record littoral habitat (in the lake) characteristics* on Side 2 of the Physical Habitat
Characterization Form.
* For most categories, multiple items may have heavy (3), moderate (2), or sparse (1) cover ratings.
5-13
-------
HABITAT STATION OBSERVATION PLOT
SHORELINE
OBSERVATION STATION
Figure 5-9. Physical habitat characterization plot.
5-14
-------
TABLE 5-2. COMPLETING THE PHYSICAL HABITAT CHARACTERIZATION FORM
A. General
1. After completing the temperature and DO profile, begin shoreline survey, filling in the Physical
Habitat Characterization Form at each of the 10 physical habitat (P-Hab) sampling sites,
anchoring when necessary. Sketch in major features of riparian and shoreline habitats on
habitat sketch map and label each using codes provided on the Habitat Sketch Map Form.
2.
3.
Survey plot dimensions:
Riparian Vegetation -15m along shoreline and 15m back onto land.
Shoreline Substrate and Bank Angle -15m along shore and 1 m back.
Littoral (in lake) -15m along shoreline and 10m out into lake.
The semi-quantitative ranking for vegetation, substrate, and aquatic macrophytes is:
= 4
= 3
= 2
= 1
= 0
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Very heavy (greater than 75% coverage)
Heavy (40 to 75% coverage)
Moderate (10 to 40% coverage)
Sparse (present, but less than 10% coverage)
Absent
B. Riparian Habitat (Side 1 of the form)
1. Divide shoreline vegetation into 3 categories:
a. Greater than 5 m high
b. 0.5 to 5 m high
c. Less than 0.5 m high
= canopy layer
= understory layer
= ground cover layer
2.
3.
4.
(Grasses or woody shrubs and tree branches can occur in more than one layer. The ground
cover layer may be vegetation, water, barren ground, or duff.)
Record the type of vegetation in the two tallest shoreline vegetation layers (canopy and
understory) as none, deciduous, coniferous, or mixed. Define mixed as a segment where at
least 10 percent of the areal coverage is made up of the alternate vegetation type.
Estimate the areal cover (A-3 above) of the shoreline vegetation, including the following
vegetation classes:
a. Canopy layer: trees greater than or equal to 0.3 m (1 ft) in diameter at chest height.
b. Understory layer: .trees less than 0.3 m in diameter at chest height~"Woody shrubs and
saplings" and nonwoody "herbs, forbs, and grasses."
c. Ground cover layer: "Woody shrubs and saplings," nonwoody "herbs, forbs, and
grasses," "standing water," "inundated vegetation," or "barren or buildings."
Rate the shoreline substrate 1 m into the riparian plot for areal coverage in particle size
classes shown on the Physical Habitat Characterization Form.
5. Describe the angle of the shoreline bank back 1 m from the edge of the water):
a. V = near vertical/undercut, greater than 75 degrees
b. S = 30 to 75 degrees (steep)
c. G = 0 to 30 degrees (gradual)
6. Estimate the vertical and horizontal distances between the present lake level and the high
water line.
(Continued)
5-15
-------
TABLE 5-2. (Continued)
7. For the listed human influence types, enter V" if present within the shoreline/littoral plot (A-2
above), "B" if visible but outside and adjacent to the plot or within your field of vision behind
the plot, or "0" if absent.
C. Littoral Habitat (Side 2 of the form)
1. Measure lake depth 10m from shore at each P-Hab station, noting new location if the point
has to be relocated for some reason.
2. Note the presence or absence of water surface scums, algal mats, or oil slicks.
3. Determine the lake bottom substrate visible from the boat. If the bottom is net visible, attempt
to collect a sample or characterize by remote sensing with a sounding tube (e.g., PVC tubing).
4. Rank the littoral substrate sediment particle size, using classes shown on the Physical Habitat
Characterization Form, according to areal extent, making multiple probes if the bottom is not
visible. Areal extent (coverage) codes are the same as shown in A-3 above. If the bottom is
covered with logs, sticks, or other organic debris, choose "woody debris." If the substrate is
concealed and remote sampling is not possible, use "Not observed" flag (K).
5. Note sediment color and odor if a sample can be seen or collected.
6. Estimate the areal coverage (as described in A-3 above) of the three aquatic macrophyte
types: submerged, emergent, and floating within the 10-by 15-m swath between your boat
and the shoreline. If you cannot see or probe the bottom with tube or anchor, move closer to
shore and note your new location in the white space in the "Bottom Substrate" section.
7. For the listed types of fish cover observed from the shore to the boat (10m offshore) and 15
m along shore (A-2 above), enter "0" for absent, "1" if the cover type is sparse, and "2" if
moderate or abundant.
8. Fish microhabitat classification for 10 m by 15 m littoral area:
a. Select a single one-letter code for each of the following: disturbance regime, cover class,
cover type, and substrate type.
b. Select one or more one-letter codes to indicate §jl possible fish collection methods for the
site.
5-16
-------
For the fish cover entry fields, enter 0 for absence of listed habitat features, 1 if they
are present but sparse, or 2 if they are moderate or abundant. On the human influence entry
fields, record a check mark (V) if present within the shoreline/littoral plot. Record a "B" if
visible but adjacent or behind (outside) the plot, or a "0" for absence of listed habitat
features. A wavy vertical line through all or part of a column may also be used to denote
"absent." If, for some reason, you cannot make measurements at a station, record a "K" flag
in all data fields for that station. This entry is very important, as we have no other way of
determining whether your intent is to record the absence of features or to denote a missed
station.
Entering data qualifiers ("flags") on the Physical Habitat Characterization Form is
slightly different than for the other data forms. As there is no defined "FLAG" field for each
variable, flags are entered into the data field itself. For any particular measurement variable,
if no effort is made to collect data, or if you make an effort but for some reason are unable to
obtain data, enter a K flag in the data field. Explain on the separate Physical Habitat
Characterization Comments Form (Figure 5-iO) why data could not be obtained. If you
collect data for a variable but have reason to believe it is suspect (or it was collected using a
nonstandard protocol), enter a "U" flag in the data field. On the comments form, record the
data value itself and explain why you think it is suspect (or describe what nonstandard
procedure was used and why).
5.2.2.1 Riparian Habitat (Directions for Page 1)-
The riparian habitat characterization includes riparian vegetation cover, shoreline
substrate, bank type and evidence of lake level changes, and human influences. Record all
measures or observations for these categories on the Physical Habitat Characterization
Form Side 1 (Figure 5-7).
5.2.2.1.1 Riparian vegetation cover-To characterize riparian vegetation, observe
the visible area from the shoreline back a distance of 15 m (50 ft) from the shore. If the high
water mark is more than 15m away from shore, this area includes parts of the shore that are
sometimes inundated. If the "shoreline" boundary (defined as the approximate interface
between "lake-like" conditions and riparian or wetland conditions) is an inundated wetland,
then this area includes the wetland vegetation.
Conceptually divide the shoreline vegetation into three layers:
• Canopy (>5 m high)
• Understory Layer (0.5 to 5 m high)
• Ground Cover Layer (<0.5 m high).
5-17
-------
PHYSICAL HABITAT CHARACTERIZATION COMMENT FORM Page _/ of /
LAKE ID;
TEAM ID
STATION ID
e
A,
R
c.
t>
G-
a
f
n
8
c
P
ff
Jj
f
M.X.J2.J2.JLL VISfT#: rf} 2
circle): 1 (7t) 3456789 10 OTHER:
SECTION or FORJI
&T//K ffRTVKfS
SorTo/H. SuBiTXATt
r
N
r
^
(
Qtfr*F»M •Su&rrtil'r/r
69rr»«.$*srx>mf £W
/*
^
\
J
(
BOTTOM. SusrrMir
MEASUHEUENTOt)
VARUBLE
PICT: FK&* \HMtuinf
TO HlfH VJHtnt *MUt
CloLelt^
r
^
^>
r
Ceid/t
Ono*
X
^
/
s
/
£>2)t5*
FLAG
«
JL_
/^
\
)
(,
j
/<
>f
X
AsDMtv . b/jtrf*
j
G vrfvot /A/TO u/frtriMb
SoBtTtHTV T^O l4lHU> TO
OAm/A/ SAMPLIt
X.
c
\
/
SutttMie -flto ft/iff To 6SnM> SJ>afUr
Svasnetn? T SRMHM
• X*
s
/
>
<
J»BX71rfnr Tbo HIHtlS ft eKM/v&Hftt
FLAQCOOM: K«noMiAiuMi«)«TonoBMnvATioHATTB»TEDj U.SUSPECTUEASURtUEKTonOBSUHVATION;
F1.F2, ETC. »USC. RAGS A3 J1CHED BY EACH FW.D CHEW.
CHECK HERE IF INFORMATION IS RECORDED ON OTHER SIDE OF FORM
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
RlV.3/95 FLDFRMS.B5
Physical Habitat CharaeUrlzallan Comment Form -1
Figure 5-10. Physical Habitat Characterization Comments Form.
5-18
-------
Note that several vegetation types (e.g., grasses or woody shrubs) can potentially occur in
more than one layer, Similarly note that some things other than vegetation are possible
entries for the "Ground Cover" layer (e.g., water or barren ground), as indicated in Table 5-2.
Before estimating the areal coverage of the vegetation layers, record the type of
vegetation (Deciduous, Coniferous, Mixed, or None) in each of the two taller layers (Canopy
and Understory). Consider the layer "Mixed" if more than 10 percent of the areal coverage is
made up of the alternate vegetation type.
5.2.2.1.2 Shoreline substrate-Rank, by areal coverage, very heavy, heavy,
moderate, sparse, and absent particle size classes of the substrate that is visible in the 1-m
wide strip nearest to the lake shoreline. These size estimates are made by eye from the
boat, using the size classes defined on the Physical Habitat Characterization Form Side 1
(Figure 5-7). If the inorganic substrate is obscured by vegetation, choose "Vegetated"; if
there is another type (e.g., organic flotsam), record its coverage rank in the "other" category
and then identify the category in the comments section.
5.2.2.1.3 Bank type and evidence of lake level changes-Choose the bank angle
description that best reflects the current shoreline that is dominant within your field of vision
and 1 m into the riparian plot: V = Near vertical/undercut (>75 degrees, S = Steep; >30 to 75
degrees, hard to walk up bank; or G = Gradual, 0 to 30 degrees, easy to walk up). Estimate
the vertical difference between the present level and the high water line; similarly, estimate .
the horizontal distance up the bank between current lake level and evidence of higher level.
5.2.2.1.4 Human influences-Check ('V") any and all of the human activities and
influences that you observe within the defined lake and riparian observation areas. If
present adjacent to the plot or within your field of vision behind (outside) the defined
observation area, enter "B." Enter "0" if human activity is not present in either case.
5.2.2.2 Littoral Habitat (Directions for Page 2)-
Lake depth at the habitat survey stations is taken using the sonar, calibrated Secchi
disk line, or the marked PVC sounding rod. Measure depth at each of the P-Hab stations, 10
m (30 feet) offshore. Note the presence or absence of water surface scums, algal mats, or
oil slicks; use the codes provided on the form. All measures or observations in these
categories are recorded on the Physical Habitat Characterization Form Side 2 (Figure 5-8).
During the littoral portion of the habitat work, look for and collect an example of any
freshwater mussel firmly attached to hard substrates. Also do this at the launch site.
Procedures are detailed in the benthos section (Section 8) of this manual.
5-19
-------
5.2.2.2.1 Bottom substrate-To characterize littoral bottom substrate, restrict
observations to the substrate you can detect from the boat. If you can't see the bottom,
collect a sediment sample using a long tube (e.g., the 3-m PVC sounding rod). Probe the
bottom beneath the boat with the sounding rod (you may have to move closer to shore). Soft
sediment can be brought to the surface for examination. Hard sediments can be "felt" with
the sounding rod. Sandy substrate can be "felt" or "heard" by twisting the sounding rod and
detecting grittiness. If you had to move into shallow water to observe sediment
characteristics, flag the observation and record (on the Physical Habitat Characterization
Comment Form) the depth where you observed the sediment. Rate the cover of substrate
sediment particle sizes that have very heavy, heavy, moderate, sparse, and absent areal
coverage (A-3 in Table 5-2). Base these ratings on visual observations and judgments using
the size classes defined on the form. If the bottom is covered with logs, sticks, or other
organic debris, choose "woody debris." If the substrate is obscured by vegetation and you
cannot obtain a PVC sounding rod sample, enter a "K" flag to denote "no observation made."
However, probing with the sediment tube usually makes it possible to determine if the
sediment is soft (therefore either Sand or Silt/Clay/Muck).
Sediment color and odor are subjective observations to be noted with codes shown
on the form. Enter the code for "None/Other" if sediment color does not match one of the
codes. For sediment odor, example entries are "H2S" (sulfurous, rotten egg), "Anoxic"
(sewage odor), "Chemical" (strong odor like turpentine, paint, etc.), "Oil/petroleum", or
"None/Other" (including musty, no odor, organic, and fishy odors). If "Other" is noted,
explain the observation on the comment form.
5.2.2.2.2 Aquatic macrophytes-To characterize aquatic macrophytes, separately
estimate the areal coverage (as defined under A-3 in Table 5-2) for each of the three aquatic
macrophyte types (submerged, emergent, and floating) present within the lake area between
your boat and the shoreline. Emergent vegetation has erect portions above the water
surface. Floating refers to either rooted or nonrooted vegetation. Count any plant as being
in only one of these types. Then estimate the coverage of all combined types of aquatic
macrophytes in the same area. You may have to probe the bottom with the PVC sounding
tube or your anchor if the water is turbid. Indicate (yes or no) if the aquatic macrophytes
extend further out into the lake than the area included in your observation area (i.e., more
than 10 m or 30 ft from shore).
5.2.2.2.3 Fish cover-Evaluate the presence and abundance of the listed types of
fish cover features that are in the water and shoreline within the 10-m by 15-m littoral portion
of the field of vision at each P-Hab station (Table 5-2). Enter "0" for cover types that are
absent, "1" for those present but sparse, or "2" for those that are moderate or abundant.
5-20
-------
These features are within or partially within the water and conceal fish from aquatic and
terrestrial predators such as larger fish, otters, kingfishers, and ospreys.
"Aquatic Weeds" may include submerged, floating, or emergent forms and may
provide concealment or protection for fish. "Snags" are considered to be inundated or
partially inundated dead tree boles, branches, or rootwads with diameter ^0.3 m (1 ft).
"Woody debris or brush" is defined as inundated dead or living woody vegetation that is <0.3
m diameter, whereas "Inundated Live Trees" refers to the inundated portions of trees 2:0.3 m
in diameter. "Overhanging Vegetation" is defined as that which is <1 m from the water
surface, because this low overhanging vegetation provides concealment from fish-eating
birds. Do not include higher overhanging vegetation, which might provide perches for birds
such as kingfishers. "Rock Ledges or Sharp Dropoffs" include overhanging banks,
submerged rock shelves, and steep sloping rock walls that can provide cover for fish.
"Boulders" (>toasketbali size) also offer fish cover and concealment. "Human Structures"
include docks, barges, houseboats, swimming platforms, tires, car bodies, and habitat
enhancement structures (e.g., log rafts) that can provide cover for fish.
5.2.2.2.4 Littoral fish habitat classification (four-letter fish habitat codes and
possible fishing gear)-The final three tasks relate to fish sampling. Information about the
microhabitat at each physical habitat station will help to locate fish sampling sites. As
described in Section 6.2, littoral fish sampling sites will be located as close as possible to
actual physical habitat stations. At each station, first examine the habitat and assign a four-
letter code as described on the Habitat Sketch Map Form and in Table 5-3. Second, assess
the site to determine and record whether a gill net, trap net, or seine may be deployed there
and use the four-letter codes to map the entire shoreline, including areas between the P-Hab
stations (Section 5.2.3). Evaluate whether or not the P-Hab station microhabitat is
representative of the macrohabitat; if not, record an estimate of the distance and direction
from the station to the nearest representative macrohabitat location.
Table 5-4 describes this procedure.
5.2.3 Riparian and Littoral Macrohabitat Characteristics and Mapping
Information about riparian and littoral macrohabitat characteristics and human activi-
ties between the 10 P-Hab stations is valuable. As you proceed between p-Hab stations,
complete the sketch map by identifying prominent riparian or in-lake features and the littoral
macrohabitat types observed. A macrohabitat is made up of contiguous segments 5 percent
of the shore length and total at least 10 percent of the lake shoreline. Table 5-3 describes
the procedure and gives the codes for identifying these activities and features. Sketch this
information in on the map outline on Side 1 of the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form. Show
5-21
-------
TABLE 5-3. RIPARIAN AND LITTORAL MACROHABITAT CHARACTERISTICS AND MAPPING
Riparian and In-Lake Codes
1. While circling the lake for the physical habitat assessment, record observations about human
activities in the riparian zone and in-lake features on the lake outline on the Physical Habitat
Sketch Map Form. Use the following codes to note these features near and between physical
habitat stations:
WET
BCH
RSD
PRK
FST
ALT
DCK
MNA
CRP
Wetland
Beach
Residences
Park
Forest
Altered
Dock
Marina
Cropland
PTR Pasture
LFL Landfill/dump
IND Industry
MNG Mining
LGG Logging
FLM Floating macrophytes
SBM Submerged macrophytes
EMM Emergent macrophyte
SHL Shoal or rocks
Littoral Fish Macrohabitat Classification
1. Upon arrival at the lake and during dissolved oxygen and temperature profile measurements,
make a preliminary assessment of what the major littoral macrohabitats appear to be. Think in
terms of broad-scale habitat sections and use the hierarchical classification below.
2.
While circling the lake for the physical habitat assessment, sketch the extent of major littoral
macrohabitats on the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form. Use the 4-letter hierarchical codes
(e.g., HCAM) below to describe habitat types.
1 st level (in-lake disturbance) Human, Natural, or Mixed.
2nd level (in-lake cover)
3rd level (cover type)
4th level (main substrate)
Cover (major fish cover), Open, or Mixed (patchy).
Artificial Structure (docks, boats), fill (revetment,
boulders, etc.), Vegetated, ]/Voody, goulders, Mixed (a
combination), orMone.
Mud/Muck, Sand/gravel, C_obble/Boulder, or fjedrock.
3. Avoid sketching fragments. Macrohabitat segments must be ^5 percent of shoreline and total at
least 10 percent for the whole lake.
4. After completing the shoreline survey at the 10 P-Hab stations, finalize the macrohabitat
classification and transfer macrohabitat classes to the map on the Fish Sampling Sites Form.
Draw these classes outside the lake outline, leaving the lake area of the map clear to denote
sampling site locations. Use Side 1 of the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form as the preliminary
working version (kept as part of the data) and the map on Side 2 (the clean final version of the
littoral macrohabitat classification) to assiqn fish samplina sites.
5-22
-------
1.
2.
TABLE 5-4. FISH LITTORAL MICROHABITAT CLASSIFICATION
At each physical habitat station, after completing the habitat assessment, make the following
evaluations and record them on the Physical Habitat Characteristic Form, Page 2.
Classify the littoral habitat for that station, using the same 4-letter system given for littoral fish
habitat codes on the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form. Microhabitat assessment refers just to
the area of the station. Record the information on the Littoral Fish Habitat Classification section of
the Physical Habitat Characterization Form, Page 2.
Use this assessment to evaluate whether the station microhabitat is representative of the overall
macrohabitat determined for that shoreline area.
a. If the station microhabitat is representative (i.e., it has the same four-letter code as shown on
the sketch map), then record a zero (0) in the "distance to repres. location" box.
b If not, look in both directions for the nearest location you judge to be representative of the
macrohabitat. Estimate and record the distance (in 10s or 100s of meters as appropriate) and
direction (L = left, R = right when facing shore).
Assess whether gill nets, trap nets, or seines are usable at that site or the nearest "representative"
location. More than one type of gear may be usable. Criteria for determining possible fish
collection gears for each sampling station are as follows:
Gill nets
a. Depth >1.5 m
b. No ledges or steep drops to distort the net.
c. No snags to rip the net
Trap nets
a. Depth ^2.5 m at frame mouth (15m from shore), preferably <1.5 m
b. No ledges or steep drops to distort the net
c. Few snags
Seines
a. Depth <. depth of net (1.2 m)
b. Bottom smooth, snagless, wadeable.
4. Record the first initial of all appropriate methods for that location (best gear first). It is possible
that conditions preclude any sampling there. In that case, record an N (None) and the reason(s)
on the Physical Habitat Characterization Comment Form.
.3.
5-23
-------
riparian and in-lake features near as well as in between the P-Hab stations on the sketch
maps. As you proceed by boat along the shoreline of the lake, sketch in the location and ex-
tent of residential development, forest cover, wetlands, farmland, and other important
riparian features. Also record the location and extent of other features such as lake inlets,
outlets, mid-lake reefs, beaches, and aquatic weed beds (floating, emergent, and
submerged) or other features such as rock walls for which there may be no code provided.
Littoral fish habitat characterization both classifies m/crohabitat at individual physical
habitat stations (Section 5.2.3.2.4) and assigns macrohabitat types to shoreline segments
around the entire lake; it both documents fish habitat extent and provides information to
select littoral fish sampling sites (Section 6.2). The hierarchical classification system defined
on the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form (Figure 5-6) consists of four levels. The first
classification level refers to disturbance: is there major human influence in the littoral zone
(not the shore) or is this area in a more or less natural state (including largely recovered
areas)? The second level refers to the presence of cover: is there cover for fish or open
water or a mixture of the two? The third level defines the kind of cover: human influence
includes "structures" (e.g., docks, boats, floating platforms) and "fill" (e.g., revetment
boulders, trash); natural areas include in-lake vegetation, boulders, or woody materials or a
mixture. The fourth level describes substrate.
In order to assign macrohabitat types, quickly develop (beginning before going onto
the water and continuing while locating the index site) an idea of the number and kinds of
major habitats on the whole lake. During the circuit around the lake to each of the physical
habitat sites, classify the macrohabitat types using the four-letter codes and mark boundaries
between the macrohabitat classes on the sketch map on the Physical Habitat Sketch Map
Form, Side 1 (Figure 5-6). Table 5-2 summarizes the process for characterizing lake littoral
macrohabitats.
This process emphasizes large-scale habitat areas that characterize broad stretches
of the littoral zone and avoids fragmenting the shoreline. Ideally, subdivide the entire littoral
habitat into a maximum of four or five macrohabitat types, but generally not more than the
number of littoral fish sampling stations (as defined in Section 6.2.1) required for that lake
size. During the initial mapping and evaluation, keep this number in mind. For the whole
lake, a macrohabitat type needs to cover at least a total of 10 percent of the extent of the
entire littoral habitat to be considered major macrohabitat type. Individual classification
segments should not be less than 5 percent of the shoreline. For example, if a long stretch
of shore (hundreds of meters) has no major human influence, is mostly open with a muddy
bottom, and has the occasional 1-2 m weed patch, that area is all Natural-Open-Nbne-Mud
(NONM). The weed patches are too rare and small to rate them as a major macrohabitat
type in that stretch. However, if the weed patches were larger or more common but still
5-24
-------
scattered, that stretch is all designated Natural-Mixed-Vegetated-Mud (NMVM), rather than a
series of small Natural-Open-None-Mud (NONM) and Natural-Cover-Vegetated-Mud
(NCVM) areas. Some lakes will consist entirely of one littoral macrohabitat.
Finally, because places suitable for using either the beach seine or the minnow seine
will be in short supply in many lakes, look for any possible seining sites while traversing the
shoreline. Note these locations (and which gear will work) on the sketch map as you move
around the lake.
5.3 EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLY LIST ' L
A checklist of equipment and supplies required to conduct protocols described in this
section is shown in Figure 5-11. This checklist is similar to but may be different somewhat
from the checklists in Appendix B, which are used at a base site to assure that all equipment
and supplies are brought to and are available at the lake. The field teams are required to
use the checklist presented in this section to assure that equipment and supplies are
organized and available on the boat in order to conduct the protocols efficiently.
5-25
-------
PHYSICAL HABITAT ASSESSMENT CHECKLIST
Sonar
Transducer with bracket and C-clamp
12-V wet cell battery (charged) in battery
case
GPS unit with manual, reference card,
extra battery pack
Anchor with 50-m line
Float to attach to anchor
Surveyor's tape
Habitat Sketch Map Form
Physical Habitat Characterization Form
Physical Habitat Comments Form
Field notebook
Sampling permit
Quick reference handbook
PVC sounding rod, 3-m length, marked in
0.1 m increments
Inflatable viewing box
DO meter
Number
Needed
Each Lake
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 roll
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
Figure 5-11. Physical habitat assessment checklist.
5-26
-------
SECTIONS
FISH SAMPLING
by
Thomas R. Whittier, Peter Vaux, and Roger B. Yeardley
Field teams collect fish by overnight sets of trap nets, minnow traps, and gill nets and
by seining after sunset. Team members determine the proportions and locations of major
habitats before fishing begins, and sample each habitat regardless of its expected
productivity. Thus, fish sampling is stratified by habitat and is random within habitats. Team
members identify the fish to species and examine them for external gross pathology. They
measure long-lived species for length and preserve specimens of small fishes for species
confirmation and museum archival. They collect five large fish for tissue contaminant
analysis. The teams observe very rigorous quality assurance practices in the field. To
ensure legibility and completeness in recording sample information, one individual completes
field forms and labels. Another person checks the forms and labels to verify that all pertinent
information is included. Figure 6-1 summarizes activities described in this section.
6.1 PHYSICAL HABITAT DESCRIPTIONS
The field team records physical habitat descriptions on the first day (before fish
sampling begins) and uses these descriptions to determine locations for sampling as well as
to document the presence, location, and extent of the lake habitats. For EMAP Surface
Waters purposes, two primary habitat types are assessed and sampled differently: the
littoral and the pelagic. The pelagic (open water) habitats (Section 5.1) are characterized by
depth profiles of temperature and dissolved oxygen (DO). The littoral (shallow and near
shore) habitat characterizations (Section 5.3) are made during the shoreline physical habitat
assessment (Section 5.2).
6.2 SELECTING FISHING SITES
The field team assesses the presence and extent of major fish habitats before
selecting sampling sites. Team members select sites using a temperature and DO profile,
bathymetric data, physical habitat data, and shoreline maps of littoral habitat. The standard
protocol calls for all (oxygenated) major habitats to be sampled regardless of their expected
productivity (i.e., gear are not placed to maximize catch). Fish sampling sites are chosen by
a stratified (by macrohabitat), random (within habitat) process. Depending on lake size, 3 to
-------
DAY 1 ACTIVITIES
SHORE (1 Person)
Prepare trap nets
Prepare minnow traps
Prepare gill nets
Prepare Fish Tally forms
BOAT (2 Persons)
Conduct lake profile
Habitat characterization:
- Map littoral macrohabitats on Habitat Sketch Map
- Assess gear suitability and habitat at each station
Collect benthos samples (optional)
RETURN TO SHORE
1
SHORE (3 Persons)
Determine lake habitats
Allocate effort among gear types
Select sampling locations
Mark sampling sites on Site Location Map and transfer
macrohabitat extent from Habitat Sketch Map
Load nets into boat
SHORE (1 Person)
Complete preparing gill nets
Prepare materials for voucher specimens
Prepare for night seining
BOAT (2 Persons)
Deploy trap nets and minnow traps
Deploy gill nets (after 6 PM)
RETURN TO SHORE
1
BOAT (2 or 3 Persons)
CHECK GILL NETS IF REQUIRED (10 PM)
Retrieve gill nets
- ID and tally fish collected
- Set aside candidate specimens for tissue sample
- Preserve voucher specimens
Redeploy gill nets
BOAT (3 Persons)
NIGHT SEINING (after dusk)
Travel to seining sites
Conduct seining
Record effort information on Fish Tally Form
ID and tally fish collected
Set aside candidate specimens
for tissue sample
Preserve voucher specimens
Fi-DOPtXOlPPT
Figure 6-1. Summary of fish sampling activities (page 1 of 2)-Day 1.
6-2
-------
DAY 2 ACTIVITIES
SHORE (1 Person)
Prepare to process the fish tissue samples
BOAT (2 Persons)
RETRIEVE GILL NETS
ID and tally fish collected
Set aside candidate specimens for tissue sample
Preserve voucher specimens
Complete Tally Form
RETURN TO SHORE
SHORE (1 Person)
Complete voucher samples
Lay out nets to dry
Prepare for water and sediment sampling
BOAT (2 Persons)
RETRIEVE TRAP NETS AND MINNOW TRAPS
> ID and tally fish collected
> Set aside candidate specimens for tissue sample
• Preserve voucher specimens
• Complete Tally Form
SHORE (1 Person)
Select candidate specimens for composite sample
- Prepare sample for shipment
- Complete Fish Tissue Tracking Form
Pack voucher jars for transport
- Complete voucher materials
- Check preservation
Clean and pack nets for transport
- Lay out nets to dry
- Check, clean, and repair
- Disinfect with weak bleach
- Fold dry nets
BOAT (2 Persons)
Collect water and sediment samples
FLDOPEX9S.PPT
Figure 6-1 {continued). Summary of fish sampling activities (page 2 of 2)--Day 2.
3-3
-------
26 fishing sites are selected, in addition to these standard protocol sites, the team selects
one or two "best professional judgment" sampling sites.
In the pelagic (midlake) portion of the lake, the water column is stratified into as many
as three macrohabitats: epilimnion, metalimnion, and hypolimnion. The presence, location,
and extent of these macrohabitats are determined by the temperature and DO profile, size of
the lake, and overall bathymetry. In thermally mixed lakes, the water column in the midlake
portion is considered to be one macrohabitat. The midlake habitats are sampled by setting
gill nets overnight.
The littoral zone is also stratified by macrohabitats (Section 5.3) and is sampled by
setting trap nets and minnow traps overnight, by seining after dark, and, at larger lakes, by
setting 1 or 2 gill nets. Ideally, littoral fish sampling takes place at randomly selected
physical habitat stations in each macrohabitat class.
Some general guidelines for selecting the exact location within a selected sample
sites are to:
• Select sample sites that are representative of their macrohabitats. If the
procedures (see Sections 6.2.3 through 6.2.5) select a site that is
uncharacteristic of that macrohabitat (e.g., the only weed bed in a large area of
open water), move the sampling station to the closest representative location.
• Avoid areas with heavy boat traffic or recreational activity.
• Avoid areas with low dissolved oxygen levels. Fishing should not take place in
water with less than 2.0 mg/L dissolved oxygen. These areas are not expected
to support any fish, based on consultations with fishery biologists throughout the
northeastern U.S.
If site selection procedures select a site that is directly out from a private beach or
dock it is wise to inform the property owner(s) of the purpose and duration of your activity
and that you have a state permit to sample that lake. EMAP is sampling in human influenced
areas and needs to include these sites, especially if they make up a major portion of the
shoreline.
6.2.1 Fish Sampling Effort Required
Table 6-1 summarizes the amount of fishing effort required as a function of lake size.
At some lakes there may be fewer appropriate locations for one or more gear types than the
6-4
-------
TABLE 6-1. NUMBER OF FISH SAMPLING STATIONS"
Standard Selection Protocol
Lake area
(ha)
1-4
5-14
15 - 29
30 - 49
50 - 74
75 - 149
150 - 249
250 - 599
600 - 999
1,000 +
Trap net
(with
minnow
trap)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Littoral
gill net
(with
minnow
trap)
-•
_
Oor1b
Oor1b
1
1
2
2
2
Midlake
gill net
1
2
3
3or4b
4 or 5b
5
6
6
T
8
Seining
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
1
Best
professional
judgment
units
(minimum
required)
1
1
1 '
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Lakes less than 75 ha are normally sampled in one night. Lakes 75 ha and larger are normally
sampled over two nights.
b Depends on lake type (see Table 6-2).
6-5
-------
number required In Table 6-1. In order to keep the sampling effort consistent across all
lakes, the teams are required to set the number of nets listed. For gill nets, set all nets even
if the lakes are too shallow for them to fish effectively. For trap nets, some nets may be set
deeper than would be ideal. In some lakes seining may only be possible at the launch site.
The only allowable exceptions to the number of sets required in Table 6-1 are in response to
state permit restrictions, threats to team safety (too steep or deep to seine), or snag-filled
areas which would destroy the nets.
6.2.2 Selecting Sites for Midlake Gill Nets
The site selection process for gill nets aims to sample all midlake fish macrohabitats.
In thermally stratified lakes these macrohabitats are hypolimnion, metalimnion, and
epilimnion. Any areas with DO less than 2.0 mg/L are not considered fish habitats and are
not sampled. Conversely, some deep lakes are characterized by extensive volumes of cold
oxygenated water. At these lakes, the site selection process is modified to emphasize
sampling this habitat. In general for thermally stratified lakes:
• Sample the hypolimnion with bottom sets starting at the index site or deepest
oxygenated location (net bottom just above the oxygen depletion depth). Disperse
additional hypolimnetic sets randomly away from the first net. If oxygen depletion
occurs in the metalimnion or very top of the hypolimnion, do not sample the
hypolimnion.
• Sample the metalimnion with bottom sets placed along (not across) the bottom
contour at the thermocline (the depth of most rapid temperature change, usually
near the middle of the metalimnion). Set the net so that the weighted line at the
bottom of the net (lead line) is at the thermocline (refer to Figure 5-1).
• Sample the epilimnion with midwater sets (top of net at 1.5 m) randomly dispersed
away from the center of the lake, in water deeper than 3m,
Using the example shown in Figure 5-1, the deepest net would be set on the bottom
with the lead line at 9.0 m, recorded as a hypolimnion set. Using this figure but assuming
other dissolved oxygen conditions, then, if the 2.0 mg/L depth had been at 8.0 m, the
deepest set would be at that depth and would be recorded as a metalimnion set. The
second net (see Table 6-2) would be set on the bottom with the lead line at 5.0 m. If the 2.0
mg/L depth was at 4.0 m, then the deepest set would be a bottom set at that depth and
recorded as an epilimnion set.
6-6
-------
In mixed lakes; where the change in water temperature is less than 1 °C per meter of
depth, consider the midlake area as one habitat and sample by bottom sets starting at the
center of the lake. In deep mixed lakes use some midwater sets.
At larger lakes set one or two gill nets at littoral stations (Table 6-1). Select these
locations during the littoral station selection process (Section 6.2.3). Use the rules in Table
6-2 to select gill net sites, and mark their location on Side 2 of the Physical Habitat Sketch
Map Form (Figure 6-2). Final choice of gill net sites should be such that the nets fish
effectively at a depth greater than 1.5 m (if possible), are not set on ledges or steep drops
that may distort the net, and are not among snags which will entangle and rip the net. The
lead line should not be lower than the oxygen cutoff of 2.0 mg/L. Littoral gill nets are set
parallel to shore (top of net 1.5 m deep).
6.2.3 Selecting Sites For Littoral Trap Nets and Gill Nets
To select locations for littoral trap nets and gill nets, first determine the number of trap
net and littoral gill net sites for that lake (Table 6-1). Then estimate the proportion of
shoreline included in each macrohabitat class by totaling estimated percentages for each
segment on the sketch map (the total should be between 90 to 110 percent, otherwise
recheck). Record the major habitats, their estimated total extent (percent), and the physical
habitat stations in each habitat in the box on page 2 of the Physical Habitat Sketch Map
Form (Figure 6-2). Also note which gear may be effectively used at each station.
For some lakes, the lake outline is divided among two or three Physical Habitat Sketch
Map and Fish Sampling forms. This segmentation provides more space on the map for
recording habitat and sampling information. In these cases, record the major habitats,
estimates, and stations shown on the map on only one of these forms.
Throughout this process, the field team should consider the number of littoral
sampling sites required as they determine the major macrohabitat classifications. For
example, at a small lake scheduled for two trap net sites, the team should consider whether
the lake can be reasonably viewed as having one or two major littoral macrohabitats, rather
than automatically trying to delineate four or five. A macrohabitat must extend over at least
10 percent of the shoreline to be considered "major" and be sampled by passive gear.
There are three possible scenarios for selecting littoral sites for trap nets and gill nets
(summarized in Table 6-3). The easy case is when the number of passive littoral sites
required (Table 6-1) equals the number of macrohabitat classes. Choose by random
methods one station in each habitat listed in the box on the Physical Habitat Sketch Map
6-7
-------
TABLE 6-2. SELECTING GILL NET LOCATIONS
Use the following rules to select gill net sites.
Lake Mixed (UnstratifiecH
A. Lake shallow (<6 meters) and mixed
Set all gill nets on bottom. Set the first net at the deepest point. Set most remaining nets
approximately midway between the center and randomly chosen physical habitat stations.
Place every fourth net at a littoral station (use littoral site selection procedure to choose
locations).
B. Lake deep fee meters) and mixed
Same as A (above) except set every third net in "midwater" (top of net 1.5 m deep) in non-
littoral areas.
Lake Stratified
A. Lake stratified with extensive deep oxygenated water
(Defined as a layer of oxygenated water *2 rh thick below the metalimnion, AND the areal
extent of this layer of water exceeds approximately 50 percent of the lake surface area.)
Set gill nets in the following order:
1. deep bottom (index site) or deepest oxygenated water near the center of the lake.
metalimnion (bottom set following the contour of the thermocline [the depth within the
metalimnion where the vertical temperature gradient is greatest], toward randomly
chosen physical habitat station).
epilimnion (midwater set-top of net 1.5 m deep, approximately halfway between the
center of the lake and a different physical habitat station).
deep bottom (away from first net in random direction).
metalimnion (see A-2 above).
littoral zone.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
For additional sets follow in order: A-4, A-6, A-3, and A-4 above.
B. Lake stratified without deep oxygenated water
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
deepest oxygenated water on bottom near the center of the lake.
metalimnion (see A-2 above) or bottom set in "deep" epilimnion (if the metalimnion is
anoxic). Net may be set at the same depth as B-1, but away from the first net in a
randomly chosen direction.
epilimnion midwater set (as A-3 above).
littoral zone.
same as B-1 (away from other deep nets in a direction selected randomly)
same as B-2.
same as B-3.
same as B-4.
same as B-5.
same as B-2.
6-8
-------
PHYSICAL HABITAT SKETCH MAP FORM (continued)
VISIT*: 1 2
USE THIS MAP TO LOCATE UTTORAL HACHOHABtTAT TYPES AND FISH SAMPLING SITES
.-»*"
s..
RECORD FISH SAMPLING STATIONS AND GEAR TYPE
(Q.GSXNIT,TMTHAPNET,M = «NHOWTRAP,B.BMCHSUNI,SoSHOHTSBUt EXAMPLE: F1Q,F2T,ETC.).
!FAEirEKBElECTimFORADOmONALSTAW>ARDPBOTOCOLOT*DGE»ttOTSAUI>t^
EXAMPLE; F1QGX.F4BJ.tTC.
MACROHABITAT CLASSIFICATION AND EXTENT SUMMARY
MACROHAB.
CLASS OOOOO
1. EXTENTS) AND TOTAL
STATIONS
COMMENTS
MCtAC.
10
B »mJ. If fuL
NC.
SO HO
fr* t
Iff.
TOTAL »IQQf.
REVIEWED BY (lnnuu-}:
Rev. 3/35 FLOFRM8.es
Phy»Ic«l Habitat Skitch U«p Form - 2
Figure 6-2. Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form, Side 2.
6-9
-------
TABLE 6-3. SELECTING LITTORAL SAMPLING SITES
Use the following rules to select littoral sampling sites. First determine:
1. the number of passive littoral sampling stations (the number of trap nets plus the number of littoral
gill nets),
2. the proportions of shoreline in each macrohabitat (rank by extent). A macrohabitat must comprise
a total a 10 percent of the shoreline to be considered major,
3. which physical habitat stations are in each major habitat.
To select specific locations for littoral sampling stations:
1. If the number of littoral sampling stations is equal to the number of major habitats, randomly
choose one physical habitat station per major habitat.
2. If the number of littoral sampling stations is greater than the number of major macrohabitats,
randomly choose one physical habitat station per major habitat, and assign the remaining
sampling sites to physical habitat stations in the most extensive habitats in a manner that
disperses sampling evenly around the lake.
3. If the number of littoral sampling stations is less than the number of major macrohabitats, then
choose to:
a. increase the number of littoral stations, noting this fact and the reasons on the Fish Tally Form
(append an "X" to the station code),
OR
b. if possible, for some of the less extensive macrohabitats, allocate sampling effort to seining,
OR
c. re-evaluate habitat classifications and combine similar habitats until the number of stations is
equal to the number of major habitats (mark the new macrohabitat classification on Side 2 of
the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form and note the changes in the comments section;
OR
d. randomly choose physical habitat stations in the more extensive habitats (not sampling less
extensive habitats) and note reasons in comments section.
6-10
-------
Form, Side 2 (Figure 6-2). Follow the steps in Section 6.2.6 for recording the location of
each net.
The second case is when the number of passive littoral sites exceeds the number of
macrohabitats. Here, assign the "extra" nets to physical habitat stations in the most
extensive habitats. If one or two macrohabitats greatly predominate, assign the extra nets
proportionally to them. Use a random method to choose the first net site in each habitat,
then spread the additional sites as evenly as possible around the shore at physical habitat
stations in the predominant macrohabitats.
When the number of macrohabitats exceeds the number of passive littoral sites,,
consider the following alternatives:
1. Increase the sampling effort if the major macrohabitats differ considerably and
there is a high likelihood that the fish assemblages also differ. This is the
preferred option (teams are encouraged to perform additional sampling at any
lake). Treat the additional sets as "extra" samples (Section 6.2.5).
2. Determine if one or more of the less extensive macrohabitats could be more
effectively sampled by seining and allocate the sampling effort for that
macrohabitat to that method.
3. Reevaluate the macrohabitat classification and combine two (or more) similar
habitats. Indicate the new (combined) macrohabitat classification on the Physical
Habitat Sketch Map Form, Side 2 (Figure 6-2) and note the changes in the
comments section.
4. Choose to not sample the least extensive habitat(s). Note reason in the
comments section on Side 2 of the Sketch Map Form.
6.2.4 Selecting Sites for Seining
Seining (done' after sunset) differs from the other fishing methods by being an active
method. In addition, while very effective, seining works well only in limited habitat conditions:
shallow shore areas (generally 1 m or less in depth) with relatively smooth, firm substrate.
To be effective, ensure that the lead line of the seine contacts the bottom at all times during
the haul. Snags, rocks, and other obstructions cause the lead line to ride up off the bottom
or become stuck, permitting the fish to escape.
6-11
-------
Another difference associated with seining is that EMAP uses two alternate gears,
the beach seine (preferred) and the short seine. Use the short seine only when there are
insufficient numbers of clear beach-like areas large enough to effectively use the beach
seine. Because it is smaller, use the short seine in areas with modest amounts of '
vegetation, somewhat rocky bottoms, or between snags. However, the short seine will be
less effective, covering a smaller area in each haul and allowing fish to escape more easily.
Be sure that all data records clearly distinguish which type of seine you used.
The ideal beach seining sites will be at least 50 m long, with a clear shoreline such
that the seine can be drawn up onto the shore. In such locations, mark out in advance (with
light sticks or surveyor ribbon) two 25-m segments in which to make separate hauls. These
two 25-m segments make up one site and may be discontiguous. To be considered as one
site the two segments must be (1) within 5 percent of the lake shoreline length of each other
and (2) within the same (contiguous) macrohabitat segment. Choices of where to seine will
be very limited at most lakes. Often there will only be one or two possible seining locations,
usually shorter than the ideal 50 m. Use those places regardless of which habitat they are
in.
If there are no sites where beach seining is possible (or fewer sites than specified in
Table 6-1), then choose additional sites for the short seine. Determining what constitutes an
acceptable short seine site and a reasonable number and length of short hauls is very
subjective. The target level of effort for short seine sites is four hauls (~6 m long) in each of
two 25-m lengths of shoreline. A site may include one segment which is a beach seine haul
(<£ 25 m) and another segment which includes up to 4 short seine hauls. Section 6.5
provides instructions on how to document the use of a short seine and beach seine at the
same site. Every reasonable effort should be made to do some seining.
At some lakes the only beach seining sites will be on private property. Team
members should inform the owners of the purpose and duration of the sampling activities
and that a state permit has been issued for that purpose.
If there are numerous possible seining locations, then distribute the required effort
among the habitats if possible at randomly chosen physical habitat stations not already being
fished by passive gear. In this case it may be better to choose beach seining sites first and
then allocate passive sampling sites. Use the seine at least 100 m away from the nearest
passive gear. These procedures for selecting seining sites are summarized in Table 6-4.
6-12
-------
TABLE 6-4. SELECTING SEINING SITES
During the shoreline survey, note any shallow shore areas with relatively smooth, firm substrate, fairly
free of snags, rocks, and other obstructions.
In the following order:
1. Give preference to sandy beaches ;>50 m long (where beach seine can be used). In such
locations, mark two 25-m segments in advance with light-sticks. Segments may be
discontiguous.
2. If no long beaches exist, then choose shorter beaches for beach seining.
3. If there are no sites for beach seining (or fewer sites than required), then choose (additional) sites
for the short seine (areas with modest vegetation, somewhat rocky bottoms, or between snags).
4. If there are numerous possible seining locations, distribute effort among the habitats at randomly
chosen physical habitat stations, at least 100 m away from any passive gear.
5. Make every reasonable effort to seine. If the only seining sites are on private property, seek
Dermission from owners. '
6-13
-------
6.2.5 Judgment and "Extra" Sampling
There are two kinds of sampling in addition to the standard selection protocols (Table
6-1). First, at all lakes the teams are required to perform at least one or two units of
sampling effort of Best Professional Judgment (BPJ) sampling. The members of each team
should decide how they would add sampling effort to improve the overall index sample of
fish-i.e., to catch additional species and to get larger numbers of species they expect will be
undersampled by the standard protocol. The team may target a microhabitat location (e.g.,
place a trap net at a stream inlet or the only weed patch) and use one of the standard
methods (trap net, gill net, or seining) or use a nonstandard method (e.g., dipnetting or
daytime short seining in an area too cluttered for night seining). There are two constraints on
nonstandard methods: the state permit must allow the method, and the team must use
methods other than angling exclusively. Use "N" as the gear code for all nonstandard
methods and record the method in the "other" space on Side 1 of the Fish Tally Form (Figure
6-3): Use the following standard terms for some of the common "nonstandard" gear: dipnet,
daytime seining, deep set minnow trap. Team members may fish by angling if they purchase
their own state fishing licenses. They should record their time and catch in the comments
section on Side 1 of the Fish Tally Form (Figure 6-3), but the team must use some other best
professional judgment sampling method in addition. Give these judgment samples site
numbers in sequence with the standard selection protocol sites, and appropriate gear code
and append a "J" to the site code (e.g., F15TJ).
The second kind of additional effort occurs when the standard protocol misses one or
more major habitats (most likely at small lakes). If the number of nets in Table 6-1 is less
than the number of macrohabitats and these habitats differ greatly, the crew should add gear
under the standard protocols. For example, if the littoral zone at a 4-ha lake is 60 percent
HONS and 40 percent NCVM (Table 5-3), add a second trap net and place one net in each
habitat Note the reasons in the comments section of the Fish Tally Form, Side 1 and give
the second trap net a site number appended with an "X" (e.g., F2TX).
6.2.6 Recording Gear Type Placement Data
During the above site selection process described in the previous sections, mark
sample sites on the map on Side 2 of the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form (Figure 6-2).
Designate each sample site by F1, F2, F3, etc., in order of selection. Add a single letter to
denote gear type (e.g., F1T, F1M, F2G). Always place minnow traps with trap nets and
littoral gill nets, and assign both sets of gear the same site number (e.g., F1T and F1M
indicate trap net and minnow trap at Fish Site 1).
6-14
-------
FISH TALLY FORM-LAKES Paqe / of \
LAKE NAME: L. ^/eSfffUf
VISIT #: 1 2
LAKE ID: N Y O B_JLl- TEAM ID (circle): i (T) 3 4 s a TBBIO OTHER:
NEAREST P-HAB STATION (A -J, X): c OI3T. &DIR.
FROM STATION: Q SITE ID: F_£ END CREW INITIALS: K)f r flfl , MD
END DATE: ff%IJ?
FISHING DEPTHS: MINIMUM: 3 . t9 M MAXIMUM: H . / M
COMMENTS:
'
JAR ID (Barcode):
. CHECK HERE IF NO FISH WERE COLLECTED:
TAG ID: O3
Common Nairn: ru*lfKt*J5f£b
Adutt y^
TOTAL
?.
MUSEUM
O
f MEASURED
FOflLENOTH:
5L
Common N«m»: J^/flt. FISH
'*** ^AM
-------
For each gear type (e.g., gill net, trap net) fill out as much of the Fish Tally Form--
Lakes, Side 1 (Figure 6-3), as possible before setting the gear (one form per gear type).
Record the lake name, lake ID, nearest physical habitat station start date, microhabitat class
and gear type for all gear including gill nets. For gill nets set at the index site, record an "X."
After the gear is set, (1) confirm that the mapped sample location is correct and matches the
information on the Fish Tally Form and (2) fill out the remaining first day information-team
ID, distance and direction from physical habitat station, personnel setting gear, start time,
fishing depths (lead line depths of gill nets, leader and frame opening depth of trap nets)~on
Fish Tally Form (Figure 6-3). Also record the m/crohabitat for the actual fish sampling
location, using the same four-letter coding system. For the majority of fishing sites, this is
the same as the macrohabitat for that shoreline segment. Seining sites are the most likely
areas where these two habitat classes differ.
6.3 PREDEPLOYMENT PREPARATION OF FISHING GEAR
While two team members in the boat collect bathymetry, physical habitat,
temperature, and dissolved oxygen data, the third team member remains on shore to
prepare the trap nets and minnow traps (Table 6-5). This person can also begin to prepare
the gill nets (Table 6-6), although this task cannot be completed until the gill net sites are
selected and depths are known. A working midwater gill net is shown in Figure 6-4.
6.4 DEPLOYMENT METHODS
On the first day at a lake, following site selection and gear preparation, the team
deploys the passive fishing gear (trap nets, minnow traps, and gill nets) and then seines after
sunset. To set any gear, the two-person team travels to the locations marked on page 2 of
the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form (Figure 6-2). Determine the exact placement of gill
and trap nets following the procedures in Tables 6-2 and 6-3 and in sections 6.2.2 and 6.2.3.
If there are no physical constraints (e.g., steep bottom combined with a narrow littoral zone,
dense weeds, snags), assign trap nets and littoral gill nets to the selected physical habitat
stations at random. Selected sampling stations with steep-sloped bottoms or narrow shallow
areas are good candidates for littoral gill nets (set parallel to the shore). Stations with snags
and woody debris would preferentially get trap nets. Littoral gill nets can be set in weedy
areas, if care is used. Each minnow trap is set 0.5 to 1 m deep, within 50 m of the sampling
site trap net or littoral gill net, and is considered to be within the same site (e.g., if the trap net
is F4T, then the associated minnow trap is F4M).
Ideally, sites for passive littoral gear were selected (Section 6.2.3) directly at the
randomly chosen physical habitat stations. It is important that the sampling results represent
6-16
-------
TABLE 6-5. ONSHORE PREPARATION OF TRAP NETS AND MINNOW TRAPS
Determine the minimum number of trap nets and minnow traps for that size lake.
Trap Nets
1. For each trap net:
a. Set out 4 anchors, each with a 0.5-m line and quick-clip. Place the anchors in a tub.
b. Set out one float with a 4-m line, quick-clip and two floats, each with a 1.5-m line and
quick-clip. Place all the floats in a tub.
c. Tie the cod end and lay the net on the ground, cod end down.
d. Pull the leader and each wing out and untangle them. Fold the left wing, then the right
wing, neatly on top of their sides of the net. Fold the leader neatly on top of the middle of
the net.
2. Load the nets onto the bow with the cod end down, the frame bottom forward, and the floats
aft. Load the tubs.
Minnow Traps
1. Place a rock in one half of each minnow trap and clip the two halves closed. (In some regions
a trap may be baited with dry dog food.)
2. Clip a 1.5-m line, with a float, to each trap.
6-17
-------
TABLE 6-6. ONSHORE PREPARATION OF GILL NETS
Determine the minimum number of gill nets required for the lake. Get out that many net tubs.
After site selection-bottom sets (Refer to the diagram of types of gill net sets.)
For each net:
1. Set out two anchors, each with a 0.5-m line and quick-clip, and three floats, each with a 1.5-m
line and quick-clip. Place them in a tub.
2. Determine the set depth (A in the diagram). Subtract 3 m. This will be the distance between
the top of the 1.5-m net and the bottom of the 1.5-m float lines. Set out three lines of the
appropriate length for this distance. Add 25 percent of the total length of the float line to
account for net drift, etc. Each line should have quick-clips on both ends. Place the lines in a
tub.
After site selection-midwater tepilimneticl sets (Refer to the diagram of types of gill net sets.)
For each net:
1. Set out:
a. two anchors, each with 0.5-m line and quick-clip,
b. six single-ball floats, each with 1.5-m line and quick-clip, and
c. two double-ball floats, each with 1.5-m line and quick-clips. Place these in the tub.
2. Determine the water depth at the sampling site. Subtract 3 m. This distance ("D" in the
diagram) will be the distance between the bottom of the net and the lake bottom. Multiply D
by 1.5 to determine the anchor-line length ("E" in the diagram). Set out two lines, each of the
appropriate length for this distance. Each line should have quick-clips on both ends. Place
the lines in the tub.
3. Set out a float with a line (with length = to site depth plus slack of 25 percent: "F" in the
diagram) and quick clip. This is the "stretch" line. Set it in the tub
6-18
-------
EPILIMNETIC (MIDWATER SET)
(Not to scale)
Set depth (3 m when site depth is
Float line (length =
5 m single ball float) attached at -8-m intervals
End float line with flashing light float attached (length
Site depth -3m
Anchor line (total length
ite depth plus some slack)
Stretch line with single ball float (length
DEEP METALIMNETIC AND HYPOLIMNETIC (BOTTOM SET)
(Not to scale)
B
O
LEGEND
A. Set depth: equal to depth to top of metalimnion OR
depth at which dissolved oxygen is > 2 mg/L (hypolimnetic set)
B. Float line with single ball float (total length = A -1.5 m)
C. End float line with single ball float or float with flashing light
attached (total length = 1.25 x [A - 1.5 m])
D. Anchor (attached directly to bottom corner of net)
FLDOPEX95.PPT
Figure 6-4. Types of gill net sets.
6-19
-------
the fish assemblage in that macrohabitat. If the chosen physical habitat station appears
nonrepresentative of the macrohabitat class (e.g., the station happens to be vegetated in a
long stretch of open habitat), then deploy the gear in the nearest representative area (but not
more than 5 percent of the shore length away from the physical habitat station). Record the
reason for the move, and the distance and direction from the station on the Fish Tally Form
(Figure 6-3) in the comments space on Side 1. If the macrohabitat class includes one of the
"Mixed" categories, then try to place the gear in a truly mixed area.
The team also has some leeway regarding the exact placement of sampling units to
improve the effective operation of the gear. This does not include simply moving to a
location expected to produce a larger catch ("hot spots" may be sampled as part of the BPJ
sampling described in Section 6.2.5). For example, trap nets fish most effectively when the
top of the leader and trap mouth are not submerged and the frame sits squarely on the
bottom. If conditions at the physical habitat station preclude this, the crew may choose to
move the net to the closest suitable location. If the net is not set directly at the physical
habitat station, then record the reason, distance, and direction on page 1 of the Fish Tally
Form (Figure 6-3).
6.4.1 Gill Nets
At some lakes there may be restrictions required by state permits on the length of
time gill nets may be left fishing. If such restrictions occur, use the following deployment and
retrieval procedures at all lakes sampled in that region (for a particular survey) to provide
comparable data. Deploy (set) all gill nets in the early evening (2 to 3 hours before sunset)
and pull at least two nets that night after a 4-hour interval (or the interval prescribed by the
restriction if less than 4 hours). Process fish in the standard manner (Section 6.6). Append
an "A" to the station ID to denote this first set (e.g., F4GA). At lakes with gill net restrictions,
pull all nets and do not reset any. At all other lakes start a new Fish Tally Form and reset the
nets in the same location. Append a "B" to the station ID to denote this second set (e.g.,
F4GA and F4GB are the first and second gill net sets at station 4). Pay attention to the
timing of dinner and night seining to meet this schedule. Generally, do seining after the gill
nets are pulled.
Table 6-7 provides instructions for setting pelagic epilimnetic gill nets. Table 6-8
provides instructions for setting bottom gill nets in the hypolimnion, at the top of the
metalimnion. For littoral gill nets follow the instructions in Table 6-8 (bottom set) except as
follows:
The net should be entirely in the littoral zone (bottom depth approximately 3 m)
parallel to shore. Center the net across from the physical habitat station flag.
6-20
-------
TABLE 6-7. SETTING EACH EPILIMNETIC GILL NET
1. Examine the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form and go to the appropriate pelagic gill net location.
2. While the boat is stationary, clip an anchor line (length determined in advance) to the lead line.
Next, clip a 1.5-m line with a double-ball float to the float line.
3. Drop the anchor into the water, then the float.
4. Put the engine in reverse and slowly pay out the net. Keep it clear of cleats, rivets, or other
snags. Also ensure that the float line remains above the lead line.
5. From the tub, take six floats, each with a 1.5-m line and quick-clip. As the net plays out, clipieach
float to the net, at approximately 8-m intervals. .
6. When reaching the opposite end of the net, clip a 1.5-m line with a double-ball float to the float
line. Clip the second anchor line to the lead line and a stretch line (length = site depth + slack)
with float directly to the anchor.
7. Drop the anchor overboard, but retain the stretch line float.
8. Use the stretch line to pull the net taut, then drop the float overboard.
9. Ensure the net is "fishing" (hanging smoothly from the float line, with no tangles or twists) either
visually or with sonar.
10. Fill in the appropriate information on the Fish Tally Form for that location.
6-21
-------
TABLE 6-8. SETTING EACH BOTTOM GILL NET-HYPOLIMNION AND METALIMN1ON
Pelagic Gill Nets
1. Examine the Habitat Sketch Map Form and go to the appropriate location. Use the sonar to
locate an area with a relatively flat and snag-free bottom of the appropriate depth (determined
earlier).*
2. While the boat is stationary, clip an anchor directly to the lead line and a marker float to the float
line.
3. Drop the anchor into the water, then the float.
4. Put the engine in reverse and slowly pay out the net. Keep it clear of cleats, rivets, or other
snags. Also ensure that the float line remains above the lead line. Approximately midway clip a
float to the float line.
5. When reaching the opposite end of the net, clip an anchor directly to the lead line and a float to its
float line.
6. Drop the anchor overboard, but keep the stretch line float on board.
7. Pull the net taut, then drop the float overboard.
8. Cruise slowly between the three floats, using the sonar to check that the actual net depths are as
intended and that the net is not over any sharp drops or ledges.
9. Fill in the appropriate information on the Fish Tally Form for that location.
For littoral gill nets, follow the above instructions, with the following exceptions:
a. Place the net entirely in the littoral zone (bottom depth approximately 3 m) parallel to shore.
Center the net across from the physical habitat station flag.
b. If the lake is extremely shallow and you are sure there will be no other boat traffic on the lake,
you may place the top of the gill net (float line) at a depth less than the recommended 1.5 m.
6-22
-------
• If the lake is extremely shallow and the crew is very sure there will be no other
boat traffic on the lake, the top of the gill net (float line) may be at a depth less
than the recommended 1.5 m.
6.4.2 Trap Nets and Minnow Traps
Table 6-9 provides instructions for setting trap nets. Place a weighted minnow trap
within 50 m of each trap net at a depth of 0.5 to 1.0 m, in cover, if it exists.
6.4.3 Fish Tally Form and Instructions
After finishing each set, fill in the following information on the Fish Tally Form:
• Distance (estimated as tens or hundreds of meters, as appropriate) and direction
(L = left, R = right, facing shore) from physical habitat station;
• Start time-use 24-hour clock time;
• Macrohabitat class (for that shore segment) and microhabitat class (for that
sample site);
• Fishing depths-for trap nets, "Minimum" is the depth of the shore end of the
leader and "maximum" is the depth at the frame mouth: For gill nets minimum
and maximum refer to lead line depths;
• Comments-related to set or location, etc.
6.5 RETRIEVAL METHODS
Retrieving fishing gear is the first task of the second day at the lake. Team members
retrieve one piece of gear at a time, starting with the gill nets, and process the fish in that
gear before proceeding to the next gear site. They retrieve gill nets according to procedures
in Table 6-10 and trap nets and minnow traps according to Table 6-11. They retrieve
minnow traps while retrieving adjacent gear, but keep fish in separate buckets and use
separate Fish Tally Forms (Figure 6-3). Before processing the collected fish the crew should
complete the retrieval information in the upper half of Side 1 of the Fish Tally Form (date,
time, crew initials, any comments). Details on processing the fish are in Section 6.6. If no
fish are collected, ;the appropriate box on Side 1 of the Fish Tally Form (Figure 6-3) should
be checked.
6-23
-------
TABLE 6-9. SETTING EACH TRAP NET
1, Examine the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form, and go to the flag for the designated physical
habitat site. Find a suitable trap net location as near as possible to the flag* with:
a. a smooth, firm bottom with gentle slope,
b. few snags, and
c. a depth &2.S m at 15 m from shore (frame mouth location).
2. Pilot the boat to shore. Fasten the leader on shore or anchor.
3. Reverse, paying out the leader, until the frame is reached.
4. Put the motor in neutral, attach a float to both wings, and throw wings and floats into lake.
5. Reverse and pay out frame.
6, Attach an anchor and float with 4-m line tied to the cod end.
7. Continue to reverse away from shore, pulling on the cod end to pull the frame erect. Drop the
cod end with anchor and marker float. Ensure that stretching the trap does not pull the leader
away from the shore.
8. For each wing, retrieve the float and attach an anchor to the bottom of the net. Move each wing
to a 45° angle with the leader.
9. Complete the appropriate information on the Fish Tally Form. .
If the microhabitat at the physical habitat station does hot represent the macrohabitat for that
shoreline segment -OR- the net cannot be set to fish effectively, move to the nearest
appropriate location and record the distance, direction, and reason for the move on the Fish
Tally Form.
6-24
-------
TABLE 6-10. RETRIEVING EACH GILL NET
GUI Net
1. Approach the downwind end of the net. From the bow, grab the marker float and pull up the
anchor.
2. Pull the net into the boat, over the bow, and into its tub. Use reverse, if necessary, to keep the
boat from drifting into the net. Avoid cutting the net on metal edges on the bow.
3. While pulling the net into the boat, pull fish out and place them into live wells. It may be useful
to process large fish as they are pulled from the net.
.1
4. Detach floats and the other anchor.
5. Record the retrieval time, date, and crew initials on the appropriate Fish Tally Form.
6. Process the fish from the live wells.
Minnow Trap (littoral gill nets only)
1. Pull the minnow trap before leaving that station.
2. Either process the fish directly out of the trap or place the fish in a live well (separate from the
one used for the gill net) and process later.
3. Record the appropriate data on the Fish Tally Form.
6-25
-------
TABLE 6-11. RETRIEVING EACH TRAP NET AND MINNOW TRAP
Trap Net
1. Remove the anchor from each wing.
2. Go to shore. Unfasten the leader from shore.
3. Put the engine in neutral. Pull the leader, frame, then cod end into the boat, shaking the fish
down into the cod end. Detach the anchor and float from the cod end.
4. Untie the cod end and empty the contents of the net into live wells. Recheck frame box and
other net parts for remaining fish.
5. Pull the wings aboard, detach the floats.
6. Record the retrieval time, date, and crew initials on the correct Fish Tally Form.
7. Process the fish from the live wells.
Minnow Trap
1. Pull the minnow trap before leaving that station.
2. Either process the fish directly out of the trap or place the fish in a live well (separate from the
one used for the trap net) and process later.
3. Record the appropriate data on the Fish Tally Form.
6-26
-------
6.5.1 Gill Nets
If there are gill net restrictions, pull at least two gill nets at all lakes 4 hours (or less
depending upon the restrictions) after the initial set and process the fish. If there are no gill
net restrictions for that lake, start a new Fish Tally Form (Figure 6-3) and reset the net in the
same location. Use the same site ID for both sets; append an "A" to the first set ID and a "B"
to the second. On the morning of the second day, pull gill nets first. At the littoral sites also
retrieve the minnow traps. Continue in this fashion for each reset. Table 6-10 provides
instructions for retrieving gill nets.
6.5.2 Trap Nets and Minnow Traps
Table 6-11 provides instructions for retrieving trap nets and minnow traps. The trap
net retrieval procedures in Table 6-11 may differ from the methods taught in some fisheries
courses. Trap nets are retrieved starting with the leader, which acts to chase fish into the
net, reducing the chances of losing fish during retrieval. Other procedures for emptying trap
nets are more appropriate when nets are set out for extended periods. The reasons for this
difference are discussed during training. To ensure consistency, all teams must use the
methods described in this manual.
6.5.3 Seines
For the standard protocols, seine after dark at sites marked in advance with light
sticks or flagging. See Section 6.2.4 for site selection details for the seining effort. After
sunset,, proceed to each seining site, which may consist of one or two segments (each one
up to 25 m long). At each segment where the beach seine is used, perform one haul. At
each segment where the short seine is used, perform up to four passes. Thus each seining
site may include up to two beach seine hauls or up to eight short seine passes. Table 6-12
provides instructions for night seining with the beach seine. Table 6-13 provides instructions
for night seining with the short seine. After seining, note all pertinent information on the Fish
Tally,Form (Figure 6-3). Pool fish collected in separate short seine passes at a single site in
a live well and record on one Fish Tally Form: Use the same procedure for fish collected in
separate beach seine hauls at a site. However, use separate Fish Tally Forms and gear
codes (B = beach seine, S= short seine) to record the use of a beach seine and short seine
at the same site; use the same site number on each of the separate Fish Tally Forms for the
same site.
Before fish processing begins, record the number of hauls and calculate the area
seined (sum the products of the working length of the net used times the length of the haul).
It is useful, especially for short seining, for three team members to do the seining: two to
6-27
-------
TABLE 6-12. NIGHT SEINING WITH THE BEACH SEINE
1. Examine the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form and go to an appropriate location, where up to
two segments are marked off with light sticks or surveyor ribbon.
2. After sunset, two people hold opposite ends of the seine and proceed with one haul per
designated segment as described in steps 3 through 7.
3. Stretch the net out perpendicular to shore. Hold the shoreward stake where the water meets the
beach. The seine may be shortened somewhat by rolling it onto the stakes if the bottom drops
off too quickly or some other factor prevents the full length from being safely used.
4. Haul the seine parallel to shore for up to 25 m of shoreline or until available space is used.
a. The offshore stake should be hauled with the bottom of the stake preceding the top.
b. Keep the lead line in contact with the lake bottom.
c. Move as rapidly as possible, keeping the seine moderately taut and, if possible, preventing the
float line from submerging. "
5. About 2/3 of the way through the shoreline distance, the offshore person begins to rotate toward
shore, aiming for the segment end marker. Meanwhile the shoreward person slows, such that
both people meet (about 3 m apart) on shore at the end of the segment.
6. Pull both ends of the net into shore.
a. Keep the lead line in contact with the bottom.
b. Don't pull too fast; fish will jump over the float line.
c. The lead line should be slightly forward of the float line.
7. Pull the "pocket" of the net onto shore.
a. Keep the floats high.
b. Keep the lead line taut and on the bottom until the net is out of the water.
c. Shake fish stranded in the wings toward the center of the net.
After fish are landed reach haull
8. Remove all fish from the net and place them into live wells.
9. Calculate the area seined by multiplying the working length of the net by the estimated distance
seined. Sum the total for that gear at the station and record this and other sampling information
on the Fish Tally Form.
10. Process all fish caught.
6-28
-------
TABLE 6-13. NIGHT SEINING WITH THE SHORT SEINE
1. Examine the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form and go to an appropriate location where you
marked off up to two segments with light sticks or surveyor ribbon.
2. After sunset, two people hold opposite ends of the seine and proceed with up to 4 passes per
designated segment as follows:
3. Stretch the net out. If needed the seine may be shortened by rolling part of it onto the stakes.
4. Moving rapidly, haul the seine, for a few meters in any direction (this depends on the site
conditions, but toward shore if possible).
a. Keep the lead line in contact with the bottom, without submerging the float line.
b. The bottom of the stake should precede the top.
5. After the desired area has been traversed, while still moving, quickly pull both ends of the lead
line forward and out of the water, keeping the float line up out of the water. Keep a pocket in the
middle for holding fish while moving to shore.
After fish are landed (each set of 4 passes) .
6. Remove all fish from the net and place them into live wells.
7. Calculate the area seined by multiplying the working length of the net by the estimated distance
seined. Sum the total for that gear at the station and record this and other sampling information
on the Fish Tally Form.
8. Process all fish caught.
6-29
-------
operate the net and one to record the number of hauls, estimate the length of each haul,
bring the live well to the seiners, and keep tally records.
6.6 PROCESSING FISH
At each fish sampling site, fish processing involves the following general tasks:
• identify individual fish to species, place in a general age class, and examine for
external anomalies;
• measure up to 20 fish of each long-lived species;
• set aside specimens for possible use as tissue contaminants samples;
• preserve example specimens of each species as museum vouchers; and
• record comments related to the fish on the Fish Tally Form.
The general chronology for these tasks is summarized in Table 6-14. This procedure
assumes the net has been pulled, all header data in the Fish Tally Form are entered, and all
fish have been removed from the net.
Most of the fish processing tasks are completed at each station before moving on to
the next. Depending on lake size, weather conditions, and numbers of fish collected, the
process may be done either in the boat or at the landing. To avoid problems in keeping track
of multiple stations and to reduce fish mortality, pull nets from only two stations before
returning to the launch site (except if nets come up empty). Processing of portions of the
tissue contaminants specimen is done once per lake, at the landing.
6.6.1 Species Identification and Tally
Remove all fish from the net or trap and place in a fresh bucket of lake water before
processing begins. Work carefully, but quickly to reduce stress to the fish. Release live fish
not needed for tissue analysis (Section 6.6.4) or museum vouchers (Section 6.6.5) to the
lake. Avoid holding fish longer than needed. The following procedures will expedite the
work. Modify these to fit your work style.
6-30
-------
TABLE 6-14. GENERAL FISH PROCESSING CHRONOLOGY
1. Make a preliminary examination of the fish in the live well and develop a preliminary species list
on the Fish Tally Form.
2. For each fish:
a. Identify to species.
b. Place in general age group and tally.
c. Examine for external anomalies.
3. For each species
a. Measure total lengths of approximately 20 individuals of long-lived species.
b. Set aside (after tallying) any candidates for tissue contaminants sample.
c. Preserve museum voucher specimens.
4. After all sites have been completed, process fish for tissue contaminants sample.
5. Record any comments related to identification, anomalies, and tallying on Side 2 of the Fish
Tally Form. '
6-31
-------
• As you remove fish from the net or trap and place them in the bucket of water,
make mental notes as to the species present. After all fish are out of the net take
a few minutes to examine some of them to determine approximate numbers and
sizes of most of the species caught. It may be useful to sort the fish by species
into additional buckets before further processing.
• Assign one person to handle the fish, while the other records data. The fish
handler will probably want to keep the measuring board on his or her lap as a work
surface. The recorder uses at least two forms at the same time-trie Fish Tally
Form and a form to record fish lengths (Section 6.3.3).
• Try to process all (or most) of each species before going on to the next. This
should help avoid extra paper shuffling. Also, consider processing all individuals
(of a species) within an "age group" together.
• Examine each fish individually. However, you may handle small fish in small
manageable groups to speed processing.
• If a net has caught many large fish, you may process them directly from the net
while it is being pulled.
• Use the space on the Fish Tally Form (Figure 6-3) for Adult, Juvenile, and YOY
(young-of-year) to record partial counts (e.g., hash marks, small group counts)
before recording the total count for that age group for that species. Also use this
space to keep track of the number of individuals retained as museum vouchers.
• Before leaving each station, double check the forms to ensure that all data have
been recorded.
Occasionally, a species will be "observed" but not collected, for example, common
carp observed in shallows or "hanging around" docks where they are fed. Include noncrew
angler catches (confirmed by a crew member) or dead fish seen. Record these observations
on separate Fish Tally forms, giving them a station code appended with a "J." Include other
species information from local contacts on the Lake Assessment Form (Section 9), not on a
Fish Tally Form. The following subsections describe specific procedures that apply for each
kind of data recorded.
6.6.1.1 Species Identification-
• Record on the Fish Tally Form (Figure 6-3) both the common name and the
species code (first 4 letters of the genus and first 2 letters of the species).
6-32
-------
Species codes are listed in the regional activities plan. If more than five species
are collected, use the Fish Tally Continuation Form (Figure 6-5).
• Be alert for possible surprises, such as hybrids and recently introduced species.
This also applies to difficult taxonomic groups and very small fishes. When in
doubt, record these with the species code of UNKNnn where the nn is filled in
starting with 01 at each lake (i.e., first UNKN01, followed by UNKN02). Write your
best guess to the lowest taxonomic level that you are comfortable with in the
common name space. Always retain as museum vouchers a large number (or all)
of any UNKNnn.
6.6.1.2 AgeGroups--
• Tally count each species by general age group-adult, juvenile, young-of-year.
This is a judgment, based on size, color, and overall appearance. It is not critical
to be absolutely correct in this decision. The purpose is to have at least qualitative
evidence as to whether a species is reproducing and maturing at a lake.
• Measure species expected to regularly exceed 100 mm as adults (Section 6.6.3).
Do not spend time referring back to previous data to determine where earlier age
group cutoff lengths were made.
Table 6-15 summarizes the procedures for tallying, examining, and measuring fish.
6.6.1.3 Nonfish Species—
• Nonfish species will be captured occasionally. Count these and record the
common name to the lowest taxonomic level with which you are comfortable on
the Fish Tally Form (Figure 6-3). For "Species Code" use "OTHERn" where "n" is
replaced by a number 1 through 9 (e.g., OTHER1 for first nonfish species at that
lake, OTHER2 for the second). This numbering scheme should be consistent
within the data for each lake but not necessarily among lakes.
• Retain examples of amphibians, leeches, mollusks, and crayfish as museum
vouchers (Section 6.6.5). Other animals may be photographically documented.
• Record the mortality rate for nonfish vertebrates in the Comments section of the
Fish Tally Form, Side 2 (Figure 6-6).
• In the field notebook, keep notes on other animals observed but not captured. At
. the end of the lake visit, transfer this list to the Lake Assessment Form (Section
9.1).
6-33
-------
FISH TALLY CONTINUATION FORM-LAKES Paqe 3 of £
LAKE ID: ftL3__O O
Q_\. SITE ID: Fj£^
VISIT*: (& 2
JAR ID (Barcode):
TAG ID:
Adult //
TOTAL
a
CofTKnon Ntrr
MUSEUM
0
\K
• MEASURED
FORUNOTH:
A
Adult
TOTAL
MUSEUM
f MEASURED
FORLEMOTH:
Juvmlto
TOTAL
JuvtnU*
TOTAL .
Common Nam*:
AduH
TOTAL
MUSEUM
fMlASUREO
FOHLENQTH:
Common Namt:
Adutt
TOTAL
MUSEUM
f MEASURED
pon LENGTH:
Juvwill*
TOTAL
Juv»nl!»
TOTAL
Common Nama:
Adult
TOTAL
MUSEUM
f Uusuno
POHLtNOTH:
Common Nama:
Adult
TOTAL
MUSEUM
• MEASURED
FOB LENGTH:
Juvunllo
TOTAL
SPECIES CODE: _ 1
Figure 6-5. Fish Tally Continuation Form-Lakes, Side 1.
6-34
-------
TABLE 6-15. TALLYING. EXAMINING, AND MEASURING FISH
1. Identify each individual to species (if possible) and estimate its age group (adult, juvenile, or
young-of-year).a Place a hash mark in the appropriate box of the Fish Tally Form. Record its
common name and species code.b
2. Examine each fish for external anomalies. If anomalies are present, record the species code and
anomaly code(s), and place a hash mark under "# of Fish" on Side 2 of the Fish Tally Form.
3. If more than five species are collected, use the Fish Tally Continuation Form as necessary.
4. On the Fish Length Form, record total lengths (i.e., with mouth closed and caudal fin compressed)
for 20 individuals of long-lived species.0 If there are <;20 individuals, measure total length for
each. If there are more than 20 individuals for that species, use the following subsampling
procedure:
a. Separate outliers, i.e., exceptionally large or small individuals (generally 30 percent larger
or smaller than the rest of specimens). Measure their total lengths separately. Record
their lengths on the Fish Length Form, noting that they are outliers.
b. If the remaining fish (nonoutliers) are fewer than 20, measure all individuals. Otherwise,
measure a random subsample. If there is a wide range of sizes with no obvious outliers,
measure individuals from the entire size range, even if more than 20 specimens are
measured.
5. Save museum voucher specimens.
6. Save candidate specimens for possible use as fish tissue contaminant samples,
a Age group classification is a judgment based on size, color, and overall appearance.
b When in doubt, record species as UNKNnn (nn is a number from 01 to 99 for each lake where 01
is the first unknown species). Codes for most species are the first four letters of the genus and the
first two letters of the species.
c Place a "U" in the flag box if the measurement is suspect and explain in the comments column.
Additional individuals of the same species may be denoted with an arrow (do not use ditto marks).
6-35
-------
uucEio:^yj(!}«>£L FISH TALLY FORM (continued) srrcio-.F /17TT VISIT i: I?) 2
Common Nairn: ClJn ITf "PfUCH
A** JH^I
TOTAL
6
MUSEUM
o
fMIASURED
FOR LENGTH:
6
Juvonlla
TOTAL
Common Nemo:
Adult
TOTAL
MU3IUU
f MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
Common Name
Adult
TOTAL
Muslim
t MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
Juvtnili
TOTAL
Juvtnlt*
TOTAL
SPECIES CODE:
MUSEUM
* MEASURED
FOB LENGTH:
SPECIES CODE:
MUSEUM
'MEASURED
FORLENOTH:
SPECIES CODE:
MUSEUM
» MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
YOV
TOTAL
FLAG:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
IFOR LENGTH:
FLAG:
VOY
TOTAL
MUSEUM
* MEASURED
FORLENOTH:
FLAG:
YOY
TOTAL
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
IP > 5 SPECIES ARE COLLECTED. CHECK HERE AND USE A TALLY CONTINUATION FORM.
IS THERE EVIDENCE OF STOCKING (circle)? YES <^NO^ 1!
SPECIES CODE
/VJ0R0AM
ANOMALY/
STOCKING CODE
x
#OF
FISH
3_
FLAG
SPECIES CODE
ANOMALY/
STOCKING CODE
#OF
FISH
FLAQ
ANOMALY/STOCKING CODES: D = Deformitiot; E = Erodsd fin«; L = Lesions or ulcers; T = Tumors; F= Fungus;
i; B = Blind in one or both eyes; K = Emaciated; M = Exceasive mucus;
P = Heavi
FLAG
/ Infestation of external parasites; 2 = Other (explain in comments); S = Stocking.
COMMENTS
F1AQ CODES: K-NOMEAStmEUENTOR OBSERVATION MADS; U-SUSPECTMtASUBEMENT OR OBSERVATION; F1, F2, ETC.-MlSC, FLAGS ASSIGNED BY FIELD CREW.
EXKAW *a RA3S M COMMENTS SECTION. ATTACH SEPARATE COMMENTS SHEET IF NECESSARY.
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
•J**
FLDFRMS55
Flth Tally Form-Lake*-2
Figure 6-6. Fish Tally Form-Lakes, Side 2.
6-36
-------
6.6.1.4 Evidence of Stocking-
It there is evidence that the fish collected were stocked (e.g., fin clips, characteristic
fin erosion, tags), mark the appropriate space on Side 2 of the Fish Tally Form (Figure 6-6),
record the species and number collected, and use an "S" code to describe this evidence in
the Anomalies section. Circle "Yes" only if evidence is present for fish caught in that gear.
6.6.1.5 Species of Concern-
Rare, threatened, or endangered fish species are generally not a concern in lakes.
However, there will be species of concern for most individual states. These species are
listed in the regional activities plan. All states know in advance which lakes the EMAP
Surface Waters field teams will be sampling, and they generally know where the species of
concern occur. The states provide a list of concerns prior to sampling and these will be
included in lake dossiers. There may be special instructions from individual states, but the
general rule is to quickly release any live species of concern. If circumstances allow (i.e., the
extra handling will not harm the fish), document these species with photographs. If the fish
is dead, retain it as a voucher specimen (Section 6.6.5). In either case, inform the
appropriate state officials as soon as possible.
6.6.2 External Anomalies
Table 6-16 summarizes the procedures for documenting anomalies. Examine all live
or freshly dead fish for easily visible external anomalies (including any within the buccal
cavity and on the gills). Do not make exact counts of anomalies present (i.e., the number of
tumors, lesions per fish), but record the numbers of fish affected. Record anomalies on side
2 of the Fish Tally Form (Figure 6-6) using the anomaly codes in Table 6-16. Rapidly scan
each fish as it is sorted and counted, taking less than one minute per fish. Inspect all body
surfaces, fins, eyes, buccal cavity, and gills. For each fish species and anomaly code,
record the number of individuals affected. Fish sampling gear may cause some damage to
the body surfaces and fins. Do not record these gear-related injuries.
In general examine:
• Body surfaces, fins, buccal cavity, and gills-Note any discolorations of body
surfaces (e.g., darkening, hemorrhaging, cloudiness), raised scales, white spots,
or parasites. Also look for lumps, growths, ulcerations, fin erosion, deformities of
the vertebral column and mandibles, swelling of the anus, short operculum,
missing fins, or any other abnormality.
« Eyes-Check for cloudiness, hemorrhage, exopthalmia (pop eye), and depression
into the orbits.
6-37
-------
TABLE 6-16. EXAMINING FISH FOR EXTERNAL ANOMALIES
Rapidly, but thoroughly, examine each fish tallied for the anomalies listed below.3 Spend less than
1 minute per fish. Inspect all body surfaces, fins, eyes, buccal cavity, and gills.
Code
Anomaly
D Deformitlesa-can affect the head, spinal vertebrae, fins, stomach shape, scales, operculum, or
eyes. Examples include pugheadness, jaw deformities, and clubtail.
E Eroded finsa~inc!udes necrosis at the base of the caudal fin (peduncle disease) and erosions of
the preopercle and operculum.
L Lesions or Ulcersa--appear as open sores or exposed tissue. Prominent bloody areas on fish
should also be included. Small, characteristic sores left by anchor worms and leeches should not
be included, unless they are enlarged by secondary infection.
T Tumors-result from proliferative cellular growth with tissue that is firm and not easily broken.
Parasites may cause tumor-like masses that can be squeezed and broken, but these should not
be considered as tumors.
F Fungus-appears on the body or eyes as a white cottony growth and usually attacks an injured or
open area of the fish. Ich, a fungus that manifests itself on the skin or fins as white spotting is
rare in wild fish populations.
B Blind in either eye.
S Emaciated.
P Parasites (heavy)~include leeches, anchor worm, spinyhead worm, and copepods. The soft
tumor-like masses caused by parasites, as well as heavy black spot infestations, should also be
included.
M Mucous (excessive).
Z Other-explain these.
Note anomalies on Side 2 of the Fish Tally Form. Use the species code and all appropriate anomaly
codes from above."
If possible, preserve examples of fish with anomalies or parasites as part of the museum voucher
specimen collection.
• Fish can be damaged during capture (especially by gill nets) and handling. Do not note
anomalies of this origin.
b Do not make exact counts of anomalies present (e.g., the number of tumors per fish).
6-38
-------
6.6.3 Length
At each station, measure (to the nearest millimeter) individuals of each species
expected to regularly exceed 100 mm as adults. Such species are listed in the regional
activities plan. Make the length of these measurements at the same time as the
identification, examination for anomalies, and tallying activities. During this process, the data
recorder works with two forms at the same time: the Fish Tally Form and the Fish Length
Form (Figure 6-7). Thus, the fish handler needs to pace the work accordingly. Record the
length data on the Fish Length Form, and record all the other information on the Fish Tally
Form (Figure 6-3) as described in Table 6-15. Use the following procedures for the length
data:
• Measure the total length-mouth closed and caudal fin compressed to achieve
maximum length. Check the flag box on the Fish Length Form and record a
comment if caudal fin is eroded enough to affect total length.
• It is useful, but not essential, to measure all of one species before starting the
next. Use a wavy vertical arrow (not ditto marks) to denote fish of the same
species. Do not use ditto marks (since these can be read as "11") in the lengths
column.
• If there are 20 or fewer individuals present (per species to be measured per
station), measure all.
• If there are >20 individuals, first separate any obvious outliers (fish noticeably
larger or smaller than the majority). "Obvious outliers" is a visual, subjective
category; generally those individuals at least 30 percent larger or smaller than the
largest or smallest representatives of the nonoutliers. These will generally be <10
percent of the total. Measure these individuals and check the "out" box for outlier.
Then measure a random subsample (about 20) of the remaining specimens.
• If there is a wide range of sizes with no obvious outliers, measure individuals from
the entire size spectrum (even if you end up measuring more than 20).
6-39
-------
FISH LENGTH FORM-LAKES
PAGE A. of IH
LAKE NAME: /..
VISIT* (?) 2
LAKEID:
TEAM ID (circle): 1 /£)
SITE ID
SPECIES CODE
COMMON NAME
TOTAL
LENGTH
(mm)
AGE
CLASS
COMMENTS
F6&R
PfKCFL
IOO
2J2£_
S
loO
US.
1L±.
4
za£_
JL20-
loT_
SifeKf*.
i
k/mrtf SucK.fl
PfKCFL
VftJLOUl
.JA.
AS-
hmLfnn
3J-
fau. fit*
A.
^fi.
JC.
P;vft JLt/xtcD
5"5"
CHECK HERE IF ADDITIONAL DATA ARE RECORDED ON REVERSE SIDE: V
•A s ADULT; Js JUVENILE; ANDY 3 YOUNG OF YEAH • f
FLAG CODES: K 3 NO MEASUREMENT COLLECTED; U=SUSPECT MEASUREMENT; F1.F2, ETC.=MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY FIELD
CREW. EXPLAIN ALL FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION.
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL)
RIV.3/95 FLDFHMS.95
Fish Lent)th Form - Lakes • 1
Figure 6-7. Fish Length Form-Lakes.
6-40
-------
6.6.4 Tissue Contaminants Samples
For the fish tissue contaminants sample use the best five fish of one species that has
a high likelihood of being caught and eaten by predators (wildlife or human) and of
containing detectable levels of toxics, Candidate species are listed in the regional activities
plan. Collect this sample in a two-stage process, in the first stage select candidate
individuals from among all fishes caught. Hold these candidate fish in a live net or keep
them on ice until all sampling gear have been retrieved. In the second, final stage, select a
five-fish composite sample from among the candidates and process for shipping. The
composite sample consists of whole fish; the field teams do not fillet or gut the fish.
6.6.4.1 Selecting Candidate Fish For The Fish Tissue Sample--
Because of the number of criteria regarding a desirable fish tissue sample and the
variety of fish catch scenarios, there can be no hard and fast rules or simple hierarchy of
criteria governing how the composite sample will be collected. The general criteria (in order)
for selecting individuals for the composite sample are:
1. five individuals of one species,
2. a species high on the food chain,
3. large fish,
4. approximately the same size,
5. collected from all areas of the lake, and
6. live or freshly dead.
If there are no top predators, insufficient numbers of them, or they are relatively small, then
the selection priority becomes (in order):
1. smaller primary predators,
2. bottom feeders, or
3. any species with sufficient number to make up a sample.
This section provides guidelines for applying as many of these criteria as possible.
6-41
-------
At each sampling station, save individuals (large, if possible) of the target species (or
nontarget species if target species are absent or rare). See the regional activities plan for
the target species priority list and the preferred minimum lengths of each. At first the crew
should keep all target species (and sometimes nontarget) individuals. As more gear is
retrieved, it will often become apparent that one or more target species are present in
sufficient numbers that meet the minimum target size. Thereafter, it is not necessary to keep
candidate individuals of lower priority target species. Make an effort to save candidate
specimens from as many pieces of gear (stations) as possible.
Immediately following tallying, examination, and measurement, place candidate
individuals in a tub filled with lake water. Upon return to shore, place them in the live net.
Place candidate specimens that are dead on ice while still in the boat or immediately upon
return to shore. Place the ice in plastic bags to prevent melting ice from leaching the fish
tissue or contaminating the fish. When it is necessary to retrieve some nets on Day 1, retain
some of the most eligible candidate specimens for possible inclusion in the samples
prepared on Day 2. Place healthy specimens in the live net; place specimens that are in
poor condition or dead, on ice.
To avoid potential contamination, label all containers used to prepare tissue
contaminant samples and dedicate them to this activity. Rinse the containers well with lake
water before each use and do not use them at other times to store chemicals or equipment.
6.6.4.2 Selecting and processing the final tissue sample-
After fish have been collected from all sites at a lake, set up a work area at the
launch site to process the composite sample for shipping. Ensure that all work surfaces are
clean (rinsed with lake water). Determine from among the candidates (in the live net or on
ice) which species have individuals that meet as many of the selection criteria as possible.
Follow the guidelines in Table 6-17 to select the final sample. As a precaution, do not return
the nonselected fish to the lake until all sample processing is complete.
To determine whether or not the EMAP Surface Waters sampling gear and strategy
collect candidate specimens from different areas in each lake, record the number of nets
(sampling stations) from which the fish tissue candidates were collected on the Fish Tissue
Sample Tracking Form (Figure 6-8). Note that the term "candidate" does not refer to just the
final sample. Candidates are the entire catch (excluding individuals that are too small for
consideration) of individuals of that species from which the final sample is chosen. Great
precision is not required; give your best estimate. Also record the total number of sampling
stations on this form. Follow the procedures in Table 6-18 for processing the sample for
shipping.
6-42
-------
TABLE 6-17. FINAL SELECTION OF FISH TISSUE SAMPLE
1. Select 3 to 5 individuals of the highest priority species available* that are at or above the
preferred minimum length for that species. When possible, the individuals should be of similar
size, collected from various areas of the lake, and relatively fresh.
a. Collect 5 fish if at all possible. Collecting 5 fish is generally a higher priority than getting
species higher on the target species list. For example, if 3 of the top priority species and 10
of the third priority species (all of the preferred size) are caught, use the best 5-fish sample
of the third priority species.
b. If the size discrepancy is large (but the species priority rank is the same), choose in favor of
3 or 4 large versus 5 small fish. For example, if there are 3 of species A at 400 mm total
length and 5 of species B at 150 mm total length, select species A.
c. Ideally, individuals should be as large as possible and all of the same size. The guideline is
that the length of the smallest fish in the 3-to-5 fish sample be at least 75% of the largest.
This size relationship can be estimated visually. This is a goal and not a requirement.
Collecting high priority target species at or above the preferred minimum length is more
important than meeting this similar size goal.
d. Select live and freshly dead fish preferentially. However, fish selected do not have to be
alive or to have been witnessed "meeting their maker." Using a species high on the target
species list is a higher priority than freshness.
2. Decision criteria for some cases where the sample choice may not be clear:
a. If two predator species have been collected, one species with 3 or 4 individuals (> preferred
minimum size) and one species with 5 individuals (> preferred minimum size), choose the
5-fish sample even if this species is of lower priority, unless the 5 fish are much smaller
than the 3 to 4 individuals of the higher ranking species (see 1 a).
b. If 1 to 4 individuals at or above the preferred minimum length of any target species are
collected, add smaller individuals of the same species to bring the total to 5.
c. If fewer than 5 individuals of any size of any target species are collected, use a smaller
number. In this case, also send 5 individuals of a nontarget species or 20 to 60 small fish
(minnows or other) if available (resulting in two separate samples).
d. If neither (b) or (c) above works, use 20 to 60 (preferred number if available) small fish
(minnows or other), all of one species if possible. The intent is to obtain a fish tissue
sample of some kind from each lake.
3. Release remaining candidate individuals still alive. Properly and discreetly dispose of all dead
fish not used. •
* Target species and length criteria are presented in the regional activities plan.
6-43
-------
FISH TISSUE SAMPLE TRACKING FORM-LAKES
LAKE NAME: /,, Uoe&fVS DATE PREPARED: 7/¥/fV VISITS: (T5 2
LAKE ID: H /
1
2
3
4
S
6
7
a
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
£ O P L . TEAM ID (circle): i (?) 3456789 10 OTHER-
SPECIES CODE
M.C_JL.G_A.*L
^
/5 « ^A
unni
FLAG
COMMON NAME
LUu,T* PfltfH
>^-
s^
5
TOTAL
LENGTH
(MM)
2/0
flteV
2,,
WEIGHT
(KQ)
AP
I A
/ &
a e>
* /
FLAG
SAMPLE ID
(BARCODE)
£_Q I tf _S^g_
r
^
^)
^LJ^L^^LJL
# OF STATIONS FROM WHICH FISH TISSUE CANDIDATE SPECIMENS WERE COLLECTED: H
COMMENT OR FLAG EXPLANATION
CHECK HERE IF MORE DATA ARE RECORDED ON OTHER SIDE:
FLAG CODES: K = NO SAMPLE COLLECTED; U = SUSPECT SAMPLE; F1. F2, ETC. * MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY FIELD CHEW EXPLAIN
ALL FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION.
RiY. aMS FLDFRMS.95
Ftah TlniM S«mplo Tracking Form- UkM • 1
Figure 6-8. Fish Tissue Sample Tracking Form.
6-44
-------
TABLE 6-18. FISH TISSUE SAMPLE PROCESSING
1. Keep work surfaces and wrapping materials clean and free of potential contaminants (e.g.,
mud, fuel, formalin, sunscreen, insect repellant).
2. Measure total length of individuals selected. If a scale is provided, obtain a weight for the entire
sample, either by weighing all individuals at once or by summing weights obtained for individual
' fish. ; 1
3. Fill out the Fish Tissue Sample Tracking Form completely (including total lengths). Write the
bar code number assigned for shipping on the form. NOTE: Sealing the bags of ice with
tape is especially important on Fridays and in other cases when samples may be in
transit for more than one day. Use additional ice bags in these situations.
4. Wrap each fish in aluminum foil (unless there are many small fish) with the dull side of the foil
against the fish. Place all the wrapped fish in a self-sealing 1 -gal plastic bag or in a
30-gal plastic bag.
5. Expel excess air and seal the bag. Wrap tape around the bag neck to seal and make a surface
for attaching the sample label.
6. Complete a fish tissue sample label with bar code (make sure the bar code number is the same
as the one recorded on the tracking form) and apply it to the tape surface. Cover the label
completely with a layer of clear, waterproof tape,
7. Place labeled self-sealing 1-gal plastic or 30-gal plastic bags containing the sample into a
second plastic bag and seal. Repeat steps 5 and 6 applying a duplicate bar code label.
8. Place ice in self-sealing plastic or 30-gal plastic bags (to keep ice and water away from the fish
sample). Fold over the bag neck and seal with tape. Place bagged ice in cooler with double-
bagged fish sample. Also indicate on the Fish Tissue Sample Tracking Form the number of
sites from which candidate specimens were collected, and the total number of sites sampled.
9. Later, during postsampling activities at the next base site, process the tissue sample cooler for
shipment. Ship fish as soon as possible after collection, using overnight air courier.
6-45
-------
6.6.5 Museum Vouchers
As part of the QA program, and to provide historical documentation, preserve
museum voucher specimens of all species. Make exceptions for large individuals of easy to
identify species and document these photographically. This exception is mostly a storage
consideration for both the crew and the museum. Retain larger numbers (if not all) of small
or difficult to identify species, as well as possible hybrids, as vouchers. Where very large
numbers of small or difficult to identify species are collected, sort all individual fishes to the
lowest taxonomic level (with which you are comfortable), and count and preserve a generous
random subsample (or all) of each taxa. Table 6-19 provides an overview of the numbers of
fish to preserve from each sample site and at each lake. The regional activities plan
presents an overview of the voucher strategy by taxonomic group.
For some species there may be initial uncertainty about whether particular fish should
be preserved for museum vouchers or used for tissue contaminants specimens. Until
enough additional fish are collected to make a decision, place all candidate fish in individual
live nets (minnow traps will serve the purpose) by station, with a museum tag identifying the
station. Obtaining an adequate fish tissue contaminants sample has priority over museum
vouchers.
6.6.5.1 Preparing Voucher Bottles-
The details of preparing materials, actual preservation, labeling, and transporting
vouchered fish are provided in the regional activities plan. Anesthetics are not used to
prepare voucher specimens. Before retrieving any gear or seining, prepare containers,
labels, and an adequate volume of formalin. Whether or not formalin is taken out on the lake
in the boat depends on regional sampling procedures described in the regional activities
plan. If formalin is not allowed on the boat, maintain voucher specimens from each gear and
site in a separate container with a separate label or tag. In any case, place voucher
specimens in 10 percent formalin as soon as possible to produce the best results.
Handling Formalin: See the regional activities plan for specific instructions
related to handling formalin. Some people are acutely sensitive to formalin and
others can become so. It is a hazardous chemical and should be stored and
handled with care. Work with formalin only in the open air and wear gloves
and eye protection when transferring it to bottles or transferring preserved
fishes. Use forceps to handle preserved fishes.
6-46
-------
TABLE 6-19. OVERVIEW OF FISH VOUCHERiNG*
Group I - Easy to identify as adults, usually large, of less interest to museums.
• Adults-Preserve 1 or 2 specimens per lake only if small (<2QO mm total length) and
space permits. Document others with a photograph.
• Juvenile-Preserve 1 or 2 specimens for each gear type at each station.
• Young of Year (YOY)-Preserve 1 to 5 specimens for each gear type at each station.
Group II - Adults may be tricky to identify OR species uncommon in the region, but size is an issue
for preservation and shipping.
• Adults-Preserve 1 or 2 specimens of small adults from each gear type (<200 mm).
If only large adults, preserve 1 or 2 specimens per lake and document with photo.
• YOY and Juvenile-Preserve 2 to 10 specimens from each gear type at each station.
Group III - Small to moderate-sized fish, adults (and some juvenile and YOY) easy to identify.
• Adults-Preserve 2 to 5 specimens per lake.
• Juvenile—Preserve 2 to 5 specimens per lake.
• YOY-Preserve 2 to 5 specimens from each gear type at each station.
Group IV - Small or difficult to identify or likely to hybridize.
• Adults-Preserve 2 to 10 or more specimens per gear at each station if <150 mm;
otherwise preserve 1 specimen per gear type at each station. When in doubt preserve
additional specimens.
• YOY and Juvenile-Preserve 5 to 30 or more specimens per gear type at each station;
preserve more (possibly all) if species identity is unclear (species code = UNKNnn).
* Detailed vouchering and preservation procedures are presented in the regional activities plan.
6-47
-------
At each sampling station do the following:
• As fish are being tallied and measured, for each species (see the regional
activities plan for species specific voucher rules) select at least one small
individual (alive, if possible) as a voucher specimen. Record the number of
individuals of each size group of each species preserved on the Fish Tally Form.
This number is compared later with museum species counts and needs to be
accurate. Keep vouchers from each gear type at each station separate from
each other.
• For most small Group IV fish (Table 6-19), preserve several individuals of each
taxa over the range of sizes collected. This procedure will aid the museum in
confirming identifications.
• Preserve the fish in as good a condition as possible, that is, as soon after
collection as is reasonably possible. The best specimens are placed live directly
into the 10 percent formalin, immediately after being taken from the net and
tallied. Specimens should not be bent nor crowded. Avoid long-dead individuals
or those badly damaged in the nets, if possible. For specimens >6 inches (about
150 mm), make a small slit on the right side to flood the body cavity with
preservative.
• If any "species of concern" are collected live, quickly photograph and release
them. If they are dead, they should be preserved as vouchers in formalin. It is
important to notify the appropriate state officials in either case.
The field crews are encouraged to preserve examples of amphibians, crayfish,
leeches, or mollusks taken in the traps or otherwise collected, as well as examples of fish
with anomalies or parasites. For these nonfish organisms, use one or two self-sealing
plastic bags per lake and keep them separate from the fish vouchers (crayfish can do
considerable damage to fish vouchers). Leeches should be anesthetized in Alka-Seltzer
water before being placed in formalin (they form tight balls otherwise). See Section 8.4 for
mollusk preservation procedures.
Before sealing the jar with the museum vouchers, confirm that the tags placed with
groups of specimens are complete and allow specimens to be traced to a station and gear
type. These tags must be printed on high-quality (e.g., 100% rag content) or water-resistant
paper. Also confirm that groups of specimens are assigned the same ID number as appears
on the jar label.
6-48
-------
6.7 EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLY LIST
Figure 6-9 consists of a series of checklists of equipment and supplies required to
conduct protocols described in this section. These checklists are similar to but may be
different somewhat from the checklists in Appendix B, which are used at a base site to
ensure that all equipment and supplies are brought to and are available at the lake. Field
teams are required to use the checklists presented in this section to ensure that equipment
and supplies are organized and available on the boat in order to conduct the protocols
efficiently.
6-49
-------
Items in (or with) Physical Habitat Tub
Sonar with transducer, bracket, and C-clamp
12-V Battery (charged)
Pigtail adapter for sonar battery
DO meter with cable, probe, weight, and calibration chamber
GPS receiver (chargedj
Surveyor's ribbon, roll
Boat anchor and 50-m line
PVC sounding pole, 3-m (in 2 sections)
Viewing box
Clipboard (with topographic map, bathymetric map, Lake Profile Form,
Habitat Sketch Map Form, Physical Habitat Characterization Form,
and Physical Habitat Comments Form)
Field notebook
Quick reference handbook
Parts kit tackle box
Items among 4 Net Tubs
Net anchors with 0.5-m line and quick clips (3/trap net, 2/gill net, 3 spares)
Floats with 1 .5-m line and quick clips (2/trap net, 3/bottom gill net,
7/surface gill net, 1 /minnow trap, 8 spares)
Floats with 4-m line and quick clips (for trap net cod end)
Gill nets (number depends on lake area)
Line sections of 5 m (2 quick clips each)
Line sections of 10 m (2 quick clips each)
Line sections of 30 m (2 quick clips each)
Net repair twine, roll
Bait for minnow traps (dry dog food, if necessary for regional sampling)
Number
Needed
1
1
1
, 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
20
50
5
7 or 8
10
10
10
1
1
Figure 6-9. Fish-related activities equipment checklists (page 1).
6-50
-------
Items in Tub of Fishing Accessories
Dip Nets
Waders
Headlamps, with batteries
Q-beam spotlight with pigtail adapter
12-V battery (charged)
Measuring board
"Cvalume" light sticks
Line section of 25-m (to measure seining sites)
Fish picks
Items in Truck or Boat (too large for tubs)
Trap Nets
Minnow traps with clips
Live net
Buckets (5-gal)
Beach seine (with poles)
Short seine (with poles)
"Net hook" on pole
Museum bottles (case of 500 mL)
Museum bottles (case of 1 ,000 mL)
Number
Needed
2
2 or 3 pr
3
1
1
1
12
1
2
6 or 7
8 or 9
1 or 2
3or4
1
1
1
6
6
Figure 6-9. Fish-related activities equipment checklists (page 2).
6-51
-------
Items in Cooler for Fish Tissue Sampling
Ice in 1-gal self-sealing plastic bags
Cooler liner (30-gal trash bag)
Foil, 25 yards
Bag, self-sealing plastic (qt)
Bag, self-sealing plastic (gal)
Composite bag (30-gal, clear or white trash bag)
Items in Cooler for Formalin/Bleach (labeled)
Formalin, 100% (37% formaldehyde, pH 7.6 to 7.8, 1 gal)
Bleach (gal)
Bleach solution sprayer
Anionic powdered detergent (Alconox or equivalent) for cleaning tissue
sample equipment
Scrub brush for cleaning tissue sample equipment
Vermiculite or other absorbant (gal)
Gloves, butyl, pair
Safety glasses
Electrical tape, roll
Cooler liner (30-gal trash bag)
Self-sealing plastic quart-size bags
Self-sealing plastic gallon-size bags
Number
Needed
^4
1
1
10
10
4
2
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1 or 2 boxes
1 or 2 boxes
Figure 6-9. Fish-related activities equipment checklists (page 3).
6-52
-------
Items in Team Leader's "Office"
Taxonomic keys set (as specified in Regional Activities Plan)
Fish Tally Form set (1 form/gear or seino site)
Fish Tally Continuation Form
Fish Length Form
Voucher and museum tag sets (1 tag/gear or seine site)
Fish Tally Form-Lakes
Fish Tally Continuation Form-Lakes
Fish Length Form-Lakes
Fish tissue labels with bar codes
Fish Tissue Sample Tracking Form-Lakes
Sampling Permit set (1 /state)
Field Operations Manual for Lakes
Regional Activities Plan
Items to Take with You to Set Nets
Clipboard (w/topo. map, Habitat Sketch Map Form, Fish Tally Forms)
Watch (with 24-hour setting)
Sonar, etc.
Sounding rod
Trap nets (with 3 anchors, 2 short floats, 1 long float each)
Gill nets (with 2 anchors, 3 floats, and appropriate lines - or - with 7 short
floats and appropriate anchor lines)
Minnow traps (with bait [if required], weight, and short-line float)
Light sticks
Line, 25-m (to mark seining sites)
Number
Needed
1
1
judgment
judgment
1 set
50
10
10
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1/site
1/site
1/site
12
1
Figure 6-9. Fish-related activities equipment checklists (page 4).
6-53
-------
Items to Take with You to Seine
Clipboard (with Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form-Lakes, Fish Tally
Forms,
Fish Tally Continuation Forms, Fish Length Forms, and Museum Tags)
Watch
Measuring board
Q-beam (with battery and pigtail adapter)
Headlamps (with spare batteries)
Waders
Beach seine
Short seine
Buckets, 5-gal
Species key (optional)
Museum bottle (prepared with dilute formalin, half full)
Measuring tape
Items to Take With You to Pull Trap Nets (and Minnow Traps)
Clipboard (with Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form, Fish Tally Forms, Fish
Tally Continuation Forms, Fish Length Forms, and Museum Tags)
Watch
Measuring Board
Buckets, 5-gal
Species key (optional)
Museum bottle (prepared with dilute formalin, half full)
Measuring tape
Self-sealing plastic bags
Number
Needed
1
1
1
1
2 or 3
2 or 3
1
1
2 or 3
1
1 per site
1
1
1
1
2 or 3
1
1
1
1 per site
Figure 6-9. Fish-related activities equipment checklists (page 5).
6-54
-------
items to Take With You to Puii Gill Nets
Clipboard (with Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form, Fish Tally Forms, Fish
Tally Continuation Forms, Fish Length Forms, and Museum Tags)
Watch
Measuring board
Q-beam (with battery and pigtail adapter)
Headlamps (with spare batteries)
Buckets, 5-gal
Species key (optional)
Museum bottles (prepared w/dilute formalin, half full; leave at vehicle)
Tub(s) (for nets)
Measuring tape
Self-sealing plastic bags
Number
Needed
1
1
1
1
3
2 or 3
1
Ijjersite
1 per net
1
1 per site
Figure 6-9. Fish-related activities equipment checklists (page 6).
6-55
-------
-------
SECTION 7
WATER AND SEDIMENT SAMPLING
by
John R. Baker, AianT. Herlihy, Sushil S. Dixit, and Richard Stemberger
Water and sediment samples are collected at the index site. Very rigid quality
assurance practices are observed in the field. Prior to launching the boat for index site
sampling, ensure that all sample containers are labeled and forms are filled out for lake ID,
date, and sample type (e.g., sediment core top and bottom, zooplankton fine and coarse
mesh) where required. To ensure legibility and completeness in recording sample
information, one individual completes field forms and labels and another checks to verify that
all pertinent information is included. Activities described in this section are summarized in
Figure 7-1.
7.1 SECCHI TRANSPARENCY
Relocate the "index site" by finding the orange marker float, which was attached to
the anchor line after obtaining DO and temperature profiles the previous day, or by sonar as
described in Section 4. Anchor the boat by reattaching it to the anchor line. After achieving
a stable position and determining the site depth, measure Secchi disk transparency using
the procedures in Table 7-1. The Secchi disk chain has depth markers at 0.5-m increments.
If the Secchi disk disappearance depth is less than 1 m, measure depth to the nearest 0.01-
m (cm) increment by marking the chain at the nearest marker, retrieving the disk, and
measuring the remaining distance with the tape measure. It is not necessary to estimate
Secchi disk depths greater than 1 m to the nearest 0.01 m. Record the depth of disk
disappearance and reappearance on the Sample Collection Form (Figure 7-2). If the Secchi
disk is visible at the bottom of the lake, check the "clear to bottom" box on the Sample
Collection Form. Comment on the form if there are any conditions that may affect this
measurement (e.g., surface scum, suspended sediments, extreme weather conditions).
7.2 WATER SAMPLE COLLECTION
Collect a water sample from 1.5 m (0.5 m if lake depth is less than 2.0 m), using the
procedure described in Table 7-2. From the Van Dorn sampler, fill four 50-mL syringes and
a single 4-L Cubitainer. Procedures for collecting these samples are presented in Table 7-3.
Prior to filling syringes and the Cubitainer, check the labels on these containers to ensure
-------
ANCHOR BOAT AT INDEX SITE
COLLECT VAN DORN SAMPLE #1
(Water Chemistry)
Collect four 50-mL syringes
Collect one 4-L Cubilainer
Fill in Sample Collection Form
MEASURE SECCHI DEPTH
Record on Sample Collection Form
PREPARE FILTRATION APPARATUS
COLLECT VAN DORN SAMPLE #2
(Chlorophyll)
Filter 500 mL for chlorophyll
Fill in Sample Collection Form
COLLECT ZOOPLANKTON SAMPLE
(Bongo Net Tow)
1 Process coarse-mesh sample
• Process fine-mesh sample
> Fill in Sample Collection Form
COLLECT SEDIMENT DIATOM SAMPLE
(Sediment Core)
Process top 1-cm interval
Process bottom 1-cm interval
Fill in Sample Collection Form
VERIFY FORM AND SAMPLE LABELS
Accuracy
Completeness
Legibility
INSPECT AND STORE SAMPLES
FLDOPEXJiPPT
Figure 7-1. Water and sediment sampling activities summary.
7-2
-------
TABLE 7-1. SECCHI DISK TRANSPARENCY PROCEDURES
1. Remove sunglasses unless they are prescription lenses.
2. Clip the calibrated chain (marked in 0.5-m increments) to the Secchi disk. Make sure the chain is
attached so that depth is determined from the upper surface of the disk.
3. Lower the Secchi disk over the shaded side of the boat until it disappears.'
4. Read the depth indicated on the chain. If the disappearance depth is <1.0 m, determine the depth
to the nearest 0.01 m by marking the chain at the nearest depth marker and measuring the
remaining length with a tape measure. Otherwise, estimate the disappearance depth to the
nearest 0.1 m. Record the disappearance depth on the Sample Collection Form.
5. Slowly raise the disk until it reappears and record the reappearance depth on the Sample
Collection Form.
6. Note any conditions that might affect the accuracy of the measurement in the comments field.
* If the disk is visible to the lake bottom, check the appropriate box on the Sample Collection Form.
7-3
-------
SAMPLE COLLECTION FORM-LAKES
LAKE NAME: /., bJo6BfVS
DATE OF COLLECTION: 7 / H I J*J VISIT #:
LAKE ID:
TEAM ID (clrcte): 1
8 9
SITE ID (circle): (INDEX) OTHER:
10 OTHER:
SECCHI DISK TRANSPARENCY
DEPTH Pax Dltwf oat
DEPTH DBK REAPPEARS
CLEARTO
BOTTOM (X)
WATER CHEMISTRY (4-L CUBITAINER AND 4 SYRINGES)
SAMPLE ID t
(B«reod«)
SAMPLE
TYPE
DEPTH
COLLECTED
FLAG
COMMENTS
R1
CHLOROPHYLL (TARGET VOLUME a 500 ML)
SAMPLE ID t
(Bifcod«)
SAMPLE
TYPE
DEPTH
COLLECTED
SAMPLE
VOLUME
FLAG
COMMENTS
R1
S~oo •"•
ML
ZOOPLANKTON (FILL TO MARK ON BOTTLE=80 ML)
MESH
SAMPLE H)*
(B«rcod«)
SAMPLE
TYPE
LENGTH
OF TOW
CONTAINERS
NO. PRESERVED (/I
FLAG
COMMENTS
COARSE
R1
FINE
2.0.2.2.3.3.
R1
SEDIMENT CORE SAMPLES (TARGET CORE LENGTH=35 TO 40 CM)
CollKHdit(clfcl»): INDEX OTHER
» OTHER, record dlf«ctlon and dl«UlK» from INDEX lite:
SAMPLE
CLASS
SAMPLE >D*
(Bareodrt
SAMPLE
TYPE
LENGTH
OF CORE
INTERVAL
From To
COMMENTS
TOP
R1
O
BOTTOM
R1
FLAG CODES: K=No MEASUREMENT OR SAMPLE COLLECTED; U=SUSPECT MEASUREMENT OR SAMPLE;
F1.F2, ETC. s MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY EACH RELO CHEW. EXPLAIN ALL FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION.
REVIEWED BY (iNtruu.):
V
R4V.3ttS R.DFRMS.S5
Sampta Collection Form - Lake* -1
Figure 7-2. Sample Collection Form.
7-4
-------
TABLE 7-2. OPERATION OF VAN PORN SAMPLER
Note: .Collect two Van Dorn samples at the index site (one for water chemistry samples [syringes
and the Cubitainer] and one for chlorophyll a).
1. Open the Van Dorn sampler by pulling the elastic bands and cups back and securing the
latches. Make sure that the mechanism is cocked so that it will be tripped by the messenger
weight. Make sure that all valves are closed. Do not place hands inside or on the lip of the
container; this could contaminate samples. To reduce chances of contamination, wear
powder-free latex laboratory gloves.
2. Attach the free end of the messenger line to the boat. Rinse the open sampler by immersing it
in the water column.
3. Lower the sampler to 1.5 m below the surface (0.5 m in lakes < 2 m deep).
4. Trip the sampler by releasing the messenger weight so that it slides down the line.
5. Raise the full sampler out of the lake. Set it on a clean, flat surface in an upright position. To
avoid contamination, do not set the sampler in the bottom of the boat. Applying some body
weight to the top of the Van Dorn sampler often will seal minor air leaks and preserve the
sample integrity. If air enters the Van Dorn sampler, discard the sample and obtain another
(repeat steps 1-5).
7-5
-------
TABLE 7-3. SYRINGE AND CUBITAINER SAMPLE COLLECTION3
1. Make sure that the Cubitainer and syringes have the same bar code number (which
identifies a single lake) and that the labels are completely covered with clear tape. Record the
bar code number on the Sample Collection Form.
2. Unscrew the valve at the top of the Van Dorn sampler. Remove the plug from the Leur-Lok
syringe fitting at the bottom of the sampler and fit a prelabeled syringe to the fitting.
3. Slowly withdraw a 20-mL aliquot into the 60-mL prelabeled syringe. Pull the plunger back so that
the water contacts all inner surfaces of the syringe. Expel the water from the syringe. Repeat
this rinse procedure twice more (there are three rinses for each syringe sample).
4. Reattach the syringe to the Leur-Lok valve on the Van Dorn sampler and slowly withdraw
60-mL of water into the syringe. If air enters the Van Dorn sampler during this process, dispose
of the sample and obtain another Van Dorn sample.
5. Place the syringe valve on the syringe tip. Press the green button toward the syringe.
6. Hold the syringe with the tip and valve pointed skyward. Tap the syringe to gather air bubbles to
the top. Expel all air from the syringe and press the red button on the syringe valve to seal the
syringe with at least 50 mL of sample water remaining. (Any extra water, greater than 50 mL,
gives the laboratory analyst a greater margin in case of instrument failures.)
7. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for three additional syringes. There should be a total of four syringes for
each routine water sample.
8. Place the four syringes in the solid plastic container and place in the cooler. Use ice contained
in sealed 1-gal plastic bags to maintain the sample at 4 °C.
9, Unscrew the top valve of the Van Dorn sampler. Unscrew the lid of the prelabeled Cubitainer."
10. Open the bottom valve of the Van Dorn sampler and partially fill the Cubitainer with water
(approximately 50 mL).
11. Screw the lid on the Cubitainer. Shake the Cubitainer so that the water inside contacts all sides.
Discard the water. Repeat this rinse procedure twice more. Collection of the Cubitainer sample
should be preceded by three (3) rinses.
12. Open the Van Dorn valve and completely fill the Cubitainer.b
13. Compress the Cubitainer to remove any residual head space. Seal the cap tightly. Wrap
electrical tape clockwise around the cap.
14. Place Cubitainer in a cooler with sealed 1-gal plastic bags of ice. Note the depth from which the
sample was collected on the Sample Collection Form.
* Wear powder-free surgical gloves while collecting syringe and Cubitainer samples. Syringes may
be chilled before use to reduce the occurrence of air bubbles in the sample.
b Fill one (1) Cubitainer for each routine lake water sample. NEVER expand a Cubitainer
by exhaling into it!
7-6
-------
that all written information is legible and that each container has the same bar code number.
Then place clear packing tape over the label and bar code, covering the label completely.
Record the bar code assigned to the sample set (the four syringes and one Cubitainer are
considered one sample) on the Sample Collection Form. Also record the depth from which
the sample was collected (1.5 m or 0.5 m) on the Sample Collection Form. Enter a flag code
and provide comments on the Sample Collection Form if there are any problems in collecting
the sample or if conditions occur that may affect sample integrity. Store samples in the
appropriate containers and verify that they are carefully packed with plenty of ice bags and
properly positioned, sealed, and labeled in the sample coolers. Recheck all forms and labels
for completeness.
7.3 CHLOROPHYLL a SAMPLE COLLECTION
Collect a second Van Dorn sample from the same depth (1.5 m or 0.5 m) as the
previous water chemistry sample. Water from this sample is filtered for chlorophyll a
analysis. Processing procedures for the chlorophyll a sample are described in Table 7-4.
Chlorophyll can degrade rapidly when exposed to bright light. If possible, prepare the
sample in subdued light (or shade) by filtering as quickly as possible after collection to
minimize degradation. If the sample filter clogs and all the sample in the filter chamber
cannot be filtered, discard the filter and prepare a new sample, using a smaller volume.
After filtering the sample and wrapping the filter in aluminum foil, record the volume
filtered on the label, check the label to ensure that all written information is complete and
legible. Place a strip of clear packing tape over the label and bar code, covering the label
completely. Record the bar code assigned to the chlorophyll a sample on the Sample
Collection Form (Figure 7-2). Also record the depth sampled (1.5 m or 0.5 m) and the
volume of sample filtered on the Sample Collection Form. Verify that the volume recorded
on the label matches the volume recorded on the Sample Collection Form. Enter a flag code
and provide comments on the Sample Collection Form if there are any problems in collecting
the sample or if conditions occur that may affect sample integrity. Store the filter sample in a
self-sealing plastic bag and ensure that it is carefully packed with plenty of sealed ice bags in
the sample cooler. Recheck all forms and labels for completeness and legibility.
7.4 ZOOPLANKTON
A zooplankton sample is collected with both coarse (202 urn) and fine (48 urn) mesh
nets towed vertically from near the bottom to the surface. The two nets are arranged side by
side on a single metal frame (bongo configuration; Figure 7-3). The calibrated chain used
with the Secchi disk is also used to make the vertical tow. Attach the chain to the bongo net
so that depth is measured from the mouth of the nets, rather than from the top of the frame.
7-7
-------
TABLE 7-4. PROCEDURES FOR COLLECTION AND FILTRATION OF
CHLOROPHYLL a SAMPLE3
1. Place a glass fiber filter (Whatman GF/F or equivalent) in the filter holder apparatus. Do not
handle the filter; use clean forceps.
2. Collect 6.2 L of water with a Van Dorn water sampler. Immediately after collection, rinse the
graduated cylinder three times with water from the Van Dorn bottle and dispense 250 mL of
sample from the Van Dorn into the graduated cylinder.
3. Pour the 250 mL of water into the top of the filter holder, replace the cap, and purnp the sample
through the filter using the hand pump.b Filtration pressure should not exceed 7 psi to avoid
rupture of fragile algal cells. (Occasionally, the pump dials have a systematic offset from 0 psi
with no pressure applied. In this case, add 7 psi to the at rest value to obtain the maximum
value. Example: If the value at rest = 5 psi (rather than 0 psi) then, 5 + 7 =
12 psi = the maximum apparent pressure allowed on the pressure gauge during filtration).
4. Remove both plugs from the bottom portion of the apparatus and pour off the water from the
bottom.
5. Replace the plugs. Pour and pump a second 250-mL portion of the Van Dorn sample through
the same filter.0 The total sample volume after this portion is filtered is 500 mL.
6. Rinse the upper portion of the filtration apparatus thoroughly with Dl water to include any
remaining cells adhering to the sides and pump through the filter. Monitor the volume of the
lower chamber, which traps the filtrate, to ensure that it does not contact the filter or flow into the
pump.
7. Observe the filter for visible color. If there is visible color, proceed; if not, repeat steps 3 through
5 until color is visible on the filter or until 1,000 mL have been filtered. Record the actual sample
volume filtered on the Sample Collection Form and on the sample label.
8. Remove the filter from the holder with clean forceps. Avoid touching the colored portion of the
filter. Fold the filter in half, with the colored side folded in on itself.
9. Wrap the folded filter in a small piece of aluminum foil. Record the sample volume filtered on a
chlorophyll label and attach it to the foil. Ensure that all written information is complete and
legible. Cover with a strip of clear tape. Place the foil-wrapped filter in a self-sealing plastic bag
and then place that bag between-two self-sealing plastic bags of ice in a cooler. Double check
that the amount for the total volume of water filtered that is recorded on the Sample Collection
Form matches the total volume recorded on the sample label.
10. Prior to sampling the next lake, rinse graduated cylinders with Dl water.
* Wear powder-free surgical gloves while collecting and filtering the chlorophyll a sample.
b If 250 mL of lake water will not pass through the filter, change the filter, rinse all apparatus with Dl
water, and repeat the procedures using 100-mL of lake water measured in a 100-mL graduated
cylinder.
0 Skip step 4 if 250 mL of water would not pass through the filter during step 2. If the filter clogs
before all of the second 250-mL portion is filtered, discard the filter and prepare a new sample using
a smaller volume (100 mL). Record the total volume filtered on the Sample Collection Form and on
the sample label.
7-8
-------
Fine-mesh net
(48 |im mesh)
Coarse-mesh net
(202 |im mesh)
Removable
buckets
Figure 7-3. Configuration of zooplankton nets.
7-9
-------
Zooplankton collection procedures are described in Table 7-5. After collecting the
two samples (coarse and fine) and dispensing them into 125-mL jars, check the labels to
verify that all written information is complete and legible. Record the length of the tow on the
label. Place a strip of clear packing tape over the label and bar code, covering the label
completely. Record the bar codes assigned to the two (coarse and fine) zooplankton
samples and the length of tow on the Sample Collection Form (Figure 7-2). In clear, shallow
lakes (less than 2-m deep, where the Secchi disk can be seen on the bottom), perform a
second tow to collect a sufficient number of individuals to adequately characterize the
assemblage. The 14 mL of borax-buffered sucrose-formalin preservative is adequate for a
total volume of approximately 80 mL. Safety procedures for handling formalin are outlined in
the Regional Activities Plan. A zooplankton sample bottle should not be filled more than two
thirds full. Add additional preservative or use an additional sample bottle if necessary. The
presence of preservative in the sample is noted on the Sample Collection Form to assure the
integrity of the sample. Record a flag code and provide comments on the Sample Collection
Form if there are any problems in collecting the sample or conditions occur that may affect
sample integrity. Seal the lids of the jars with electrical tape, place jars in a self-sealing
plastic bag, and store samples in the zooplankton net bag for transport. Again, verify that all
forms and labels are correct and complete.
If replicate zooplankton samples are required, procedures are described in the
regional activities plan.
7.5 SEDIMENT DIATOM SAMPLE COLLECTION
Collect a single sediment diatom sample at the index site with a modified KB corer. If
a core sample cannot be collected at the index site, move to an area with a softer bottom, as
close to the index site as possible. (Often the boat can be rotated about the anchor line to
obtain a good core.) Note the approximate distance and direction in the comments section
of the Sample Collection Form (Figure 7-2). Some gravel bottom lakes will have no
sediment available to core. If a core sample cannot be collected after attempts at a total of
three sites, discontinue sediment coring for that lake. The collection goals for the diatom
sample (in order of priority) are first to obtain a sample of undisturbed surface sediments.
Second, to obtain a deeper sample (representing conditions present more than 150 years
ago) that is uncontaminated with the shallower sediments. Make an effort to get at least a
45-cm core from all lakes that have a Secchi reading of 2.5 m or less. For most other lakes
in the Northeast, a core of 35 cm in length is satisfactory. If a lake is artificial or a reservoir,
an even shorter core, if a longer core is unobtainable, is sufficient. If a sample cannot be
collected, record a "K" flag on the Sample Collection Form. Table 7-6 summarizes
operations for the modified KB corer. The procedures for collecting and sectioning core
samples are described below.
7-10
-------
TABLE 7-5. ZOOPLANKTON COLLECTION PROCEDURE
1. Use a 50-mL syringe to draw up 8 m.L of buffered formalin solution. Dispense 4 ml_ into each of
two 125-mL wide-mouth bottles. Use the same syringe to draw up 20-mL of sucrose solution.
Dispense 10 mL into each of the two bottles.
2. Record the lake ID and mesh size information (circle "fine" or "coarse") on two labels, for each
of the two 125-mL polyethylene jars; verify that 14 mL of buffered sucrose-formalin solution is
within each jar.
3. At the deepest part of the lake, lower the bongo net so that the mouths of the nets (horizontal
hoops) are -0.5 m from the bottom. NOTE: IF THE NETS TOUCH BOTTOM AND MUD
ENTERS THE NETS, COMPLETELY RINSE THE NETS AND REPEAT THE PROCEDURE.
This rinse is important. Slowly (0.5 m per sec) haul the net to the surface. If wind creates a
large horizontal drift component on a deep lake, record an "F1" flag (miscellaneous field flag),
and note the approximate horizontal distance as a comment on the Sample Collection Form. If
the lake is deeper than 50 m, the length of the tow is 50 m, the length of the chain.
4. Carefully remove the fine mesh bucket from its net. Do not remove both buckets at the same
time as they may be difficult to reattach to the correct bongo net. Set the bucket in a 500-mL
container filled three-fourths full with lake water to which an Alka Seltzer tablet has been added.
The CO2 from the Alka Seltzer narcotizes the zopplankton to relax their external structure prior
to fixation in formalin. This facilitates taxonomic identification. Wait until zooplankton movement
has stopped (usually about 1 minute).
5. Verify that the formalin-sucrose solution is in the sample bottle. Record the zooplankton bar
code number and check on the Sample Collection Form that it is preserved.
6. Rinse the contents of the fine mesh net bucket into one of the polyethylene jars (prepared in
Step 2) labeled "FINE." Rinse bucket with Dl water three to four times or until the majority of
zooplankton have been removed. Drain the remaining filtrate into the sample container. Fill the
jar of zooplankton to the mark (-80 mL or a little more than half full) with the Dl water. If more
than 80 mL of sample have been added to the bottle, add 1 to 3 mil additional sucrose-formalin
solution.3
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for the coarse mesh bucket, using the bottle labeled "COAFISE."
8. Record the length of the tows on the Sample Collection Form and on the sample labels. Verify
that all information on the labels and the form is complete and correctly recorded. Cover each
label completely with a strip of clear tape.
9. MODIFICATION FOR CLEAR, SHALLOW LAKES ONLY: If the depth at the index site is <;2 m
and the Secchi disk could be seen on the bottom, then conduct a second tow of the same
length. Combine the contents of both tows. Record "2 tows" in the Comments section of the
collection form, and write "2 tows" on each of the two sample labels.
10. Seal the lids of the jars by wrapping electrical tape in a clockwise" direction so that the lid is
pulled tight as the tape is stretched around it. Place jars in a self-sealing plastic bag.
* Note: In some cases, the volume of zooplankton collected in the fine-mesh net may exceed 125 mL Do not
try to force all the sample into a single bottle or the preservative will not function properly and the sample may
be lost. In such cases, use a second bottle to preserve the additional amount of sample. Use a blank
zooplankton label (i.e., one with no bar code printed on it). Complete the label) and print in the bar code
assigned to the first container on the label of the second container. On the Sample Collection Form, record a
"2" in the "No. Containers" field.
b If the sample collection jars being used only have 1 to 2 threads on the bottle, taping in a counterclockwise
direction may work better to prevent leakage. Both ways should be tested during training.
7-11
-------
TABLE 7-6. COLLECTION PROCEDURE FOR SEDIMENT DIATOM CORES
1 . Record the lake I D and the date on two sample labels. Mark one label for the top interval and the second for the bottom .
Attach the labels to two 1-qt self-sealing plastic bags. Record the bar code number on the collection form.
2. Determine depth at core site using appropriate means. Sonar is appropriate at depths greater than 3 m and where
vegetation does not obscure the true bottom. In some situations it may be necessary to determine depth by sounding. If
tha bottom Is disturbed during the depth determination, move at least 5 m to the side to take the core. (Often you can just
spin about or let out the anchor line.) It is critical to the success of the diatom indicator to obtain undisturbed surface
sediments.
3. Sediments may contain contaminants, and surgical gloves must be worn during sample collection.
4. Lower the corer until the bottom of the core tube is 0.5 m above the sediment surface.* While maintaining a slight tension
on the line, let the line slip through your hand, allowing the corer to settle into the bottom sediments. A greater release
height may be necessary at some sites to improve penetration and attain a sufficient length of core. If the core is less
than 35 cm long, attempt to obtain another core using a controlled free-fall technique. By relaxing the corer from a
greater height, a deeper core may be obtained. Immediately after the corer has dropped into the sediment, you must
maintain tension on the line to prevent the corer from tilting and disturbing the core sample.
5. Trip the corer by releasing the messenger weight so that it slides down the line.
6. Slowly raise the corer back to the surface, until the core tube and rubber seal are just under the water.
7. While keeping the seal under water, slowly tilt the corer until you can reach under the surface and plug the bottom of the
corer With a rubber stopper. To do this without disturbing the water-sediment interface, you cannot tilt the corer more than
45°. NOTE: This is a difficult operation and stoppers are easily lost. Be sure to have spares available at all times.
8. Raise the corer Into the boat in a vertical position. Stand the corer in a large tub to prevent contaminating the boat with
sediment material.
9. Detach the core tube from the corer.
10. Remove the water above the sediment core by using a siphon tube with a bent plastic tip so that the surface sediments
are not disturbed.
Measure the length of the core to the nearest 0.1 cm and record the interval on the Sample Collection Form and on the
two sample labels.
Slowly extrude the sample. To do this, position the extruder under the stopper at the base of the coring tube. Supporting
both the core tube and the extruder in a vertical position, slowly lower the coring tube until the sediment is approximately
1 cm below the top of the tube. Place the Plexiglas sectioning apparatus (marked with a line 1 cm from the bottom) on
the stage directly over the coring tube. Slowly lower the tube and attached sectioning apparatus until the top of the
sediment reaches the 1-cm line on the sectioning tube. Slide the top 1 cm section of sediment into the plastic bag labeled
for the top interval. Record this interval on the Sample Collection Form and on the sample label for the top core.
Before collecting the bottom section, remove the sectioning apparatus and rinse in lake water. This procedure prevents
contamination of the bottom sediment layer with diatoms from the upper portion of the core. This step is critical as a small
amount of sediment contains millions of diatoms which would destroy the population structure needed to compare
environmental conditions depicted by top and bottom core samples.
14. Continue extruding the sample, discarding the central portion in the tube, until the bottom of the stopper is
approximately 5 cm (3 inches) from the top of the coring tube. Affix the sectioning apparatus to the top of the tube.
Extrude the sample until the bottom of the stopper reaches the lower black line at the top of the tube (approximately
i.r m m top *ne tube)- Section the extruded sediment and discard. Rinse the sectioning tube with lake water.
Without removing the sectioning apparatus from the coring tube, slightly tilt the tube and wash the sectioning stage with
a small amount of water from a squirt bottle. Make sure the rinse water runs off the stage and not into the coring tube
with sediment. Lower the tube until the top of the sediment is at the 1 -cm mark on the sectioning tube. Collect the 1 -cm
section of core material in the second 1 -quart self-sealing plastic bag labeled for the bottom interval. Record this interval
on the Sample Collection Form and on the sample label for the bottom core.
15. Cover the labels on each bag completely with clear tape. Place the bags in a small plastic box, seal with the lid, and
place in a cooler with bags of ice.
1 6. Rinse the corer, collection apparatus, and sectioning apparatus thoroughly with lake water. Rinse with tap water at the
base site.
11.
12.
13.
j.0,; 9iffe.rent'ak.e8 will present different problems. Try to get cores from all lakes. If it is impossible to obtain a core, make
delayed notes of the situation with as many suggestions as possible. Shallow, vegetation-filled lakes may present the most
prooiems. Field crews should be innovative within time constraints to resolve coring problems and document the methods
used. In very hard bottoms, it is sometimes necessary to drop the corer from several meters above the bottom in order to
retrieve any core. Even so, concentrate on a perpendicular drop and try to minimize the disturbance to the stratigraphic
7-12
-------
After anchoring the boat, insert the core tube into the sampling apparatus and tighten
the hose clamp screws to secure the core tube within the sampler housing apparatus.
Attach the messenger to the sampler line and slowly lower the sampler to the lake bottom so
that it contacts the sediments from a vertical position with as little disturbance to the bottom
as possible. Maintain some tension on the sampler line to keep the sampler vertical while
deploying the messenger. Activate the sampler by sending the messenger down the line to
trip the closing mechanism. Slowly raise the sampler. When it is near the surface, reach
under the surface and insert a rubber stopper into the bottom of the core tube. Be sure to
seal the tube while the tube is still submerged in water. Bring the sampler into the boat and
place it in a vertical position in a large tub to prevent contaminating the boat with sediments.
Remove the plexiglas core tube from the sampler. One person should hold the sampler in a
vertical position while the second person dismantles the unit. Retain the sample only if it is
intact, undisturbed, and essentially free of aquatic plants and debris. A desirable core length
is at least 35 to 45 cm; retain cores of shorter length if that is all that can be obtained with the
best sampling effort. Measure and record the length of core collected and the core intervals
sampled on the Sample Collection Form.
The core tube and sectioning apparatus are illustrated in Figure 7-4. Insert the core
extruder through the lower end of the core tube and extrude the sample by forcing the rubber
stopper down against the extruder. Carefully remove water overlaying the core with a
siphon. Extrude the core slowly until the top of the core is level with the 1-cm mark on the
sectioning tube. Carefully slide the sectioning tube containing the top 1 cm of core across
the stage and into an appropriately labeled self-sealing plastic bag. Continue extruding the
core, discarding the middle portion into the lake, until the bottom of the stopper is 5 cm from
the top of the core tube (Figure 7-4). Thoroughly rinse the sectioning apparatus with lake
water. Extrude a second 1 -cm section of the core beginning 3 cm from the very bottom of
the core in the sectioning tube. Place the bottom core sample in an appropriately labeled
self-sealing plastic bag.
After collecting the two samples (top and bottom) and dispensing into 1 -quart self-
sealing plastic bags, check the labels to assure that all written information is completed and
legible. Place a strip of clear packing tape over each label, covering the labels completely.
Record the bar code for each sample on the Sample Collection Form. Place the sample
bags in a plastic box with a lid (e.g., Tupperware®) for protection.
7.6 EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLY LIST
Checklists of equipment and supplies required to conduct protocols described in this
section are provided in Figure 7-5. These checklists are organized according to storage
containers (e.g., coolers and tubs) used for transportation of equipment and supplies
7-13
-------
SECTIONING
APPARATUS
SECTIONING
TUBE
Additional marks
at 1-cm intervals
(not used)
STAGE
(0.5 cm thick)
Length of benthic sample
section (13 cm) .
Mark for diatom section
sample (surface interval)
(1 cm from bottom of tube)
CORE TUBE—*
(Length = 60 cm)
STOPPER
(2.5 cm thick)
CORE EXTRUDER
"H . V* /*~"
Not used (if present)
Mark for beginning of
diatom section sample
(bottom interval)
(5 cm from top of tube)
Figure 7-4. Sediment coring tube and sectioning apparatus.
7-14
-------
LAKE-VISIT CHECKLISTS
Items hi Forms File
Lake Verification Form (completed)
Sample Collection Form
Number Needed
Each Lake
1
2
Items In 64-qt Cooler #1
Sonar with manual
Transducer with bracket and C-clamp
1 2-V wet cell battery (charged) in battery case
"Pigtail" connector
GPS unit with manual, reference card, extra battery
pack
Items in 64-qt Cooler #2
Corer with 50-m line and messenger
Core tubes
Ground rubber stoppers
Extruder pipe
Sectioning tube
Sectioning stage
Siphon with L fitting
Sealable plastic box with lid, with two 1 -qt self-sealing
plastic bags
Surgical gloves
Grey tub
Number Needed
Each Lake
1
1
1
1
1
Number Needed
Each Lake
1 '
2
4
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
Items In 30-qt Copier #1
(Limnology shipping)
Sealable plastic box with lid
Syringes, labeled
Syringe valves
Surgical gloves, pair
Cubltainer, 4-L
Ice in 1-gal self-sealing plastic bags
Cooler liner (30-gal garbage bap)
Number Needed
Each Lake
1
4
4
2
2
6
1
Figure 7-5. Water and sediment sampling checklist (page 1).
7-15
-------
Items in Tub #1
Van Dom with 3-m line, messenger
1-L wash bottle (labeled) with distilled or deionized water (Dl)
Sounding chain, 50-m with quick-clip
Parts tackle box
Chlorophyll tackle box:
Filter apparatus with filter installed
Hand pump with tubing
Box of filters (Whatman GFF) in self-sealing plastic bag
Forceps in bag with filters
Graduated cylinder, 100-mL'
Graduated cylinder, 250-mL
1 0-cm squares of foil in self-sealing plastic bag
Zooplankton net bag:
Bongo net
Fine mesh bucket
Coarse mesh bucket
Sample jars, 125-mL Nalgene (with 14 ml of sucrose-
formalin solution)
Narcotization chamber
Alka Seltzer tablets
60 mL Syringe (to use with formalin and sucrose solutions)
Empty 125-mL Nalgene bottle
Number Needed
Each Lake
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
2
1
10
1
2
Figure 7-5. Water and sediment sampling checklist (page 2).
7-16
-------
between lakes or for shipping samples. They differ somewhat in organization and
number of items listed from the checklists in Appendix B, which are used at a base
site to ensure that all equipment and supplies are brought to and are available at
the lake. The field teams are required to use the checklists presented in this
section to ensure that the equipment and supplies are organized and available on
the boat to conduct the protocols efficiently.
7-17
-------
-------
SECTIONS
BENTH1C INVERTEBRATE SAMPLING
by
Wesley L Kinney, R. O. Brinkhurst, Thomas R. Whittier, and David V. Peck
There are two separate activities for benthic invertebrate sampling. The first is a
quantitative sampling of sublittoral sediments for all benthic invertebrate organisms using the
sediment coring device (Figure 7-3), These procedures are detailed in sections 8.1 and 8.2.
The second is a qualitative survey for the presence of zebra mussels (Dreissena sp.). These
procedures are described in Section 8.3.
Benthos sampling is restricted to the sublittoral zones of lakes. Wherever possible,
collect samples in weed-free areas. Take single core samples in the soft sediments at 10
sampling sites located at or near the 10 physical habitat stations established for physical habitat
characterizations (Section 5). Very rigid quality assurance practices must be observed in the
field. Prior to launching the boat, ensure that all sample containers and forms are filled out for
lake ID, date, and sample type where required. Criteria for accepting or rejecting a sample are
specified in the following procedures. Every attempt should be made to obtain the full number of
cores. To ensure completeness, one individual completes the field forms and another checks to
verify that all pertinent information is included. Activities described in this section are
summarized in Figure 8-1. Activities associated with collecting replicate benthos samples (if
required) are described in the regional activities plan.
8.1 SITE SELECTION AND SAMPLE COLLECTION
The process for locating the site and collecting benthic samples is described in the
following section and is summarized in Table 8-1; The actual site location for benthic sampling
is determined from the vertical distribution (depth profile) of temperature and dissolved oxygen
(DO). In thermally stratified lakes, samples are taken in well-oxygenated areas (where DO is
greater than 5 mg/L and at sites where the upper limits of the metalimnion meet the lake bottom)
or within the metalimnion where dissolved oxygen concentration still exceeds 5 mg/L. The
dissolved oxygen value of 5 mg/L is operationally defined and is intended to ensure that samples
are collected from the sublittoral zone rather than from locations that might be more
characteristic of the profundal zone. The depth of the top of the metalimnion will generally vary
between 3 and 5 m depending upon such factors as time of year, lake depth, lake shape, and
-------
Is lake
thermally stratified
based on lake profile
measurements?
DETERMINE TARGET
SAMPLING DEPTH
On Lake Profile Form check
for shallower of:
Depth of top of metalimnon
DETERMINE TARGET
SAMPLING DEPTH
On Lake Profile Form check for:
PROCEED TO P-HAB STATION
• Depth >1 m and <5 m
Depth at which dissolved
O, is >5 mg/L
Depth at which dissolved
O, is >5 mg/L
s site with
appropriate depth
available at or
near station?
MOVE OFFSHORE OF STATION
TO LOCATE SUITABLE DEPTH
• Do not go farther than midpoint
of lake
Has
middle of
lake been reach
before finding
suitable site?
STOP AT
MIDPOINT
OF LAKE
Is
vegetation
absent from
site?
MOVE AROUND SITE TO LOCATE
VEGETATION-FREE AREA OF
SUITABLE DEPTH
• Target depth or shallower
(but not <1 m)
ATTEMPT TO COLLECT
CORE SAMPLE
Move 1 boat length from
site if necessary to find
suitable substrate
Can
vegetation-
free area be
located?
Four attempts maximum
Flag as
"Sample not
collected" on
Collection Form
and explain in
comments
Flag as
"Sample not
collected" on
Collection Form
and explain in
comments
Can a
sample be
collected?
Is
sample
acceptable?
>13cm in length
Free of vegetation
Core well-defined
and reasonably
intact
LABEL AND
RETAIN SAMPLE
Note site on Map
Form
Complete Collection
Form
COLLECT BEST
POSSIBLE SAMPLE
Flag as "Suspect sample
and describe condition
Collection Form
FUJOPOOiWT
Figure 8-1. Benthic invertebrate sampling activities summary.
8-2
-------
TABLE 8-1. COLLECTION PROTOCOL FOR BENTHIC SAMPLING
1. Note the target depth at which the top of the metalimnion was observed during lake profile activities
and record on Side 1 of the Benthos Sample Location and Collection Form (benthos collection form).
2. Proceed to the physical habitat station, record the start time on Side 2, and find a suitable location
(well-oxygenated [DO > 5.0 mg/L]) at or near a physical habitat observation point:
a. where the upper limits of the metalimnion meet the lake bottom, or
b. near the physical habitat station in a shallow area of the lake where the depth is greater than 1 m
and there are very few or no weeds. Try to ensure that 10 cores are obtained from widely
separated points if the physical habitat sites are located over sediment that is hard to sample.
3. Note this location on the map on Side 1 of the benthos collection form and record any pertinent
comments.
4. Collect a core sample.
5. Determine if the core is acceptable. Discard and resample the core if:
a. the sampler malfunctions and the core is <13 cm long,
b. the core contains a large amount of aquatic vegetation, or
c. the core is disturbed (the sediments are stirred up).
6. Obtain a 13-cm long sample from the top of the core using the extruder and sectioning apparatus.
Slide the sample into a 1-gal heavy-duty self-sealing plastic freezer bag. Seal the bag and write the
station ID and the core length on the bag with a permanent marker. Rinse the remaining sample from
the sectioning apparatus using a wash bottle containing lake water.
7. Remove the ribbon marking the physical habitat station and move to the next station. Record the
. depth collected and substrate type on the benthos collection form.
8-3
-------
exposure to wind. Some shallow lakes may be completely mixed from top to bottom. In shallow
basins of stratified lakes or in unstratified lakes, collect the samples in weedless areas at or near
the physical habitat station where the depth is greater than 1 m.
To locate the upper depth of the metalimnion (see Figure 5-1), refer to the Lake Profile
Form (Figure 8-2) which was filled out the previous day. The top of the metalimnion should be
noted on this form (if not, refer to Section 5 for directions on determining this depth). On the
map portion of the benthos collection form (Benthos Sample Location and Collection Form, Side
1, Figure 8-3), record the depth of the top of the metalimnion (or the deepest depth where DO is
greater than 5.0 mg/L, whichever is shallower). Use this depth as a target sampling depth at
each of the 10 physical habitat stations. Follow the process identified in Figure 8-4 for locating a
suitable sampling site at each station. Use the sonar to locate a suitable sampling site at or near
a physical habitat station. Mark the location of each sampling site on the sketch map on Side 1
of the benthos collection form (Figure 8-3). Identify the site on the map with a circled letter
corresponding to the nearest physical habitat station.
After the sampling site has been identified, anchor the boat. Wear surgical gloves during
the collection process. At the first station, record the "START" time on Side 2 of the benthos
collection form (Figure 8-5). Insert the core tube into the sampling apparatus and tighten the
hose clamp screws to secure the core tube. Attach the messenger to the sampler line and
slowly lower the sampler to the lake bottom so that it contacts the sediments in a vertical position
with as little disturbance to the bottom as possible. Maintain some tension on the line to keep
the sampler vertical while deploying the messenger. Activate the sampler by sending the
messenger down the line, tripping the closing mechanism. Slowly retrieve the sampler to just
below the surface. While the sampler tube is still submerged in water, insert a rubber stopper
into the bottom of the core tube. Retrieve the sampler into the boat and place it in a vertical
position in a large tub to prevent contamination of the boat with sediment. Remove the Plexiglas
core tube from the sampler. Have one person hold the sampler in a vertical position while
another person dismantles the unit. Examine the sediment sample within the core tube. Retain
only undisturbed, intact samples that are essentially free of aquatic plants and debris. An
acceptable sample is one that contains fine sediments that fill the core to a depth of at least 13
cm and has an undisturbed surface layer. Unacceptable samples (which are discarded) include
cores less than 13 cm in length due to improper functioning of the sampler or due to unsuitable
substrate material. It may not be possible to obtain "acceptable" samples at all sites. In such
cases, retain the best sample obtainable, record a "U" (suspect sample) on Side 2 of the
benthos collection form (Figure 8-5), and explain the flag in the comments section.
8-4
-------
LAKE PROFILE FORM
LAKE NAME: L ." tJOfRffUS DATE OF PROFILE: 7/ H 1 ?V VISITS: (?) 2
LAKE ID: /V* V O _£LjQ_L SITE ID (circle): ^NOEXJ OTHER:
TEAM ID (circle): 1 (2) 3456789 10 OTHER:
PRECIPITATION (circle): (]NONE) LIGHT HEAVY
SURFACE CONDITIONS (circle): FLAT CRIPPLES^ CHOPPY WHITECAPS
ODOR? XNO D YES Description:
SCUM? ^No Q YES Description:
INDEX SITE DEPTH: Z. _2. . -2.
M CHECK (/) IF SONAR NOT USED: D
FLAG: COMMENTS:
DISSOLVED OXYGEN & TEMPERATURE PROFILE
(Depth of Measurement* [m]: Surface, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, and 50 m),
Also Include readings at 1 m above bottom.
DEPTH (m)
XX.X
SURFACE
/.r
1.0
3.0
H.O
f.O
4.0
7>&
f.O
fO.O
SURFACE (Dup.)
(mg/L)
XX.X
*.*
$.*
$.f
S?.B»
8.9
1.0
5-7
H.v
,*/,?
HM
?•?
TEMP.
XX.X
Zl.l
AI.O
21.0
21.0
11.0
/*.?
IS". 6
IH.*-
/3^_
j$a
IJL.f
&I.I
FLAG
META.
UMNIOji
T
S
DEPTH (m)
XX.X
ILO
n. a
K.O
IH.O
IfO
,70
16. 0
tn.o
(mtr/L)
XX.X
ly.jL
3.V
3.7
3.V
/•*?
3.
-------
BENTHOS SAMPLE LOCATION AND COLLECTION FORM-LAKES
LAKE NAME: A.
DATE OF COLLECTION: 7 / V/9V VISIT*; (T) 2
LAKE ID: // V Q 6 Q L TEAM ID (clrcte); i (2) 3 4 s e 7 B 9 16 OTHER;.
OUTUNE MAP OF LAKE (WITH PHYSICAL HABITAT STATIONS IDENTIFIED)
IHOCATH.QCjgiO»t» WHIM MHTHC COM SMIHJiARECOUieTiD WITH THtUTTEH Of TH1N1ABE3TPHY1ICM. H*BITAT3lTE(A • J).
Annow MOCATIS NORTH.
REcono TH« S HALLOWER or Tw rouowMQ oams («KW Uxi PROFU FOBM)
A)TH»D€FTHWTDPOfHETAUMNION OR
B) THE DttPIST DEPTH AT WHICH DtSSOtVED OXYG£N k 5 MG/L
TARGET DEPTH
_H_M
text
COMMENTS;
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rev. 3/85 FLDFBMS.B5
Bantha* Swnpl* Laotian ind Collection Form • Ukos • 1
Figure 8-3. Benthos Sample Location and Collection Form, Side 1.
8-6
-------
ASSEMBLE EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
(2 Parsons)
Record target depth of metalimnion or depth
where dissolved O2 is > 5 mg/L on field form
LOCATE PHYSICAL HABITAT STATION
Record START time on field form (first site only)
Determine suitable sampling site based on depth, dissolved O2, and absence of vegetation
Mark location on field form map
COLLECT CORE SAMPLE
Ensure acceptable length and composition
Collect second core sample (if required)
YES
PROCESS SAMPLE (BOAT)
Process sample through sieve bucket
Transfer residue into sample container
Pour off excess water using mesh lid
Complete sample label and field form
HOLD FOR SHORE PROCESSING
• Place in labeled self-sealing
plastic bags
• Store in cooler
CONDUCT ZEBRA MUSSEL SURVEY
Examine site for presence of mussels
Collect and preserve specimens if possible
Remove surveyor tape from physical habitat station
SHORE
PROCESS SAMPLE (SHORE)
(If not done in boat)
Filter lakewater through sieve bucket for use
in sample processing
Process sample through sieve bucket
Transfer residue into sample container
Pour off excess water using mesh lid
Complete sample label and field form
Proceed
to Next Site or
to Shore
NEXT SITE
PRESERVE SAMPLES
Add carbonate-buffered formalin
Seal containers with tape
Cover labels with clear tape
Bag and store in cooler
Record END TIME on field form
CLEAN EQUIPMENT AND PACK FOR TRANSPORT
Check samples, labels, and forms for completeness and legibility
FIDOPEX95PPT
Figure 8-4. Process for selecting benthic sample sites.
8-7
-------
BENTHOS SAMPLE LOCATION AND COLLECTION FORM (CONTINUED) VISIT*: (T) 2
LAKEffl!£L£jej2JiL
R
SAMPLE ID* (Barcode)
3 O ZLG> 0 ±_
3 o a o & x
3 O *L O 0 3
3-&A.0 e_±L
_i_o a^^jc,^
J5_fi_A_ &_J2_4
ECORD SAMPUNQ START TIME:
STATION
ID
A
B
C
D
E
F
Q
H
1
J
DEPTH
COLLECTED
S'.S' M
M
£. 2. "
5" ^ M
M
s.r M
M
M
r.i'" M
t.O M
M
M
M
M
M
7V: 3(0
SUBSTRATE
TYPE*
C
n
^5
C
g.
o
DATE OF COLLECTION: 7/ *f Iff
RECORD PROCESSHQ COMPLETION TIUI: /? :£>O
FLAG"
x
^
t/
«
p
COMMENTS
A/o 5*mftrG>t.Ljeei*!*~R»t*v RUTM
*
A'* S»mpteCoujnrvt>-T»a Ufnr»y
3ttrSJtJ1M.ll Os!tttMf+ MU M VfA
S&tvtK. Barn**
CoHf AW
COLUCTtO(Y/N)
A/
A/
A/
V
A/
A/
A/
V
A/
^
y
A/
COMMENTS
7>»fstvr fmi A*U j/fMA«f avneuts to «uu. £*mtL£.
REVIEWED BY (IH
B»v, 3/95 FLDFRMS.95
{INITM1.):JM^L_
BanttuM Sample Location and Collection Form - Lake* • 2
Figure 8-5. Benthos Sample Location and Collection Form, Side 2.
8-8
-------
Insert the core extruder through the lower end of the core tube and extrude the sample
by forcing the rubber stopper down against the extruder. Water overlaying the core does not
need to be removed by a siphon as described for sediment diatom collection in Section 7. Place
screen top lid over the core tube and extrude the water overlaying the core. Remove the lid and
place the stage and sectioning tube on the core tube. Slowly extrude the core until the top of the
core is level with the top of the sectioning tube (-13 cm; see Figure 7^3). Carefully slide the
sectioning tube containing the top 1.3 cm of core into an appropriately labeled 1-gal heavy-duty,
self-sealing plastic freezer bag. Use a wash bottle containing lake water to rinse the sample
from the storage and sectioning tube into the bag. Store bags in a cooler until processing.
Discard the remainder of the core by extruding it into the lake. Thoroughly rinse the
extruding apparatus, core tube, and sectioning apparatus with lake water. Record the dominant
substrate type (gravel; sand; silt, clay or muck; woody debris; or other, to be described in the
comments section) of the core on Side 2 of the benthos collection form (Figure 8-5). Also record
the actual depth from which the sample was collected. If no sample can be collected from a site,
enter a "K" flag (for missing sample) on the benthos collection form, and explain in the
comments section why no sample was collected. Remove the ribbon marking the physical
habitat station and move to the next station.
8.2 SAMPLE PROCESSING
Sample processing activities are summarized in Table 8-2. At the option of the field
crew, the sample may be processed at the collection site while the boat is still anchored in
position or it may be taken to shore for further processing. An advantage of processing the
sample at the collection site is that there is no need to filter rinse water as the likelihood of
introducing benthic organisms into the sample from open lake water is negligible. Water
obtained near shore may contain benthic animals dislodged from weeds or shallow, disturbed
substrata and must be filtered through the number 60-mesh screen bottom bucket prior to
rinsing the sample. Thoroughly rinse the screen bottom bucket before processing samples.
Transfer the 13-cm portion of core retained for processing from the 1-gal self-sealing bag
to a plastic bucket with a number 60-mesh screen bottom. Rinse all material adhering to the
sides and bottom of the 1 -gal self-sealing bag into the screen bottom bucket with lake water (or
filtered lake water). Tap the screen bottom bucket on the surface of the lake to force water
through the screen bottom. Continue this process until the fine sediments are rinsed through the
screen. Samples are adequately screened when water draining through the screen becomes
clear and no "sediment cloud" is visible around the bottom of the bucket. .When agitating the
bucket in the lake, it is very important that the bucket not be submersed to prevent losing some
organisms in the sample over the top of the bucket. If the bucket is submersed, discard the
8-9
-------
TABLE 8-2. PROCESSING BENTHIC SAMPLE
1. For each station sample, complete a sample labei with lake ID, date, and station ID and attach it to a
500-mL bottle. Cover the label completely with clear tape. Copy the sample bar code number from
the label onto the benthos collection form. Also record the "depth collected" and the "substrate type"
on the form. For stations where no sample is collected, enter a K in the flag field and explain it in the
comments section.
2. Processing - Do in boat or on shore. If performed on shore, all lake water used must first be
filtered through No. 60 mesh screen bottom bucket. Transfer sample from collection bucket into
60-mesh sieve bucket. Rinse 1-gal self-sealing bag into sieve bucket with lake water.
3. Tap the screen bottom bucket repeatedly on the lake water surface to force water through the screen
bottom until the water draining through the screen is clear. If the sieve bucket becomes totally
submerged, the sample is no longer acceptable because organisms may have been lost.
4. Place the sieve bucket containing the sample over a bucket or pan. Concentrate residue in the sieve
bucket in one area. Transfer the residue in the sieve bucket into a 500-mL bottle by hand.
5. Rinse the remaining residue into the container using a plastic funnel, using small amounts of lake
water.
6. Attach a lid with 60-mesh screening to the container and pour out the excess water. Rinse the
residue on the lid back into the container with water from the rinse bottle. Add the filtered water to
bring the total volume (residue plus water) to about 400 mL. Complete the information on the benthos
collection form before leaving the site.
7. On shore, fill a plastic syringe with 50 ml of 100 percent carbonate buffered (pH 10) formalin solution.
Be sure to use formalin of pH 10. The formalin used for the fish samples is pH 7.6 to 7.8 and will
dissolve the chitinous exoskeletons and mollusk shells in the sample. Add the pH 10 formalin to the
sample bottle. Cap the container tightly. Seal the container by taping the cap clockwise' with plastic
tape.
8. Place all of the sample bottles into a 30-gallon clear or white plastic bag and seal with tape or wire
ties. Write the Lake ID number on the bag with a permanent marker and place in a cooler for
transport.
If the sample containers have only 1 to 2 threads on the neck, applying the tape in a counterclockwise
direction may be better protection against leakage. This should be tested during training to determine
the best procedure for taping containers.
8-10
-------
sample and collect a new sample. Also, do not mix the sample by hand or with a spatula to
speed the sieving process. This practice destroys the small and fragile organisms,
Complete a sample label with the Lake ID, date, and site ID and circle the type of sample
(CORE). Attach the label to a 500-mL bottle. Check the labels to ensure that all written
information is complete and legible. Place a strip of clear packing tape over the label and bar
code, covering the label completely. While holding the labeled sample container over another
bucket or tub, transfer the residue from the screen bottom bucket, catching any residue that falls
outside the Sample container in the second container. The objective is to capture all the residue
in the sample container while introducing as little water as possible. Tilt the screen bottom
bucket during the final stages of sieving to concentrate the residue into a small area on the
bottom of the bucket. Transfer the bulk of this material by hand into the sample container.
Rinse the remaining residue in the bucket into the sample container through a plastic funnel
using a lake water rinse (filtered through number 60 mesh) contained in a 1,000-mL plastic rinse
bottle fitted with a rinse spout. Fit a screen top lid (number 60 mesh) onto the sample container
and drain off the excess water in the sample container. Gently rinse the residue retained on the
screen top lid back into the sample container with small amounts of lake water in the rinse bottle.
Add filtered lake water from the rinse bottle to bring the volume in the sample container to 400
mL. Use a marked bottle as a guide. Record the bar code printed on the label on Side 2 of the
benthos collection form (Figure 8-5).
Record a "U" flag (for suspect sample) and provide comments on the benthos collection
form if:
a. there are any problems in collecting the sample,
b. conditions occur that may affect sample integrity, or ,
c. a nonstandard procedure was used to collect a sample.
If there are other observations of note about a sample that do not render it suspect, use a
miscellaneous flag (Fn).
After all 10 sites are sampled, return to shore and add 40 to 50 mL of carbonate-buffered
formalin to each container to prepare a 10-percent formalin solution. Cap the containers tightly
and wrap electrical tape clockwise around each cap to seal it for transport. Invert and shake
bottles to mix the formalin throughout the sample. Record the time sample processing ended on
Side 2 of the benthos collection form (Figure 8-5),
8-11
-------
8.3 QUALITATIVE ZEBRA MUSSEL SURVEY
In the late 1980s at least one species of exotic freshwater mussels (Unionidae:
Drelssena sp., known as zebra mussels) became established in the Great Lakes. Since 1990
they have been spreading into other inland surface waters (Ludyanskiy et al. 1993). EMAP is in
a position to be able to monitor the rate and extent of zebra mussel invasion into inland lakes
(Whittier at al., in press). At this time, the goal is only to detect and document their presence in
a lake, not to do quantitative in-lake assessments of abundance. Currently, zebra mussels are
not widespread in inland lakes, having been found in a few large lakes and in large rivers. In
addition, the zebra mussel appears to require moderately hard water to reproduce successfully.
The general procedure is to actively look for zebra mussels at each of the 10 physical
habitat stations, the benthos sampling sites, and at the launch site. Observations of mussels at
any other location should also be recorded. If any mussels are observed, example specimens
should be collected if possible, and preserved for species verification. Samples need to be
collected from only 2 or 3 locations if they are widespread in a lake. Observations and
collections may be made during the physical habitat assessment (Section 5) or in conjunction
with quantitative benthos sampling. Observations and collection at any other time are also valid.
Record any data related to zebra mussels on Side 2 of the benthos collection form (Figure 8-5).
8.3.1 Species Characteristics and Probable Habitat
The zebra mussel (Figure 8-6) is a small bivalve (the adults are generally 25 to 30 mm in
length) that normally attaches firmly and permanently to solid substrates, in the manner of
saltwater mussels. However, there are new reports (only in the Great Lakes so far) of a second
zebra mussel species ("quagga" mussel) that will colonize soft substrates. Once established,
they usually form large clusters (i.e., you are unlikely to find one lone mussel) on rocks, buoys,
pier pilings, woody debris, trash, native freshwater mussels, and each other. In lakes they tend
not to survive in locations subject to ice scour or heavy wave action, on soft substrates like sand
or mud, or In areas of bright light. They tend to become abundant in water greater than 1 m
deep.
8.3.2 Collection and Data Recording
Table 8-3 gives the procedures for the zebra mussel survey. At each physical habitat
station, each benthic sampling site, and at the launch site of each lake, make a brief visual
search of hard substrates for zebra mussels. Conduct observations in water greater than 1 m
deep if possible.
8-12
-------
Adult total length: 25 to 30 mm
B
Scale: 1 cm = approx. 20 mm
Figure 8-6. Zebra mussel (Dreissena polymorpha). A. Single zebra mussel showing byssal
threads (Credit: Carol Allaire); B. Cluster of zebra mussels on a rock (Credit: Margaret Van
Bolt). (Illustrations provided by the Michigan Sea Grant Program.)
8-13
-------
TABLE 8-3. QUALITATIVE ZEBRA MUSSEL SURVEY
1. At each physical habitat station and benthos sampling site, search for likely locations for zebra
mussels based on the following guidelines:
a. Depths >1 m (not subject to ice scour or heavy wave action).
b. Harder bottom substrates (although some forms may colonize soft substrates).
c. Possible attachment sites (e.g., rocks, buoys, peer and dock pilings, woody debris, trash, and
native freshwater mussels).
2. Use the viewing box to aid in underwater observations of substrate and potential attachment sites.
3. If no mussels are observed, enter an "N" in the "OBSERVED" box on Side 2 of the benthos collection
form. Diagnostic features of zebra mussels include:
• thin shells,
• adults approximately 25 to 30 mm (1 inch) long,
• dark color, with characteristic "zebra" striping, and
• clusters attached on solid substrates.
4. If mussels are observed (even if they are not believed to be zebra mussels), enter a "Y" in the
"OBSERVED" box on Side 2 of the benthos collection form. Make a reasonable effort to collect a
sample. Use a knife to slice the attachment threads and gently pull or pry one or two individuals from
the substrate. Take care to avoid breaking the knife blade. If possible, collect a cluster of mussels
that are attached to a small object (e.g., a rock or shell).
If mussels are observed but are not collectable at the physical habitat stations, benthos sampling
sites, or launch site, enter an "N" in the "COLLECTED" box. Attempt to collect them from another
location in the lake. Record the locations as comments for the nearest physical habitat station. If this
is possible, enter a "Y" in the "COLLECTED" box.
If mussels are widespread in a lake, collect specimens from only two or three sites.
5. Place specimens in a self-sealing plastic bag with some lake water until they can be transported to
the launch site.
6. Preserve specimens in 10 percent carbonate-buffered formalin, using an extra benthic sample
container. Prepare a label from a blank sheet of paper (100 percent rag content or water resistant, if
possible) with the following information:
• Lake ID
• Visit
• Nearest physical habitat station
• Identify as "Zebra mussel sample"
Attach the label to the container with clear tape that covers the label completely. Seal the container
and prepare it for transport using the same techniques as those used for benthic samples.
7. Ship zebra mussel samples with the fish voucher samples, unless otherwise directed by the
Communications Center.
8-14
-------
If you observe mussels, make a reasonable effort to collect a sample. Native North
American freshwater lake bivalves are usually found on soft substrates and are mobile. The
regional museums are interested in freshwater mollusks in general, so collect examples of other
bivalves and gastropods, if possible. Diving or swimming is not required to obtain such a
sample. A better alternative is to collect a cluster of mussels attached to a small object (e.g., a
small rock or another mollusk shell). If zebra mussels are widespread, collect samples from
only two or three locations. If mussels are present in the lake but are not collectable at any of
the designated sites, try to get a sample from some other location. The object is to detect and
document their presence in a lake. Place the collected mussels in a self-sealing plastic bag for
later preservation in formalin. Preserve and label mussel samples along with other nonfish
specimens collected (one or two containers per lake); see the regional activities plan for any
additional guidance. Preserve mollusks in the carbonate-buffered formalin used for benthic-
invertebrates (the alkaline pH will minimize breakdown of the shell and associated diagnostic
features).
Use the comments section of the benthos collection form to explain why mussels were
seen but not collected, as well as to add comments on observations such as substrate or
numbers of mussels.
8.4 EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLY LIST
A checklist of equipment and supplies required to conduct the protocols described in this
section is provided in Figure 8-7. The field teams are required to use the checklist presented in
this section to ensure that equipment and supplies are organized and available on the boat in
order to conduct the protocols efficiently.
8.5 REFERENCES
Ludyanskiy, M. L, D. McDonald, and D. MacNeill. 1993. Impact of the zebra mussel, a bivalve
invader. Bioscience 43:533-544.
Whittier, T. R., A. T. Herlihy, and S. M. Pierson. 1995. Regional susceptibility of Northeast
lakes to zebra mussel invasion. Fisheries 20:20-27.
8-15
-------
EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLY CHECKLIST FOR BENTHOS SAMPLING
Completed Lake Profile Form
Benthic Sample Collection Form with preprinted lake outline (from
dossier)
Field Operations Manual
Quick Reference Handbook
Sediment core tube
Sectioning stage
Sectioning tube
Plastic funnel
Sieve bucket
Rinse bottle, 500-mL
Screen top lid (No. 60 mesh) for sample containers
Sample containers, 500-mL (marked at 400-mL)
Heavy-duty self-sealing plastic bags, 1 -gallon, labeled with station ID
Large plastic tub
Plastic electrical tape
Permanent markers
Garbage bags, large kitchen size (for storing sample containers)
Cooler
Benthic sample labels with bar codes
Benthic sample labels without bar codes (for extra containers)
Clear tape strips
60-cc plastic syringe for dispensing formalin
Carbonate-buffered formalin solution (sodium bicarbonate)
Surgical gloves
Parts kit
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
10
1
1 roll
2-3
2
1
1 sheet
1 sheet
1 pkg.
1
500 mL
2 pair
1
Figure 8-7. Benthic invertebrate sampling checklist.
8-16
-------
SECTION 9
FINAL LAKE ACTIVITIES
by
Alan T. Herlihy
Prior to leaving the lake, the field team makes a general assessment of the lake and
makes a final check of the data forms and samples. The objective of the lake assessment is to
record field team observations of catchment and lake characteristics that are useful for future
data interpretation, ecological value assessment, development of associations, and verification
of stressor data. The observations and impressions of field teams are extremely valuable. The
objective of the second check of data forms and samples is to assure completeness of all
sampling activities. Activities described in this section are summarized in Figure 9-1.
9.1 GENERAL LAKE ASSESSMENT
The team members complete the Lake Assessment Form (figures 9-2 and 9-3) at the
end of lake sampling, recording all observations from the lake that were noted during the course
of the visit. This Lake Assessment Form is designed as a template for recording pertinent field
observations. It is by no means comprehensive and any additional observations should be
recorded in the comments section. The form consists of five major sections: Lake Site Activities
and Disturbances, General Lake Information, Shoreline Characteristics, Qualitative Macrophyte
Survey, and Qualitative Assessment of Environmental Values.
9.1.1 Lake Site Activities and Disturbances
Record any of the stressors listed in Table 9-1 on the Lake Assessment Form, Side 1
(Figure 9-2), that were observed while on the lake, while driving or walking through the lake
catchment, or while flying over the lake and catchment. For activities and stressors that you
observe, rate their abundance or influence as low, moderate, or heavy by putting an L, M, or H
on the line next to the listed stressor. Leave the line blank for any stressor not observed. The
distinction between low, moderate, and heavy will be subjective. For example, if there are two to
three houses on a lake, mark the "Houses" line with an "L" for low. If the lake is ringed with
houses, rate it as heavy (H). Similarly, a small patch of clear-cut logging on a hill overlooking the
lake would rate a low ranking. Logging activity right on the lake shore, however, would get a
heavy disturbance ranking. The section for "Lake Site Activities and Disturbances Observed"
includes residential, recreational, agricultural, industrial, and lake management categories.
-------
COMPLETE LAKE ASSESSMENT
(3 Persons)
1
REVIEW DATA FORMS
(1 Person)
> Completeness
• Accuracy
» Legibility
• Flags/Comments
I
LOAD BOAT ONTO TRAILER
(2 Persons)
\
REVIEW SAMPLE LABELS
(1 Person)
• Completeness
• Accuracy
• Legibility
• Cross-check with forms
INSPECT BOAT, MOTOR, TRAILER,
AND NETS FOR PRESENCE OF
PLANT AND ANIMAL MATERIAL,
AND CLEAN THOROUGHLY
(2 Persons)
PACK EQUIPMENT AND
SUPPLIES FOR TRANSPORT
(2 Persons)
INSPECT SAMPLES
(1 Person)
Complete
Sealed
Ice packs
Packed for transport
CLEAN UP LAUNCH SITE
AND STAGING AREA
(2 to 3 Persons)'
LEAVE LAKE
nooetxtsm
Figure 9-1. Final lake activities summary.
9-2
-------
LAKE ASSESSMENT FORM
LAKE NAME: /.. kJofBflfS
LAKE ID: A/ V O O O L
DATE OF VISIT: 7 / V / f V VISITS: £D 2
TEAM ID (circle): 1 (7) 34se 789 10 OTHER: •
LAKE SITE ACTIVITIES AND DISTURBANCES OBSERVED (INTENSITY: BLANK > NOT OBSERVED, L « LOW, M - MODERATE, H - HEAVY)
RESDENTIAL RECREATIONAL
^T. TteMTiHrit PM^Xd CMVOHOIMM, BlIM'HI
t_ HiimiwoLAwia PnmnPMa,CWHio,lac«n
__ CoNmwcnoN • RUORIV
_Pvra,DMIK MMMU
TMATMNTPUWr THAMRjmfl
HYOHOLOOIC LAKE TYPE DRmvm
OUTLET DAJIS ^HCM
Low ELEVATION FUQHTHAZAROS O YE>
MOTOR BOAT DENSITY OHUH
GENERAL AESTHETIC* WPUAWW
SWMHA8IUTY *HoooD
LAKE LEVEL CHANGES DZIHO
AGRICULTURAL WDUSTRUL LAKE MANAGEMENT
LNatacn Pownuo DwnnWATaTiiunnr
— PoMnPLwra MAwunPnniiBi
LOOOMO
EVBCHCSOFFHI
E ' ^ppm
GENERAL LAKE INFORMATION
H»uxai(OuniT 7B«|
3 Sc«M(Bto2W) OuoaBunCSTaTm) DEmiain(>7ntt
3so*l«(5To2!%) QUOGBIATE(35T07SK) Q Exim»I(>7S%)
3SP«,«<5TOa*) nHo«,A™(J5T07n« ClEx™^.*)
U SPJBGI(BT025X) nUoOESATt(25TQ75S) D EXmaM (>75«)
3 SWKM(5T025X) D MonMn(25T07nO O EXiram (>75X)
3 SMiMt(STaaS%) IH Ho«BIATX(2ST07Gm O EmNMVI(>76W)
QUALITATIVE MACROPHYTE SURVEY
llACROfMYTED
EUWKKNT/FLOATMa COVERAO* (% LAKE
8unnnauiT Cowuai (% LAKE
DESCRTON:
M8ITY |~) ASHMT j?" *? *«» f~1 flootaxn O DINK
ARKA) ^S{oraii% O2SToio% Ditm75% Q>TI%
AMA) ^en»l% Dinons QioraTni Q>TS%
(Contlnuwl on revaru »ld«)
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL): $ .
Rav.3/95 FLDFRMS^S
Uk« AMMimwit Form -1
Figure 9-2. Lake Assessment Form, Side 1.
9-3
-------
LAKEID; N V O O
LAKE ASSESSMENT FORM (contlniMd)
VISIT*: flj 2
QUALITATIVE ASSESSMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL VALUES
TROPHIC STATE PfouooraWHc
QunoraoMc
D HYMfliirraopmc
VISUAL ASSESSMENT:
OP ALCML
ALOALABUNDANCE * TYPE:
NUTRIENT STATUS:
TO Be
OTHER:
F19HABIUTY:
DFW
DPOC.
LOCAtCOHTACTS;
OMCHYATiCT.'s:
7lt?t>CJ
rti>+'S
J~l5d.
OVEHALLBIOTICINTEaBITY
O StVIRUVlMMCTIO
Omimi.Ani«iMKT: / tfTLf HUM
it
WMUreOBMBVtp: AAt>t»Sf, £fA GtttL*
WATEHBODY CHARACTER (CBCtt cmi)
DEVELOPED
UNAPPEALING
COMMENTS:
REVIEWED BY (iNmAL):
RiV.MS FLDFRMS.85
Lake Araetiiment Form - 2
Figure 9-3. Lake Assessment Form, Side 2.
9-4
-------
TABLE 9-1. LAKE SITE ACTIVITIES AND DISTURBANCES
Observe any lake activities or disturbances listed below and record as L (low), M (moderate), or H
(heavy) intensity on Side 1 of the Lake Assessment Form (except as noted below):
Residences
Construction
Pipes/Drain
Treatment
Plant
Landfill
Parks, etc.
Resorts
Marinas
Trash/Litter
Scum/Slicks
Agriculture
Industry
Mine/Quarry
Power Lines
Power Plants
Logging/Fires
Odors
Macrophyte
Control
Liming
Drinking Water
Treatment
Presence of any houses and residential buildings around the lake.
Presence of any recent construction in the immediate area around the lake or signs of recent sedimentation
events (depositional fans).
Presence of any pipes or drains'feeding into or out of the lake. If known, write down what type of activity the pipe
is associated with (e.g., storm sewer, plant intake) in the "Comments'1 section on
Side 2.
Presence of sewage treatment facility.
Any evidence of landfill or dumping around the lake, including garbage pits and informal dumping of large
amounts of trash or cars and appliances along roads or lakeshore. This does not include small amounts of litter.
If informal dumping areas exist, note that they are informal sites in the "Comments" section on Side 2.
Presence of organized public or private parks, campgrounds, beaches or other recreational areas around the
lake. If there are signs of informal areas (e.g., swimming hole) for camping, swimming, or boating around the
lake, record them on the "parks, campground, beaches" line and note that they are informal in the "Comments"
section on Side 2.
Level of resort activity; this could include motels, resorts, golf courses, and stores.
Presence of any marinas. ,
Relative abundance of trash or litter around the lake.
Relative abundance of scum or slicks on the lake.
Presence of cropland, pasture, orchards, and livestock.
Any industrial activity (e.g., canning, chemical, pulp) around the lake or in the catchment. Describe the type of
industry in the "Comments" section on Side 2.
Any evidence of mining or quarrying activity in the catchment or around the lake.
Presence of any power generating facilities or heavy duty transmission lines around or across the lake (not
ordinary telephone or electric wires).
Presence of any power plants.
Any evidence of logging or fire removal of trees in the lake area.
Presence of any strong odors.
Any evidence of dredging or the application of chemicals; describe these in the "Comments"
section on Side 2.
Any evidence of liming activities.
Presence of any drinking water treatment facilities.
Angling Pressure Estimate of the intensity of fishing activity in the lake.
Record any other oddities observed or additional information for any specific activity in the
"Comments" section on Side 2.
9-5
-------
9.1.2 General Lake Information
Observations regarding the general characteristics of the lake are described in Table 9-2,
and are recorded on Side 1 of the Lake Assessment Form (Figure 9-2). The hydrologic lake
type is a very important variable for defining subpopulations for acidic deposition effects. Note
any flight hazards that might interfere with either low-altitude fly-overs by aircraft (for future aerial
photography or videography) or landing on the lake for sampling purposes (either by float plane
or helicopter). When estimating the intensity of motor boat usage, in addition to the actual
number of. boats observed on the lake during the visit, use other observations such as the
presence of boat houses, docks, and idle craft.
9.1.3 Shoreline Characteristics
Shoreline characteristics of interest during the final lake assessment are described in
Table 9-3. Observations related to this portion of the assessment are recorded on the Lake
Assessment Form, Side 1 (Figure 9-2). To estimate the extent of major vegetation types, limit
the assessment to the immediate lake shoreline (i.e., within 20 m of the water). Also estimate
the percentage of the immediate shoreline that has been developed or modified by humans.
9.1.4 Qualitative Macrophyte Survey
Macrophytes (aquatic plants large enough to be seen without magnification) are
important indicators of lake trophic status. The most important indicator for EMAP-SW purposes
Is the percentage of the lake area covered with macrophytes. For both "emergent/floating" and
"submergenf coverage, choose one of the four percentage groupings (0 to 25 percent, 25 to 50
percent, 50 to 75 percent, 75 to 100 percent), on Side 1 of the Lake Assessment Form, that best
describes the lake. In some cases, it will be fairly easy to estimate the percentage from
observations made during sampling. In other cases, it will be an educated guess, especially if
the water is turbid. After recording the areal percentage of macrophyte coverage, record the
density of the plants in the observed macrophyte beds as either dense, moderate, or sparse.
Finally, provide any qualitative description (genera present, dominant type [floating, emergent, or
submergent]) of the macrophyte beds that would be useful for interpreting the trophic status of
the lake. All activities described in this subsection are recorded on Side 1 of the Lake
Assessment Form (Figure 9-2).
9.1.5 Qualitative Assessment of Environmental Values
The goal of EMAP-SW is to assess three major ecological values with respect to lakes:
trophic state, fishability, and biotic integrity. Based on your field experience, record your own
9-6
-------
TABLE 9-2. GENERAL LAKE INFORMATION NOTED DURING LAKE ASSESSMENT
Hydrologic Lake Type
Outlet Dams
Flight Hazards
Motor Boats
General Aesthetics
Swimmability
Lake Level
Note if there are any stream outlets from the lake, even if they are not flowing. If no lake
outlets were observed, record the lake as a seepage lake. If the lake was created by a
man-made dam (hot that a dam is present just to raise the water level), record the lake as
a reservoir. Otherwise record the lake as a drainage lake.
Note the presence of any dams (or other flow control structures) on the lake outlet(s).
Differentiate between artificial (manmade) structures and natural structures (beaver
dams).
If there are any hazards (above tree level) that would interfere with low elevation aircraft
flights or landing on the lake, check "Yes"; otherwise check "No." Examples include
radio towers or power lines.
Record your impression of the density of motor boat usage on this lake (high or low). If
there is a restriction on the size of motor boat engines, check "Restricted." If motor boats
are banned, check "Banned." Consider the day of the week and weather in your
assessment as well as the number of boathouses, idle craft. Count jet skis and any other
motorized craft, which could stir up the lake, as motor boats.
Record your impression of the general aesthetic atmosphere of the lake.
Record a subjective impression about the aesthetics of swimming in this lake
(swimmability) along the range of "good" to "not swimmable."
Examine the lake shoreline for evidence of lake level changes (e.g., bathtub ring). If
there are none, check "zero"; otherwise try to estimate the extent of vertical changes in
lake level from the present conditions based on other shoreline signs.
9-7
-------
TABLE 9-3. SHORELINE CHARACTERISTICS OBSERVED DURING FINAL LAKE ASSESSMENT
Check percent of shoreline characteristics:
Forest/Shrub
Agriculture
Open Grass
Wetland
Barren
Developed
Shoreline
Modifications
Deciduous, coniferous, or mixed forest, including shrub and sapling
vegetation.
Cropland, orchard, feedlot, pastureland, or other horticultural activity.
Meadows, lawns, or other open vegetation.
Forested and nonforested wetlands (submerged terrestrial vegetation).
Nonvegetated areas such as beaches, sandy areas, paved areas, and
exposed rock.
Immediate shoreline area developed by human activity; this includes lawns,
houses, stores, malls, marinas, golf courses, or any other hurnan-built land use.
Actual shoreline that has been modified by the installation of riprap, revetments,
piers, or other human modifications.
9-8
-------
assessment of these values on the Lake Assessment Form, Side 2 (Figure 9-3). Write
comments on these values in this section. The key words on the left side of each value section
are there to stimulate thought and are not comprehensive. It is not necessary to address each
of these key words.
Trophic state is the rate or amount of phytoplankton and macrophytes produced or
present in a lake. List any observed potential nutrient sources to the lake (e.g., septic tanks and
agricultural runoff). Give your visual impression of the trophic status as oligotrophic (little or no
biomass in the lake water), mesotrophic (intermediate amounts of biomass in the lake water),
eutrophic (large amounts of biomass in the lake water), or hypereutrophic (choked lake, with
more biomass than water).
Fishabilityls a fish assemblage containing fish that are catchable, desirable, and safe to
consume by wildlife and humans. Write down any observations about fishability derived from
impressions of fish habitat, conversations with locals, or the presence of fish and fishermen.
Biotic integrity is the ability to support and maintain a balanced, integrated, adaptive
community with a biological diversity, composition, and functional organization comparable to
natural lakes of the region. Record your overall impression of the "health" of the biota in the
lake. Note any on possible causes of impairment. The presence of higher order consumers
(fish-eating birds and mammals) is an indication of a healthy food web and should be noted
here. Similarly, the absence of an organism that you might expect to see is an important
observation.
In addition, rate the water body character which is the physical habitat integrity of the
water body and is largely a function of riparian and littoral habitat structure, volume change,
trash, turbidity, slicks, scums, color, and odor. The EMAP Surface Waters group attempts to
define water body character through two attributes: degree of human development and
aesthetics. Rate each of these attributes on a scale of 1 to 5. For development, give the lake a
"5" if it is pristine, with no signs of any human development. A "1" would indicate a lake is totally
developed; for example, the entire lake is ringed with houses, seawalls, docks, etc. For
aesthetics (whether the lake is appealing or not) base the decision on any factors about the lake
that disturb you (trash, algal growth, weed abundance, overcrowding). Circle the number that
best describes your opinion about how suitable the lake water is for recreation and aesthetic
enjoyment today:
1. Enjoyment is nearly impossible.
2. Level of enjoyment is substantially reduced.
9-9
-------
3. Enjoyment is slightly impaired.
4. There are very minor aesthetic problems; it is otherwise excellent for swimming,
boating, and enjoyment.
5. It is beautiful and could not be any nicer.
Use the comments section on Side 2 to note any other pertinent information about the
lake or its catchment. Here the field team can record any observations that may be useful for
future data interpretation.
9.2 DATA FORMS AND SAMPLE INSPECTION
After the Lake Assessment Form is completed, one team member reviews all of the data
forms and sample labels for accuracy, completeness, and legibility. The same team member
also inspects all sample containers and packages them in preparation for transport, storage, or
shipment. The other team members load the boat on the trailer, pick up the equipment and
supplies for transport, and clean up the launch site area as described in Section 9.3.
Ensure that all required data forms for the lake have been completed. It is important to
verify that there is a Fish Tally Form completed for every piece of fishing gear used on the lake.
Confirm that the LAKE-ID is correct on all forms, as well as the date of the visit. On each form,
verify that all information has been recorded accurately, the recorded information is legible, and
any flags are explained in the comments section. Ensure that written comments are legible and
use no "shorthand" or abbreviations. After reviewing each form initial the lower right corner of
each page of the form.
Ensure that all samples are labeled, all labels are completely filled in, and each label is
covered (except for those in the fish jars) with clear plastic tape.
9.3 LAUNCH SITE CLEANUP
Load the boat on the trailer and inspect the boat, motor, and trailer for evidence of weeds
and other macrophytes. Clean the boat, motor, and trailer as completely as possible before
leaving the launch site. Inspect all nets for pieces of macrophyte and dead fish and remove as
much as possible before packing the nets for transport. Pack all equipment and supplies in the
vehicle and trailer for transport; keep them organized as presented in the equipment checklists
(Appendix B).
9-10
-------
Clean up all waste material at the launch site and dispose of or transport it out of the site
if a trash can is not available. Dispose of fish carcasses as directed by the collecting permit or
the fish protocol.
9-11
-------
-------
APPENDIX A
AVIAN INDICATOR FIELD OPERATIONS MANUAL
Data on bird assemblages were collected by different crews on separate visits than
those who collected data for other indicators. A separate field operations manual was
developed specifically for the avian indicator. The manual included in this appendix has been
re-formatted and re-organized from the original to be consistent with the rest of the EMAP-
SW lakes field operations manual, However, no revisions to the technical content have been
made by the editors.
-------
-------
FIELD OPERATIONS MANUAL- BIRDS
1994
by
Raymond J. O'Connor and Amanda K. Moors
Department of Wildlife Ecology
University of Maine
Orono, Maine
A-3
-------
-------
1.0 OVERVIEW
Personnel from the Wildlife Department at the University of Maine have been
contracted by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) to determine whether birds can
serve as indicators of the biotic integrity of lakes and ponds in New England, New York, and
New Jersey. The following document discusses operations necessary to complete the
fieldwork.
1.1 Participating Organizations and Responsibilities
Cooperators on this project include personnel from the EPA's Environmental
Monitoring and Assessment Program (EMAP), ManTech Environmental Technology, Inc.
(METI), Lockheed Engineering and Sciences Company (LESC), and the University of Maine,
Orono campus (UMO). EMAP, METI, and LESC work together to provide UMO with logistics
information about the lakes to be surveyed. From here on, we will use the term EMAP to
include personnel from EMAP, METI, and LESC. EMAP will provide UMO with a list of the
lakes to be surveyed (including latitude, longitude, and size of each lake), landowner
permission forms, outlines (to scale) of the lakes, any available directions to the lakes and
other logistic information. The list of lakes to be surveyed should be provided to UMO prior
to March 15,1994 so UMO can have enough time to plan fieldwork. EMAP will secure
permission for UMO to access those lakes.
UMO is responsible for ensuring that fieldwork is completed according to the strict
protocols designed for this project, which will be discussed in Section 4. UMO will provide
EMAP with photocopies of all data sheets after the fieldwork is completed. After data is
entered and error checked, UMO will send an electronic copy of the data to EMAP.
1.2 Field Personnel, Training, and Quality Assurance
It is anticipated that fieldwork for the 1994 season will require at least five crews.
Each crew consists of two people, one person to record habitat data, the other to record bird
information. The bird surveyor will be the more experienced field person and will serve as
crew leader. Personnel hired for habitat and bird data collection will be trained during April
and May 1994. Training will involve going out in the field daily to practice bird censusing and
habitat identification on land, as well as implementing the censussing protocols on lakes.
Bird surveyors will be required to demonstrate at least a 90% proficiency on a Quality
Assurance (QA) test of bird identification skills administered by Norm Famous, QA officer.
This test will consist of taped bird calls likely to be encountered in the region the surveyor will
be working. Additionally, censussers will be tested on bird identifications in the field using the
protocols that will be followed during fieldwork. Habitat personnel will be tested by having
A-5
-------
them simultaneously assess habitats in sample census plots. This will allow us to examine
how variable estimates are among crews.
One mid-season QA test will be administered by an experienced ornithologist to each
crew during an actual survey in mid-June. Each surveyor will be required to have at least a
90% overlap with the species identified by the ornithologist. Habitat personnel will not be
required to take a mid-season QA test, but by going out with each crew, the ornithologist will
be able to assess whether field personnel differ greatly in their estimations.
1.3 Sampling Schedule -1994
All lakes will be surveyed during May 28-July 7,1994. Lakes in the southern region
(e.g., New York, New Jersey) will be surveyed earlier in that period than those in northern
areas (e.g., Maine).
2.0 DAILY OPERATIONS
Each crew will pre-survey the lake the evening before the actual census to determine
if any problems will be encountered in the morning. If the lake is large (>4800 m perimeter),
then crews will need to map the habitat types in the evening and stratify census plot
locations according to those habitat types. Crews may also wish to record habitat data during
the evening pre-survey to save time in the morning. If all of the lakeshore can be seen from
land, then it is unnecessary to go out on the water during the pre-survey.
Crews will arrive at the lake an hour before sunrise so that they can start the survey
one-half hour before sunrise. An equipment checklist will be completed before launching the
canoe to begin the survey (Figure A-1). The survey will be completed by four hours after
sunrise or when one circuit around the lake has been completed, whichever is shorter.
After the survey, crews will check all data sheets to make sure everything is filled out
appropriately. Crews will then travel to the next lake, find a place to stay, and conduct a pre-
survey.
Crews will be required to phone UMO every day and report on their progress. Every
third day, crews will photocopy data sheets and mail them to UMO.
3.0 LAKE LOCATION AND VERIFICATION
In general, each crew will be responsible for surveying 20 lakes. Prior to the field
season each crew will be provided with maps of their assigned lakes. In the field, each lake
A-6
-------
Quantity
2pr.
2
2
30
5
1 ea.
1
6
1
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
1
1
1-2
Item
Field glasses
Field notebook (waterproof surveyor's notebook)
Clipboard (2)
Field recording forms
Large ziplock bag (5)
Maps of lake (topographic and sketch)
Tape recorder
Extra batteries (size D)
Tape with wetland bird songs
Ballpoint pens
B pencils (for use if recording forms become damp)
Compass with clinometer
Thermometer
Stopwatch
Habitat analysis protocol
Bird census protocol
canoe
outboard motor fuel tank (full) bailer
paddles (including 1 spare)
type IV life preservers
first aid kit
fire extinguisher
anchor(s) and rope(s)
•
DATE: OBSERVER:
Figure A-1. Equipment checklist for Jake survey field crews.
A-7
-------
will initially be located based on topographic maps or road atlases. Crews will then check
whether the map of the outline of the lake provided by EMAP matches the actual outline.
Verification can also be checked by asking people in the area to identify the lake.
Crews will determine if the lake meets the EMAP criteria (i.e., z 1 ha in total surface
area, :> 100 square meters of open water, and ;> 1 m in depth). Any lake that does not match
these criteria will be designated as a "non-target" lake and will not be surveyed. EMAP will
be notified of any "non-target" lakes so that substitutes can be chosen.
4.0 DATA COLLECTION
Crews will survey both shoreline habitat and birds in a circular plot with a 200 m
diameter (Figure A-2). Plots will be established every 200 m on lakes with a perimeter <.
4800 m, starting 200 m from the boat ramp (or put in, if no ramp is present) in a clockwise
direction until one circuit around the lake is completed. If fewer than 6 census points can be
fit on the lake during the first circuit, then the number of points will be determined according
the protocol listed in Table A-1. On lakes with a perimeter larger than 4800 m the maximum
number of census plots will be 24 and the minimum will be 20. Location of these points will
be stratified according the occurrence of major habitat types (Table A-2).
Location of all census plots will be recorded on the map outlines and a description of
the census point will be recorded in a field notebook by the crew leader.
4.1 Bird Data
Bird data must be collected between one-half hour before and four hours after
sunrise on days that meet the required weather conditions (item 3, Table A-3). All birds seen
and heard during five minutes will be recorded according to the protocol (Table A-3). Birds
will be identified to the species level. If the surveyor does not see or hear the bird well
enough to identify it to the species level, it will be identified to the lowest taxonomic level
possible (e.g., genus, family). The method of identification (i.e., visual or aural), location of
the bird (e.g., within 100 m, in the air, in the water, or on land), and the number of individuals
will be recorded as well (Figure A-3).
4.2 Habitat Data
Habitat data wilPbe taken during the five minutes spent at each census station
(figures A-4 and A-5). The percent cover of several habitat types will be estimated by
quarter in the census plot. Habitat types are defined in the protocol for the recording of
habitat data (tables A-4 and A-5). In forested habitats, the two dominant tree species will be
A-8
-------
water
RB= right back quarter
RF= right front quarter
LB= left back quarter
LF= left front quarter
200 m
Figure A-2. Census plot design.
A-9
-------
TABLE A-1. PROTOCOL FOR THE NUMBER OF STOPS TO BE CENSUSSED
If the lake is larger than 4800 m you will need to allocate the number of stops based on percentof
each habitat type listed on the 'habitats to stratify on' sheet that I gave you earlier. When you allocate
stops in a particular habitat start 200 m inside that habitat type. If the habitat type is equal to 200 m
then put the stop in the middle. If the habitat type is less than 200 m of the shoreline, do not count it
as a separate habitat type.
For the small lakes, start 200 m in a clockwise direction from the boat ramp. If six or greater stops
can be fit on the first trip around the lake, do only 1 circuit. If only 3-5 stops can be fit, then go around
one more time (doing the same stops over again). If only 1-2 stops fit on the lake, continue sampling
until you complete 6 stops. For the 2-stop lake that would mean going to the same stops three times.
For the 1-stop lake, you will do the same stop six times. Wait 5 mins. between each census.
A-10
-------
TABLE A-2. HABITAT TYPES ON WHICH TO STRATIFY PLOT LOCATIONS
Habitat type
. Categories on habitat form which are included
in the major habitat type
Marsh
Bog
Tall shrub swamp
Low shrub swamp
Wooded swamp
Deciduous
Mixed
Coniferous
Upland Forest
Deciduous
Mixed
Coniferous
Agricultural
Transitional
Urban
Forested suburban
New suburban
Old suburban
Transportation/
Communication
tall and short marsh, wet grassland
low shrub swamp types
tall shrub swamp
low shrub swamp
all height and canopy closure classes for these three wooded
swamp types
all height and canopy closure classes for these three upland
forest types
croplands (grain and vegetable), pasture, hayfield, orchard
clear cuts, old-field (grass and shrub)
urban
forested suburban
new suburban
old suburban
transportation/communication
Note: the four housing types (urban, suburban, old and new suburban) may need to be combined if
separately they do riot account for enough of the shoreline to be sampled.
A-11
-------
TABLE A-3. PROTOCOL FOR SURVEYING BIRDS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6,
7.
Lakes will be visited generally from a south to north direction, thereby taking advantage of any seasonality
present in bird behavior. Logistical factors may make it expedient not to follow the south to north sequence
rigorously.
Whenever possible, crews will visit each lake immediately prior to the first census (typically by visiting it the
previous evening), to review the habitat present and to confirm that no special problems will be encountered
there.
Surveys will be conducted from 0.5 hour before sunrise to 4 hours after sunrise on days with good visibility,
and minimal precipitation and wind, following the guidelines of the USFWS BBS. Wind speed will be
measured on the Beaufort scale (a 3 or less indicates acceptable conditions); Sky conditions will be noted
using Weather Bureau codes. Light fog and rain will be considered acceptable if they are not persistent. If
50% of the census points have sub-standard weather conditions the lake will be surveyed again.
Each field crew will use a motorized canoe to follow a transect parallel to 10 m from the lake shore. The
direction of travel will be clockwise around the lake unless the crew decides that it is prudent to follow a
different course (e.g., in order to avoid obstacles or take advantage of wind conditions). The direction of
travel for the second visit will be the same as during the first visit, even if the first circuit was traveled
counterclockwise. At each observation point the motor will be shut off and birds seen or heard during a 5-
mtnute period will be noted. Numbers of all birds seen or heard will be recorded in ink or with a letter B
pencil on a standard survey form. Observers will distinguish individuals seen:
flying overhead vs. on the water vs. on land
between observation points vs. at observation points
within 100 m of points vs. more than 100 m; for the distant registrations the stop to which they are
closest will be recorded
from birds heard (though both categories will be recorded)
When habitats which normally host typically secretive marsh birds (e.g., bitterns) are present, observers will
play a standardized tape recording of the calls of these species, to increase their detection. Thirty seconds
of calls for each of the following species will be played: Pied-billed Grebe, Sora, Virginia Rail, American
Bittern, American Coot, Common Moorhen, and the Yellow Rail. The taped calls will be played immediately
preceding the 5-minute census period.
Census points will be 200 m apart, with distance between points judged using a range finder. Each lake will
have a minimum of 3 and a maximum of 24 census points. On small lakes, the number of stops censussed
will be based on the number that can be fitted (200 m apart) in the first circuit around the lake. On large
lakes where the perimeter exceeds 4800 m so that more than 24 points could be accommodated, the 24
points censussed will be stratified by habitats present. The amount of each habitat will be measured using
map wheels to quantify the amount of each habitat present based on the evening pre-survey. Census
points will be allocated according to the percent of each habitat type found along the shore. The exact
location of census points will be based on distance from launch site (preference given to those closest) and
win begin 200 m from the closest edge of a habitat type. If the amount of habitat is between 200 and 400
m, then the census point will be located in the middle of it to allow all of the census point to cover that
habitat type. If less than 200 m of a particular habitat are present then it will not be considered a separate
habitat type and will not be allocated any census points. 'If a habitat type is greater than 200 m, but
comprises less than 1/24 of the perimeter of the lake it will still be allocated a census point.
The position of each census point will be marked on a map of the lake. This map should contain sufficient
detail with respect to landmarks to allow the census points be identified in later visits.
8. The equipment required by each team is listed in Figure 1. The list will be checked daily.
A-12
-------
LAKE SURVEY BIRD DATA SHEET
page of
Lake state Date
/ / Observer
mm/dd/w
Location
• IOM«thod Within Hibitet
AUDIO or 100m? AIRorLAND
Species VISUAL YESOTMO or WATER #ofindiv.
F«m UUNEBP/SOFWJ4-29-W ftaw England SodivwMy Project
Figure A-3. Data sheet used to collect information on birds.
A-13
-------
WEATHER
100. TEMPERATURE (°C) :
101. WIND (circle one)
Beaufort No.: Indicators:
0
1
2
3
extended
4
5
smoke rises vertically
wind direction shown by smoke drift
wind felt on face; leaves rustle
leaves, small twigs in constant motion; light flag
raises dust and loose paper; small branches are moved
small trees in sway; white caps on lakes
102. SKY (circle one)
Sky code:
0
1
2
4
5
8
Description:
clear of few clouds
partly cloudy (scattered) or variable sky
cloudy (broken) or overcast
fog or smoke
drizzle
showers
HABITAT ELEMENTS
103. Number of visible boats containing people on water:
104. Number of camps and homes within 10O m:
105. Number of people within 1OO m:
106. Islands present within 10O m?
107. Dead/dying trees >10 cm DBH present within 5m of or in wetland?
108. conifer type: (circle one)
white/red/pitch/jack Pine red/black/white Spruce Fir
Larch Hemlock White cedar Other:
109. Hardwood type: (circle one)
red/silver/sugar Maple red/white/scrub Oak
quaking/balsam/bigtooth Aspen white/yellow Birch
Other;
Beech
110. Comments:
FORM
UMNEBP /SDF6B-05-01-92
Figure A-4. Data sheet used to collect habitat information.
A-14
-------
I
in
3
S
9
H O.
Eii I
in T~ »-
V lA A
ell
IS T- <-
V lA A
ill
V tA A
3 $ 3
S3
s
ill
US r- 1-
V lA A
V lA A
llllll
V lA A
sasssesiss
S
ell
n »- T-
V-tA A
ell
in t- •*-
V (A A
ill
V (A A
9
,*
ss;
9
I
e
a.- g ^
a
i«"
I PJ CT
Pj.__.W_ PJ W W CT CO ^ ^
Figure A-5. Lakeshore Habitat Survey Form.
A-15
-------
TABLE A-4. PROTOCOL FOR HABITAT DATA COLLECTION.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Habitats will be surveyed at each bird census stop. Habitat assessment should be completed
within the five minutes spent at each stop.
The available cover types will be classified into 91 habitat categories, which are described in
Table A-5. The sample are includes the four quarters of a circle with a 100 m radius. Quarters will
be defined by a line parallel to the shoreline adjacent to the stop and a line perpendicular to the
parallel line. When the stop is located at a bend in the shoreline, the perpendicular line will be
perpendicular to the forward direction of travel. The 100 m radius will be estimated using a range
finder.
Percent cover of each cover type will be estimated within each quarter of the circle. The amount
of a cover type will be assigned to one of five categories: blank= 0 to 5%, 1= > 5 to 25%, 2= > 25
to 50%, 3= > 50 to 75%, and 4= > 75%. In forested habitats, the two dominant tree species will be
listed. The presence of habitat elements, such as streams, cliffs, houses, snags, boats, and farm
buildings, within the census plot will be recorded.
Weather data including temperature (Celsius, measured with a thermometer), wind (Beaufort
scale, Table A-6), and sky conditions (Table A-6) will be taken at all stops.
A-16
-------
TABLE A-5. DEFINITION OF HABITAT TYPES
Habitat Type
Definition
Terrestrial Systems
Cropland - grains
Cropland - vegetable
Pasture
Hayfield
Orchard
Old field - grassland
Old field - shrub
New suburban
Old suburban
Forested suburban
Urban
Non-vegetated
Transportation/
communication
Upland forest
Other
tilled agricultural land planted in grains (e.g., corn, wheat, barley).
tilled agricultural land planted in vegetable crops (e.g., broccoli,
potatoes, tomatoes).
grazed grasslands, usually too wet or rocky for cultivation or haying;
grass is dominant in the long-term.
mowed grasslands where grass is dominant in the long-term; this
can include extensive, mowed road verges and mowed areas at
airports.
fruit or Christmas trees < 5 m tall with grassy ground cover.
abandoned agricultural fields reverting to forest, characterized by ;>
75% of grass cover, < 25% shrubs, and small trees (< 2 m).
abandoned agricultural fields reverting to forest, characterized by <
75% grasses, £ 25% shrubs, and small trees (< 2 m); this can
include power line right-of-ways.
areas with extensive low-cut grass and few trees, which are < 10 m
tall, or have s 20% canopy closure; this can include athletic fields,
lawns, cemeteries, golf courses, and tract housing.
areas with extensive low-cut grass and few trees, which are a 10m
tall and have > 20% canopy closure; this includes older cemeteries
and parks, and suburban areas with large trees.
houses in small, forest openings surrounded by pre-existing forest.
greatly developed areas with large buildings and parking lots.
non-urban areas lacking vegetation; this includes gravel and dirt pits.
areas used for transportation or communication; this includes airport
runways, roads, railroads, and boat ramps.
upland forested habitats will be broken down by three qualities: type,
height, and canopy closure. Type refers to the canopy type (i.e.,
deciduous, mixed, coniferous). Deciduous forests have s 75%
deciduous trees, coniferous forests have * 75% coniferous trees,
and the mixed forest type has < 75% conifers and < 75% deciduous
trees. Height categories will be < 5 m, 5 to 15 m, and > 15 m tall.
canopy closure will be placed into three categories: open (< 20%
closure), middle (20 to 60% closure), and closed (> 60% closure).
This results in 27 (3x3x3- 27) possible types of forest.
miscellaneous and rare terrestrial habitats.
(Continued)
A-17
-------
TABLE A-5 (continued)
Habitat Type
Definition
Aouatlc Systems
Wooded swamp
Tall shrub swamp
Low shrub swamp
sphagnum-mat bog
Wet grasslands
Tall marsh
Low marsh
Lake/pond
Habitat Elements:
Stream
Bridge
Cliff
Sand bank
Farm buildings
Wet road ditches
Isolated trees
Clear cutting
Selective cutting
forested areas that are inundated by water seasonally or all year;
wooded swamps will be described using the same 27 types
discussed under upland forest habitats.
dominated (i 75% cover) by woody plants 1 to 5 m tall where soils
are inundated by water much of the year; this generally includes
alder swamps.
woody plants < 1 m tall dominate (a 75% cover); soils are inundated
by water much of the year.
woody plants ;> 1 m tall common, but < 75% cover, and sphagnum
mats £ 25% of cover; soils inundated by water much of the year.
areas dominated by non-Spartina sedges, grasses, and rushes <; 1
m tall; soils are inundated with water in the winter and early spring,
and saturated in the summer.
wet areas vegetated with persistent emergents > 1 m tall, £ 50%
, open water; this includes cattail and reed marshes.
shallow water vegetated with herbaceous broad- leaved emergent
plants <. 1 m tall, s 50% open water; this includes areas with pickerel
weed and lily pads.
permanent bodies of fresh water a I ha in size; this includes the parts
of the lake/pond that are located within the census plot.
permanent or intermittent flowing bodies of water < 3 m wide.
a structure elevated > 1 m over land or water and > 5 m long.
rocky outcroppings > 5m tall.
sandy, abrupt drop-off > 5 m tall.
barns and storage sheds used for agricultural purposes.
ditches along the road that have > 10 m long section of persistent
emergent vegetation (e.g., cattails, tall reeds).
isolated single or group of trees in croplands, hayfields, pasture, and
reverting fields that do not register as forest.
<25% cover of overstory trees and evidence of wood cutting (e.g.,
wood and brush piles, stumps) within the last 5 years.
i 25% cover of overstory trees and evidence of wood cutting (e.g.,
wood and brush piles, stumps) within the last 5 years.
A-18
-------
recorded. Presence of people, boats, houses, and snags will also be noted. Weather
information (cloud cover, temperature, wind) will also be taken by the habitat data recorder
(Table A-6).
5.0 SAFETY ISSUES
Strict safety protocols (Table A-7) will be followed while crews are in the field.
5.1 Personnel
Each crew will be provided with a first aid kit, a fire extinguisher, information
regarding Lyme's disease, and a mobile telephone. Crews will wear personal flotation
devices while in the canoes and will not go out on the water if conditions appear dangerous
(e.g., large waves, heavy winds, storm-front moving in). Crews will be required to call the
UMO Wildlife Department every day and report where they are and the lakes they plan to
survey during the next three days. There will be a person in the UMO Wildlife Department
specifically hired to receive these daily calls and to check off lakes as the crews complete
them.
5.2 Data
Data sheets from each lake will be photocopied and the copies mailed to the UMO
Wildlife Department within three days of visiting that lake. The same person who takes the
phone calls at UMO will also keep track of which data sheets have been received.
A-19
-------
TABLE A-6. CODES USED TO RECORD WIND AND SKY CONDITIONS.
Weather
Variable Scale Description of Condition
Wind
Sky
Beaufort
0
1
2
3
4
5
Sky code (eighths)
0
1
2
4
5
8
smoke rises vertically
wind direction shown by smoke drift
wind felt on face; leaves rustle
leaves, small twigs in constant motion; light flag extended
raises dust and loose paper; small branches are moved
small trees in sway; white caps on lakes
clear or few clouds
partly cloudy (scattered) or variable sky
cloudy (broken) or overcast
fog or smoke
drizzle
showers
A-20
-------
TABLE A-7. SAFETY PROTOCOL
1. Check weather conditions the day before and the morning of the scheduled survey to determine if
weather will be hazardous to canoe travel. K thunderstorms or other unsafe weather conditions
are predicted for the early morning, the team will have to decide if they can complete the survey
prior to the onset of bad weather. .
2. When traveling in the canoe all individuals will wear life preservers.
3. A fire extinguisher will be carried when using the motorized canoes
4. A checklist of equipment will be reviewed every morning prior to launching the canoe.
i'
5. Each crew will contact the Wildlife Department every day to notify people of their location, any
problems, and itinerary for the next 3 days.
6. An extra spark plug and the tools needed to change the plug will be carried in the canoe when the
motor is being used.
7. The fuel tank level will be checked prior to every use to ensure adequate fuel supply for that
particular survey.
8. Refer to Lyme disease information sheet that will be provided for precautions to be taken
regarding that.
9. Flight safety protocol will include checking to see if the pilot and plane is OAS certified, that a flight
plan has been filed, and the weights of all gear should be provided to the pilot so that he can
properly place everything. No synthetic clothing should be worn to decrease severity of burns that
could occur in a crash.
10. Follow precautions that will be provided while using the cellular phone.
11. To guard against loss of data, data sheets will be photocopied and the photocopies will be mailed
to the UMO Wildlife Department every three days.
A-21
-------
-------
APPENDIX B
LAKE-VISIT CHECKLISTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Items in Forms File
Items in the Boat
Items in 80-qt Cooler #1
Items in 80-qt Cooler #2
Items in 80-qt Cooler #3 (Shipping Cooler)
Items in Cooler for Benthos Sampling
Items in 48-qt Cooler #1 (Limnology Shipping)
Items in 48-qt Cooler #2 (Fish Tissue Shipping)
Items in 48-qt Cooler #3
Items in Tub #1
Items in Tub #2 (Trap Net Accessories)
Items in Tub #3 (Gill Net Accessories)
Items in Tub #4
Items in Tub #5
Items in Tub #6
Items in Parts Tackle Box
D.O. Meter Kit in Soft Cooler
Items in Trucks
Information Management Items ,
B-2
B-3
B-4
B-4
B-4
B-5
B-6
B-6
B-6
.. B-7
B-8
B-8
B-8
B-8
.B-8
B-9
B-10
, B-10
..B-11
-------
LAKE-VISIT CHECKLISTS
Items in Forms File
Lake information packet for lake to be sampled; includes:
Benthic Sample Location and Collection Form
Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form
Lake Verification Form
Lake Profile Form
Sample Collection Form
Lake Assessment Form
Physical Habitat Characterization Form
Physical Habitat Comments Form
Blank Map Forms (Benthic, Verification, and Sketch Map)
Fish Tally Form
Fish Tally Continuation Form
Fish Length Form
Fish Tissue Tracking Form
Field notebook
Field Operations Manual
Taxonomic keys set
Sediment cores label sheet
Zooplankton label sheet
Fish tissue label sheet
Water chemistry label sheet
Chlorophyll label sheet
Voucher tag sheet
EMAP pamphlets
Sampling permit
Quick reference handbook
Shipping airbills
Number Needed
Each Lake
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
3
5 each
50
10
10
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 set
20
1
1
10
B-2
-------
s
M
T
W
T
F
S
Items in the Boat
Life vests
Anchor with 50-m line and
float
Bailing bucket
Air horn
Oars, pair
First aid kit
Spare tire (trailer)
Trailer straps
Transom plug
Bow light with good batteries
Stern light with good
batteries
Bow line, 5-m
Fuel tank with gas and oil
PVC pipe, 3-m length
Indiana trap nets
Beach seine
Short-haul line
Number Needed
Each Lake
3
1-2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 per expected
number of sets
1
1
B-3
-------
Items in 80-qt Cooler #1
Sonar unit with manual
Transducer with bracket and C-clamp
12-V wet cell battery (charged) in battery
case
GPS unit with manual, reference card, extra
battery pack
Inflatable viewing box
Items in 80-qt Cooler #2
Corer with 50-m line and messenger
Sediment core tubes
Ground rubber stoppers
Extruder pipe
Sectioning stage
Sectioning tube
Siphon with L fitting
Plastic container (with lid) with two 1-qt self-
sealing plastic bags
»
Items in 80-qt Cooler #3 (Shipping Cooler)
0.5-gal bottles or 1-gal bottles
Borate buffered formalin, 40 percent
Bleach, 1 qt
Vermiculite (or other absorbent), 4 qts
Cooler liner (30-qal qarbage bag)
1-qt self-sealing plastic bags with punched holes
1-gal self-sealing plastic bags with punched
holes
Butyl gloves
Safety glasses
Number Needed
Each Lake
1
1
1
1
1
Number Needed
Each Lake
1
2
4
1
1
1
1
1
Number Needed
Each Lake
4
1 gal
1
1
1
25
20
1 pair
2 pair
B-4
-------
Items in Cooler for Benthic Sampling
Sieve bucket
Plastic funnel
Rinse bottle, 500-mL
Screen top lid (60-mesh) for sample containers
Sample containers, 500-mL (marked at 400-mL)
Heavy-duty self-sealing plastic bags, 1 -gallon, labeled with station ID
Garbage bags, large kitchen size (for storing sample containers)
60-cc plastic syringe for dispensing formalin .
Carbonate buffered formalin solution
Surgical gloves
Large plastic tub
Number Needed
Each Lake
1
1
1
1
10
10 i
2
1
500 mL
2 pair
1
B-5
-------
Items in 48-qt Cooler #1 (Limnology Shipping)
Plastic container with lid
Syringes, labeled
Syringe valves
Surgical gloves
Cubitainer, 4-L
Ice in 1-gal self-sealingjDlastic bags
Cooler liner (30-gal garbage bag)
Items in 48-qt Cooler #2 (Fish Tissue Shipping)
Ice in 1-gal self-sealing plastic bags
Cooler liner (30-gal garbage bag)
Foil, 25 yards
1-qt self-sealing plastic bags
1-gal self-sealing plastic bags
Composite bags (30-gal garbage bags)
Items in 48-qt Cooler #3
Ice in 1-gal self -sealing plastic bags
Cooler liner (30-gal garbage bag)
Number
Needed Each
Lake
1
4
4
2 pair
2
6
1
Number
Needed Each
Lake
4
1
1
10
10
4
Number
Needed Each
Lake
4
1
B-6
-------
Items in Tub #1
Van Dorn with 3-m line, messenger
1 -L wash bottle (labeled) with distilled or deionized water (Dl)
Secchi disk
Sounding chain, 50-m with quick-clip
2-L bottle of sucrose solution
Parts tackle box (see below)
Chlorophyll tackle box:
Filter apparatus with filter installed
Hand pump with tubing
Box of filters (Whatman GF/F) in self-sealing plastic bag
Forceps in bagjwith filters
Graduated cylinders, 100-mL and 250-mL
1 0-cm squares of foil in self-sealing plastic bag
Zooplankton net bag:
Bongo net
Fine mesh and coarse-mesh buckets
Sample jars, 125-mL Nalgene (with formalin/sucrose solution)
Narcotization chamber
Alka Seltzer tablets
1 25-mL brown bottle with borate-buffered formalin, 40%
125-mL brown bottle with sucrose solution
60-mL syringe for dispensing formalin and sucrose solutions
Fmpty 1 PR-mi Nalf)pnA hnttlp<^
Number Needed
Each Lake
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 each
3
1
. 1
1 each
2
1
10
1
1
1
9
B-7
-------
Items in Tub #2 (Trap Net Accessories)
Anchors with 0.5-m line and quick-clips
Floats with 1 .5-m line and quick-clips
Floats with 4-m line and quick-clips
Net repair twine, roll
Items in Tub #3 (Gill Net Accessories)
Anchors with 0.5-m line and quick-clips or mesh bags to make
anchors
Floats with 1.5-m line and quick-clips
Line sections of 5-m (clips on both ends)
Line sections of 10-m (clips on both ends)
Line sections of 30-m (clips on both ends)
Items in Tub #4
Minnow traps with clips
Floats with 1 .5-m line and quick-clips
5-gal buckets
items in Tub #5
Livenets, with floats
Dip nets
Waders
Headlamps with qood batteries (size C)
Q-beam with pigtail adapter
12-V wet cell battery (charged) in battery case
Items in Tub #6
Swedish experimental gill nets
Fish measuring board
Number Needed
Each Lake
3 per each net
used
3 per each net
used
5
1
Number Needed
Each Lake
2 per net
3 per bottom set
8 per surface net
10
10
10
Number Needed
Each Lake
6
6
2
Number Needed
Each Lake
2
2
2 pair
3
1
1
Number Needed
Each Lake
1 per no. of sets
1
B-8
-------
Items in Parts Tackle Box
Leatherman or Swiss Army knife
Pencils (and sharpener)
Marker (permanent)
Extra sample labels
Alka Seltzer tablets
Syringe valves (in 1-qt self-sealing plastic bags)
Surgical gloves (in 1-qt self-sealing plastic bags)
Paper towels
Self -sealing plastic bags, 1-qt, 1-gal (in 1-qt self-sealing plastic bag)
Clear tape strips, box
Foil squares, 10-cm (in 1-qt self-sealing plastic bag)
Forceps, watchmakers (pointed)
Forceps, Teflon (flat)
Messenger (for Van Dorn or corer)
Field thermometer, alcohol
Surveyor's ribbon
Syringes
Batteries (AA, C, and D size)
Electrical tape, roll
Strapping tape, roll
Metric tape measure
Compass
Solar calculator
O ring (corer)
Insect repellent
Screwdriver for corer
Headlamp
Hole punch
Pocket magnifier
Cotter pins
Crescent wrench
Pliers i
"Cyalume" light sticks
Number Needed
Each Lake
1
5(1)
3
1 set
10
10 I
10 pair !.
1 roll • .
10
1
10 squares
1
1
1
2
1 roll
2
9 AA, 4C, 6D
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
6
1
1
6
B-9
-------
D.O. Meter Kit in Soft Cooler
Meter and manual
Cable and probe
Membrane kit and filling solution
Extra O-rings
Calibration chamber
Storage bottle
Number Needed
Each Lake
1
1
1
1
1
1
Items in Trucks
Spare tire
Jack
Lug wrench
Shovel
Saw
Axe
Come-along
Camping gear, set
Food supply
Drinking water supply
Tool kit
Tow strap or heavy rope
Battery charger
Jumper cables
Number Needed
Each Truck
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
B-10
-------
Information Management Items
Portable computer
Phone cord
Power supply
Power cord
Extra computer battery
Computer carrying case
Surge protector
Kodak printer
Printer power supply
Printer carrying case
Computer/printer connection cable
Printer cartridge
Bar code reader
Bar code power supply
Extension cord
Plug adaptor 3 to 2
Filament tape
Box sealing tape
Boxes of 3 1/2 disks, (10 each)
Packs of tape pads
Purple file containing sample labels and bar codes
Purple file containing blank labels
Manila file containing supply replenishment forms
Brown file containing weekly report forms
Large envelope containing all weather writing paper
Empty folders
Folder containing shipping and tracking paper backup
Computer and printer manual
User's Guide
Envelope containing overnight shipping airbills
Number
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
2
2
10
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
B-11
-------
-------
APPENDIX C
FIELD DATA FORMS
Field data forms are presented in the general order of their use at each lake:
1. Lake Verification Form
2. Lake Profile Form
3. Physical Habitat Characterization Form-Lakes
4. Physical Habitat Characterization Comment Form
5. Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form
6. Fish Tally Form-Lakes
7. Fish Tally Continuation Form-Lakes
8. . Fish Length Form-Lakes
9. Fish Tissue Sample Tracking Form-Lakes
10. Sample Collection Form-Lakes
11. Benthos Sample Location and Collection Form-Lakes
12. Lake Assessment Form
-------
-------
LAKE NAME:
DATE OF VISIT: / / VISIT*: 1 2
LAKE ID: _. L
TEAM ID (CIRCLE): 1 2 34 5 67 8 9 10 OTHER:.
MODE OF ACCESS: VEHICLE HIKE-IN AIRCRAFT
LAKE SHAPE COMPARES TO MAP? n YES o NO
LAKE VERIFIED BY (/ all that apply): n GPS a LOCAL CONTACT a SIGNS
a Other (Describe Here):
a ROADS aTopo. MAP
a NOT VERIFIED (Explain in Comments)
COORDINATES
LATITUDE (dd mm ss)
North
LONGITUDE (ddd mm ss)
West
TYPE OF
GPS FIX
SIGNAL
QUALITY
GEOMETRIC
QUALITY
Are GPS Coordinates
w/i ±1 min. of map?
Map:
Launch Site:
Index Site:
n 2D D 3D
P2D n 3D
DYES
n YES
nNO
nNO
LAKE
SAMPLED?
n YES n NO
REASON NOT SAMPLED (EXPLAIN BELOW): n NOT VISITED o NON-TARGET D INACCESSIBLE D OTHER
Explanation:
CHECK HERE IF
EXPLANATION IS
CONTINUED ON BACK.
DESCRIBE LAUNCH SITE, LAKE DIRECTIONS, AND ADD COMMENTS ON BACK
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):.
Rev. 3/95 FLDFRMS.95(Q)
Lake Verification Form - 1
-------
LAKi ID:,
LAKE VlRIPrCATION FORM
DIRECTIONS TO lAKj & UAllNCM MM
IJVUNCH
GENEBAI,
. ,.- v'" " '•<"'"'?.'•;•>'',/„ '«/~',/^'^yg-v
EXPLANATION FOR NOT SARIPLINCi "^^'•" i A~ "*:<
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):.
Rav. 3«5 FLDFRMS.95(G)
Lake Verification Form - 2
-------
LAKE NAME:
DATE OF PROFILE:
LAKE ID:
SITE ID (circle): INDEX OTHER:
TEAM ID (circle): 1
8
10
OTHER:
PRECIPITATION (circle): NONE LIGHT HEAVY
SURFACE CONDITIONS (circle): FLAT RIPPLES CHOPPY WHITECAPS
ODOR? n NO D YES
Description:
SCUM? n No D YES
Description:
INDEX SITE DEPTH:
M
CHECK (/) IF SONAR NOT USED:
FLAG:
COMMENTS:
SURFACE
SURFACE
(Pup.)
Is THE DUPLICATE O, READING WITHIN ±0.5 MG/L OF THE INITIAL SURFACE READING?
n YES n NO
CHECK HERE IF ADDITIONAL PROFILE MEASUREMENTS ARE RECORDED ON THE REVERSE SIDE:
If the site depth is <; 3 m, take readings at the surface, every 0.5 m, and 1 m above the bottom.
b METALIMNION = The region of the profile where the temperature changes at a rate of 1 °C or greater per meter of depth.
Indicate the depth of the top of the metalimnion with a "T," and the bottom of the metalimnion (when the rate of change
becomes less than 1 °C per meter) with a "B." After the metalimnion is encountered, take readings every 1 m until bottom of the
metalimnion is reached. Record the depth of the top of the metalimnion on the Benthos Sample Location and Collection Form.
FLAG CODES: K = No MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVATION MADE; U = SUSPECT MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVATION; Q = UNACCEPTABLE QC CHECK ASSOCIATED
WITH MEASUREMENT; F1, F2, ETC. = MISCELLANEOUS FLAGS ASSIGNED BY EACH FIELD CREW. EXPLAIN ALL FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION ON BACK OF FORM.
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rev. 3/95 FLDFRMS.95(G)
Lake Profile Form - 1
-------
X V*f
LAKE ID:
LAKE PROFILE FORM (continued)
; , • . ; , ' •: •: . OXYGEN, METER CALIBRATION INFORMATION^ ' ' ' ^Xff-^r &^/ 1
SALINITY KNOB AT "O-FRESH": LJ MEMBRANE CHECK L-l ELECTRONIC ZERO d
CALIBRATION CHAMBER TEMPERATURE: °c
LAKE ELEVATION
(FROM TOPO. MAP OR ALTIMETER): FT
THE CALIBRATION VALUE IS OBTAINED BY MULTIPLYING THE SATURATED O2
CONCENTRATION TIMES AN ELEVATION CORRECTION FACTOR (BOTH VALUES ARE
OBTAINED FROM TABLES PRESENT ON THE BACK OF THE METER, OR PROVIDED IN THE
MANUFACTURER'S OPERATIONS MANUAL). ADJUST THE METER READING TO THE
CALIBRATION VALUE.
SATURATED O2 @ CHAMBER TEMP.:
RED LINE: 1— 1
MG/L
ELEVATION CORRECTION FACTOR: x
CALIBRATION VALUE:
MG/L
FLAG COMMENTS
1; ,; '»- .•. i. ijii -,.i ^ ; ; i » \ > A, „ ^.i r.w, **•» ***,', i#?>j&n "~^>^\^&'>-*ii.$if^f^^&^^^^^ti^ '
• • ' -• - •• - • ' ••• '" DISSOLVED OXYGEN & TIMPERATUR.^ PRQFlif%ont>mit^, 4 A «^v^^S& •
• ..; i • „ :, : •" ' . • •••. ' '.- . ; i : , . , ;;r;r;;:.:..For depths >15 m, continua reconiing al 5-m 3u4iwal^ " , ' " l\W\- 4^ "-
DEPTH (m)
•:.! :!; ' y&,X
02
(mg/L)
xx.x
TEMP.
<°C)
XX.X
FLA
G
META-
UMNION
(T,Bf
DEPTH (m)
XX.X
'% ]
OwtfP
xxj«
, x . Vf1
Ti«P»p.
f><& ?V
,/ ^^4 ?«^
XX.X '?
&i^r-J
i I* £ A
<£ ?\ * •"#
WtfaJf
%^B*WT
^¥i^
^k»f
DEPTH &
FLAG
*',,'<''"* *• ^f*" JS^^^'V^*^"^
COMMENTS ' _ ' „ ^!i^A ^C^ ,7.
»' j v % C > ^'( ,.% 4 ^
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rov.3/95 FLDFRMS,95(G)
Lake Profile Form - 2
-------
LAKE NAME:
DATE OF VISIT:
VISIT #: 1 2
LAKE ID:
TEAM ID (circle):
23 456789 10
OTHER:.
VEGETATION TYPE
N=NONE, D= DECID., C=CONIF., M=MIXED
CANOPY LAYER (> 5 M )
UNDERSTORY (0.5 TO 5 M)
CANOPY LAYER
(> 5 M HEIGHT)
TREES a 0.3 M DBH
TREES < 0.3 M DBH
UNDERSTORY
(HEIGHT=0.5T05M)
WOODY SHRUBS & SAPLINGS
TALL HERBS, FORBS, & GRASSES
GROUND COVER
(< 0.5 M HEIGHT)
WOODY SHRUBS & SEEDLINGS
HERBS, FORBS, & GRASSES
STANDING WATER OR INUNDATED VEGETATION
BARREN OR BUILDINGS
SHORELINE
SUBSTRATE
ZONE
BEDROCK (> 4000 MM; BIGGER THAN ACAB)
BOULDERS (2SO - 4000 MM; BASKETBALL - CAR SIZE)
COBBLE/GRAVEL (2 - 250 MM; LADYBUQ - BASKETBALL SIZE)
LOOSE SAND (O.OS TO 2 MM; GRITTY BETWEEN FINGERS)
OTHER FINE SOIL/SEDIMENT (< o.oe MM; NOTGRrmr)
• VEGETATED
OTHER (EXPLAIN IN COMMENTS)
BANK
FEATURES
(WITHIN PLOT)
ANGLE: V = NEAR VERTICAL/UNDERCUT, S = 30-75°, G =<30°
VERTICAL DISTANCE (M) FROM WATERLINE TO HIGH-WATER MARK
HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (M) FROM WATERLINE TO HIGH-WATER MARK
BUILDINGS
COMMERCIAL
PARK FACILITIES
DOCKS/BOATS
WALLS, DIKES, OR REVETMENTS
LITTER, TRASH DUMP, OR LANDFILL
ROADS'OR RAILROAD
Row CROPS
PASTURE OR HAYFIELD
ORCHARD
LAWN
OTHER (EXPLAIN IN COMMENTS)
FLAG CODES: K = MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVATION NOT OBTAINED; U = SUSPECT MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVATION;
F1, F2, ETC. = MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY EACH HELD CREW. EXPLAIN ALL FLAGS ON SEPARATE COMMENTS FORM.
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rev. 3/95 FLDFRMS.95(Q)
Physical Habitat Characterization Form
-------
1 LA& ib. L PHYSICAL HABlYAT CHARACtfeRfeifeN ro«Wi
' NEW STATION ID (if needed):
1 III i ill i I III III ll hi HI i Mil "llnlli'l (I » ' 1 ' IK » ••
LITTORAL ZONE STATION IE>;
STATION DEPTH (M) AT 1 0 M OFFSHORE
SURFACE FILM TYPE (S=SCUM, A=ALGAL MAT, P=OlLY, N=NONE/OTHER)
A
i
-c i
^n)
.v\
louec
*
J>* *'*,
•f
/"/$%,/&
/ t
,*•
m
,;('•
.*S
• " BOTTOM SUBSTRATE: AHEALCOVERAGE:OaAB5EOTl*SPARSE(<10^)2»^^
BEDROCK (>4000 MM; LARGER THAN A CAR)
BOULDERS (250 - 4000 MM; BASKETBALL - CAR SIZE)
COBBLE (64 - 250 MM; TENNIS BALL - BASKETBALL SIZE)
GRAVEL (2 TO 64 MM; LADYBUG TO TENNIS BALL SIZE)
SAND (0.06 TO 2 MM; GRITTY BETWEEN FINGERS)
SILT. CLAY, OR MUCK (< 0.06 MM; NOT GRITTY)
WOODY DEBRIS
COLOR (BL=BLACK, GY=GRAY, BR=BROWN, RD=RED, N=NONEOR OTHER)
ODOR (S=HjS, A=ANOXIC, P=OIL, C=CHEMICAL, N=NONE)
; MA^OPh^ffe'ABSL'dS^SSS ^ABSENT^SPARSEkW*)
SUBMERGENT
EMERGENT
FLOATING
TOTAL WEED COVER
Do MACROPHYTES EXTEND LAKEWARD? (Y OR N)?
FJSH COVER O=ABSENT I=PRESENT BUT SPARSE ^PRESEm^Woo^^^^^tti^'^^(^''''f^^^l'^M'fS"^^Kl,'^
AQUATIC WEEDS
SNAGS > 0.3 M DIAMETER
BRUSH OR WOODY DEBRIS < 0.3 M DIAMETER
INUNDATED LIVE TREES > 0.3 M DIAMETER
OVERHANGING VEGETATION < 1 M ABOVE SURFACE
ROCK LEDGES OR SHARP DROPOFFS
BOULDERS
HUMAN STRUCTURES (E.G., DOCKS, LANDINGS, PILINGS, RIPRAP, ETC.)
1 ' •; " ; t « j'* ,*"< % "*", J?t i*43>)?§?^^^'S
LnroRAL FJSH HABrfATctAssij^CATlfeQN ,,,s'1 . *. .,,«../! :r7 . ...
DISTURBANCE (H=HUMAN N=NATURAL M=MIXED)
COVER CLASS (C=COVER, O=OPEN, M=MIXED)
COVER TYPE (A=AminoA!. F=Fiu. V=VEO. W=Wooor B=BOULDEHS M=MIXED N=NONE)
SUBSTRATE (M-HuafMucK, S=SANO/GRAVEL, C=COBBLE/BOULDER, B=BEDROCK)
GEAR (G=G«J.NET,T=TRAPNET, S=SEINE, O=NONE)
GEAR LOCATION (DIST. & DIR. TO NEAREST REPRES. MACROHABITAT)
Sfti*'*
FLAG COOES: K = MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVATION NOT OBTAINED; U= SUSPECT MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVATION;
F11 F2, ETC. = MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY EACH FIELD CREW. EXPLAIN ALL FLAGS ON SEPARATE PHYSICAL CHARACTERIZATION HABITAT COMMENTS FORM.
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rov.3/95 FLDFRMS.95(G)
Physical Habitat Characterization Form - 2
-------
LAKE ID:
VISIT*: 1 2
TEAM ID (circle): 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 OTHER-
FLAG CODES: l\ = NO MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVATION ATTEMPTED; U = SUSPECT MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVATION;
F1, F2, ETC. = MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY EACH FIELD CREW.
CHECK HERE IF INFORMATION IS RECORDED ON OTHER SIDE OF FORM
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rev. 3/95 FLDFRMS.95(G)
Physical Habitat Characterization Comment Form -1
-------
PHYSICAL HABITAT CHARACTERIZATION
COMMENTS FOftR* (ftonfiouedj. . . . .*
STATION
.•• ID
SECTION OF FORM
MEASUREMENT OR
VARIABLE
CHECK HERE IF AN ADDITIONAL COMMENTS FORM IS USED
FLAG COOES: K = NO MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVATION ATTEMPTED; U = SUSPECT MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVATION;
F1, F2, ETC.= MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY EACH RELD CREW.
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rev, 3/95 FLDFRMS.95{G)
Physical Habitat Characterization Comment Form - 2
-------
' ., PHYSICAL HA8I?AT^KEtdH MAP FORM-LAKE^
LAKE NAME:
VISIT #: 1
TEAM ID (circle):
10 OTHER:
Sketch and label riparian, in-lake, shoreline, and littoral fish habitats around the lake, using codes below. To identify littoral fish habitats on the
map, compose a four-character code as: (Disturbance) {Cover class) (Cover type) (Substrate type). EXAMPLE: NCVS for Natural, Cover,
Vegetated, Sand/Gravel. ^
RIPARIAN AND IN-LAKE CODES: WET = Wetland; BCH = Beach; RSD = Residences; PRK = Park; FST = Forest; ALT = Altered shoreline; DCK
= Dock(s); NINA = Marina; CRP = Cropland; PTR = Pasture; LFL = Landfill/Dump; IND = Industry; MNG = Mining; LGG = Logging; FLM =
Floating macrophytes; SBM = Submerged macrophytes; EMM = Emergent macrophytes; SHL = Shoal or Rocks.
LITTORAL FISH HABITAT CODES: (DISTURBANCE): Human, Natural, Mixed. (COVER CLASS): Cover, Open, Mixed. (COVER TYPE): Artificial
structure, Fill, Vegetated, Woody, Boulders, Mixed, None. (SUBSTRATE TYPE): Mud/Muck, Sand/Gravel. Cobble/Boulders. Bedrock.
MAP OF FISH SAMPLING SITES ON BACK
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):,
Rev. 3/95 FLDFRMS.95(G)
Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form - 1
-------
LAKE ID:.
• - -- , .---,-.- -r •,.
PHYSICAL HABITAT SKITCH MAP f-OKm^^tnimKi yiH
USE f HIS MAP TO L6CAT1B LrrrORA\. MACRCJ^A^lfAl
RECORD FISH SAMPLING STATIONS AND GEAR TYPE
(G a GtLL NET, T = TRAP NET, M = MINNOW TRAP, B = BEACH SEINE, S = SHORT SEINE. EXAMPLE: F1G, F2T, ETC.).
IF A SITE IS SELECTED FOR ADDITIONAL STANDARD PROTOCOL OR JUDGEMENT SAMPLING, ADD AN "X" OR " J " TO THE STATION AND GEAR TYPE CODES.
EXAMPLE; F10GX,F4BJ,ETC.
MACROHABITAT CLASSIFICATION ANP
MACROHAB.
CLASS (XXXX)
% EXTENT(S) AND TOTAL
STATIONS
COMMENTS
TOTAL = %
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):.
,3fiJ5 FLOFRMS.95(G)
Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form - 2
-------
LAKE NAME:
VISIT*: 1
LAKE ID:
TEAM ID (circle): 1 2 3 4 s 678910 OTHER:,
NEAREST P-HAB STATION (A <• J, X):
D1ST. & DIR. FROM STATION:
SITE ID: F
START CREW INITIALS:
END CREW INITIALS:
START DATE:
START TIME:
END DATE:
END TIME:
MACROHAB. CLASS (FROM SKETCH MAP FORM): .
MICROHAB. CLASS (FOR RSHING SITE):
ISOTHERMAL
EPILIMNION
METALIMNION
HYPOLIMNION
GILL NET
TRAP NET MINNOW TRAP
BEACH SEINE
SHORT SEINE
OTHER (SPECIFY):
LITTORAL MIDWATER/
SURFACE
BOTTOM
TOTAL AREA SEINED :.
TOTAL NUMBER OF SEINE HAULS =
FISHING DEPTHS:
MINIMUM:
M
MAXIMUM:
M
COMMENTS:
CHECK HERE IF NO FISH WERE COLLECTED:
JAR ID (Barcode):
TAG ID:
Common Name: ,
Adult
TOTAL
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
Juvenile
TOTAL
Common Name:
Adult
TOTAL
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
Juvenile
TOTAL
SPECIES CODE:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
YOY
TOTAL
SPECIES CODE:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
YOY
TOTAL
FLAG:
. MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
FLAG:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL): .
Rev. 3/95 FLDFRMS.95(Q)
Fish Tally Form • Lakes -1
-------
- ' ' *•' ' X V/ "i< f"f #> ^ * l$*jfl&'*J>*>t%r*
» LAKE to; ' ' 't " ' PISH TALLY FORM (continued) faswufj- ' .' . Ttefr^VT/-' &'
Common Name:
Adult
TOTAL
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
SPECIES CODE:
Juvenile
TOTAL
Common Name:
Adult
TOTAL
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
YOY
TOTAL
SPECIES CODE:
Juvenile
TOTAL
Common Name:
Adult
TOTAL
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
Juvenile
TOTAL
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
YOY
TOTAL
SPECIES CODE:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
FLAG:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
FLAG:
MUSEUM!
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
FLAG:
YOY
TOTAL
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
(P>5 SPECIES ARE COLLECTED, CHECK HERE AND USE A TALLY CONTINUATION FORM
IS THERE EVIDENCE OF STOCKING (circle)?
SPECIES CODE
ANOMALY/
STOCKING CODE
YES NO I
#OF
FISH
FLAG
SPECIES CODE-
* • * //.. K'%4
^^OMAW^^/i
', SirbcKwsl^CODEf
"&. 'ft
-------
4 . <• „> <• "
FISH TALLY CONTINUATION
LAKE ID:
SITE ID: F
VISIT #: 1 2
JAB ID (Barcode):
TAG ID:
Common Name:
Adult
TOTAL
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
SPECIES CODE:
Juvenile
TOTAL
Common Name: ',
Adult
TOTAL
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
Juvenile
TOTAL
Common Name:
Adult
TOTAL
MUSEUM .
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
Juvenile
TOTAL
Common Name:
Adult
TOTAL
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
Juvenile
TOTAL
Common Name:
Adult
TOTAL
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
FLAG:
YOY
TOTAL
SPECIES CODE:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
YOY
TOTAL
SPECIES CODE:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
YOY
TOTAL-
SPECIES CODE:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
YOY
TOTAL
SPECIES CODE:
Juvenile
TOTAL
Common Name:
Adult
TOTAL
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
Juvenile
TOTAL
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
YOY
TOTAL
SPECIES CODE:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
YOY
TOTAL
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
FLAG:
*
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
FLAG:
'
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
FLAG:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
FLAG:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
FLAG:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
CHECK HERE IF INFORMATION IS RECORDED ON OTHER SIDE OF FORM:
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL): _
Rev. 3/95 FLDFRMS.95(G)
Fish Tally Continuation Form -1
-------
:;;:: " - ~ '<»'_, t ' r< '"''*< '"(L ";$#^,&J^%M&
LAKEJO: L FISH TALLY CONTINUATION FORM (continued) SrfSttfc F ; ' .N r/r,...^ 'WWl^' ^5®%"
Common Name:
Adult
TOTAL
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
Juvenile
TOTAL
Common Name:
Adult
TOTAL
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
Juvenile
TOTAL
Common Name:
Adult
TOTAL
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
Juvenile
TOTAL .
SPECIES CODE:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
YOY
TOTAL
SPECIES CODE:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
YOY
TOTAL
SPECIES CODE:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
YOY
TOTAL
FLAG:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
FLAG:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
FLAG:
MUSEUM
# MEASURED
FOR LENGTH:
CHECK HERE IF AN ADDITIONAL CONTINUATION FORM IS REQUIRED:
SPECIES CODE
ANOMALY/
STOCKING CODE
#OF
FISH
FtAG
.
SPECIES coof. •
i ** v. * *• :
"( ,"< AdOteftftg; |;S;
STOCKING CODE:'
J< tnkml$.
'JS^ffir
ANOMALY/STOCKING CODES: D = Deformities; E = Eroded fins; L = Lesions or ulcers; T = Tumors; F = Fungus;
X = Multiple D,E,L,T anomalies; B = Blind in one or both eyes; K = Emaciated; M = Excessive mucus;
P = Heavy infestation of external parasites; Z = Other (explain in comments); S = Stocking.
FLAG
COMMENTS
FLAG CODES: K = NO MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVATION MADE; U = SUSPECT MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVATION;
Q 3 UNACCEPTABLE QC CHECK ASSOCIATED WITH MEASUREMENT; F1, F2, ETC. = MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY EACH FIELD CREW.
EXPLAIN ALL FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION.
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rav.3/95 FLDFRMS.95(G)
Fish Tally Continuation Form - 2
-------
•••>**< >.,> , i* *" °^ ^ >' A » \ >/j,vs, ""\^. S -** ** >> s •* 'A? *>s'
-,.*--- • ~ r ^%,' FISH LlMGmEORM-LAKES ,- /-JX ^ ;*'«*,«J»Ad6. ' - ^ , %" ?'
LAKE NAME: VISIT #: 1 2
LAKEID: L TEAM ID (circle): 123456 7 8 9 10 OTHER:
'^'-^•^)\-Sv ^.^ii'^'C" s&i-t f
»:M'?^;C%x,
:^".~>i'S^«?v*i?.?
^fl-^Spf
S;^ilfffjD'|$f
*"!''45".s'j5'-'^^><""'>y
^Sl¥ 's>'^£V^ffc^ -^x>**-''f^'^vj
/^ ,ScS*%'' o ^??4. ' " ^ OAJO; ^V-^'^r
< y?^&^$^f?&'?r,'$ijfS &$ot'Z&^\'**?'
,%^^i5>T5^^JJ^^S&
,^??^^1*
'fj f ^•r-., *'* S'''?^^' ^
^•,'^V*, f<" '•&??•?&
;«fe^i|?"
1
^<$i?
;pS"J,^
^ s-p^
K
w
CHECK HERE IF ADDITIONAL DATA ARE RECORDED ON REVERSE SIDE:
*A = ADULT; J = JUVENILE; AND Y = YOUNG OF YEAR . ' _
FLAG CODES: K = NO MEASUREMENT COLLECTED; U = SUSPECT MEASUREMENT; F1.F2, ETC. = MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY
FIELD CREW. EXPLAIN ALL FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION.
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rev. 3/95 FLDFRMS.95(G)
Fish Length Form - Lakes - 1
-------
tj\K!EID: ' I- '" FISH LENGTH FORM (continued) ^ > *W „ ._ ^^S^wfMmA^L
COMMON NAME
TOTAL
LENGTH
{mm}
AGE <
CLASS >
«*.*.«....
*%*
f^\
'^i^M^^
CHECK HERE IF AN ADDITIONAL FISH LENGTH FORM IS USED FOR THIS LAKE:
* A = ADULT; J = JUVENILE; AND Y = YOUNG OF YEAR.
FLAG CODES: K = NO MEASUREMENT COLLECTED; U = SUSPECT MEASUREMENT; F1. F2, ETC. = MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY
FIELD CREW. EXPLAIN ALL FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION.
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL) :_^
Rev. 3/95 FLDFRMS.95(G)
Fish Length Form - Lakes - 2
-------
FiSHTISSUE SAMfOE TRACKING FORM-LAKES ',
LAKE NAME:
DATE PREPARED:
/ /
VISIT*: 1 2
LAKE ID: L TEAM ID (circle): 1 2 34 5 67 8 9 10 OTHER:
£fSpS-
«-^r»
# OF STATIONS FROM WHICH FISH TISSUE CANDIDATE SPECIMENS WERE COLLECTED:
TOTAL # OF STATIONS SAMPLED:
CHECK HERE IF MORE DATA ARE RECORDED ON OTHER SIDE: _
FLAG CODES: K = NO SAMPLE COLLECTED; U = SUSPECT SAMPLE; F1. F2, ETC. = MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY HELD CREW.
EXPLAIN ALL FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION.
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):.:
Rev. 3/95 FLDFRMS.95(G)
Fish Tissue Sample Tracking Form - Lakes - 1
-------
FISH TISSUE SAMPLE TRACKING FORM
^. f ', » ^/' *y« 'ifj-v/',
PAJ?JiB£ <' ! \,fl "
SPECIES CODE
COMMON NAME
TOTAL
LENQTH
WOQHT
.
6
8
11
'«» 12
14
1$
* 10
ft tr
18
19
20
LINE*
FLAG
COMMENT
FLAG CODES: K = NO SAMPLE COLLECTED; U = SUSPECT SAMPLE; F1. F2, ETC. = MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY FIEELD CREW.
EXPLAIN ALL FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION.
REVIEWED BY(|NIITIAL):_
RQV. 3t35 FLDFRMS.95(G)
Fish Tissue Sample Tracking Form -.Lakes - 2
-------
LAKE NAME:
DATE OF COLLECTION: / / VISIT #: 1 2
LAKE ID:
SITE ID (circle): INDEX OTHER:
TEAM ID (circle): 1234567 8 9 10 OTHER:
COARSE
R1
FINE
R1
Collected at (circle): INDEX OTHER
If OTHER, record direction and distance from INDEX site:
TOP
R1
BOTTOM
R1
FLAG CODES: K = No MEASUREMENT OR SAMPLE COLLECTED; U = SUSPECT MEASUREMENT OR SAMPLE;
F1. F2, ETC. = MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY EACH FIELD CREW. EXPLAIN ALL FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION.
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rev. 3/95 FLDFRMS.9S(<3)
Sample Collection Form -Lakes • t
-------
-------
BENTfctOS SAt^PLELOCATIQII ^egLL
LAKE NAME:
DATE OF COLLECTION: / / , VISIT #: 1
LAKE ID:
TEAM ID (circle): 12345 6 7 8 9 10 OTHER:
'^ **-
COMMENTS:
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rev. 3/95 FLDFRMS.95(G)
Benthos Sample Location and Collection Form - Lakes - 1
-------
I'.'. BENTHOS SAMPLlLOCATlbtA^t>COLL£CTIdtfF§^
LAKE ID; L
.'•• • ". '"" - • RE(
SAMPLE ID * (Barcode)
50RD SAMPLING STABTTlMii
STATION
ID
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DEPTH
COLLECTED
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
;
SUBSTRATE
TYPE3
DATE OF COLLECTION: / /
RECORD PROCESSING COMMON TIME: :
FLA<3b
;% '* " . tomla^''-'^' 'ir
SUBSTRATE TYPE CODES: G = GRAVEL; S = SAND; C = SILT CLAY, OR MUCK; W = WOODY DEBRIS; O = OTHER
(DESCRIBE IN COMMENTS)
FLAG CODES: K = NO SAMPLE COLLECTED; U = SUSPECT SAMPLE; F1 . F2, ETC.= MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY EACH FIELD
CREW. EXPLAIN ALL FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION.
ZEBRA MUSSEL OBSERVATION AND 6&uMta&_.. **????$
STATION OBSERVED (Y/N)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAUNCH
OTHER
COLLECTED (Y/N)
{JOMWKNfS "^ '"'*<,<' '-',"'*»
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rov. 3/95 FLDFRMS.95(G)
Benthos Sample Location and Collection Form - Lakes - 2
-------
LAKE NAME:
DATE OF VISIT:
VISIT*: 1
LAKE ID:
TEAM ID (circle): 1.2 34 567 8910 OTHER:
RESIDENCES
MAINTAINED LAWNS
CONSTRUCTION
PIPES, DRAINS
TREATMENT PLANT
LANDFILL, DUMPING
PARKS, CAMPGROUNDS, BEACHES
PRIMITIVE PARKS, CAMPING, BEACHES
RESORTS
MARINAS
TRASH/LITTER
SURFACE FILMS, SCUMS, OR SLICKS
. CROPLAND
. PASTURE
.LIVESTOCK
INDUSTRIAL PLANTS
MINES/QUARRIES
POWER LINES
, POWER PLANTS
LOGGING
EVIDENCE OF FIRE
ODORS
MACROPHYTE CONTROL
_ LIMING
DRINKING WATER TREATMENT
ANGLING PRESSURE
HYDRO-LOGIC LAKE TYPE.
OUTLET DAMS
Low ELEVATION FLIGHT HAZARDS
MOTOR BOAT DENSITY
GENERAL AESTHETICS
SWIMMABILITY
LAKE LEVEL CHANGES
Q RESERVOIR
DRAINAGE (OUTLETS PRESENT)
D SEEPAGE (No OUTLETS OBSERVED)
DNONE
E3 ARTIFICIAL
LJ NATURAL •
DYES
n
No
DHIGH
D
Low
CD RESTRICTED
D
BANNED
CD PLEASANT
Q SOMEWHAT PLEASANT
LJ UNPLEASANT
DGOOD
DFAIR
NOTSWIMMABLE
DZERO
LJ ELEVATION CHANGE=_
FOREST/SHRUB
AGRICULTURE
OPEN GRASS
WETLAND
BARREN(BEACH)
DEVELOPED
SHORELINE MODS. (DOCKS, RIPRAP)
D RARE( 75%)
D RARE( 75%)
DRARE(7S%)
DRARE(75%)
D RARE(<5%)
D SPARSE (5 TO 25%)
D MODERATE (25 TO 75%)
D EXTENSIVE (>75%)
D RARE(75%)
DRARE(75%)
MACROPHYTE DENSITY
EMERGENT/FLOATING COVERAGE (% LAKE AREA)
SUBMERGENT COVERAGE (% LAKE AREA)
CH ABSENT EH SPARSE
LJ MODERATE D DENSE
Do TO 25% D 25 TO 50% D 50 TO 75% D >
75%
Do TO 25% D 25 TO 50% D 50 TO 75% D >75%
DESCRIPTION:
(Continued on reverse side)
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rev. 3/95 FLDFRMS.95(G)
Lake Assessment Form - 1
-------
LAKE ASSESSMENT FQRlvt (continued)
QUALITATIVE ASS^^
TROPHIC STATE Q OUGOTROPWC
LH MESOTROPHIC
EH EUTROPHK
EH HYPEREUTROPHIC
VISUAL ASSESSMENT:
ALGAL ABUNDANCE & TYPE:
NUTRIENT STATUS:
OTHER:
FISHABILITY: Q EXCELLENT
EH GOOD
DFAIR
D POOR
CoNomoNs:
LOCAL CONTACTS:
OBSERVATIONS:
OVERALL BIOTIC INTEGRITY Q EXCELLENT
Ej IMPACTED
EH SEVERELY IMPACTED
GENERAL ASSESSMENT:
WK.OUFE OBSERVED:
WATERaODY CHARACTER (CIRCLE ONE)
COMMENTS:
•&VS. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1998 -650-001/80177
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):.
Rav.3/95 FLDFRMS.95(G)
Lake Assessment Form - 2
------- |